Product SiteDocumentation Site

Koha 3.16

Koha 3.16 Manual (en)

Edição 1

Nicole C. Engard

ByWater Solutions/BibLibre

Nota Legal

This manual is licensed under the GNU General Public License, version 3 or later
Learn more about this license in the GPL3 Appendix
Published: 2014
1. Introduction
1.1. Koha Basics
1.2. Koha Recommendations
1.3. Using this Manual
1.4. Contributing to the Manual
2. Administração
2.1. Configurações globais do sistema
2.1.1. Aquisições
2.1.2. Administração
2.1.3. Autoridades
2.1.4. Catalogação
2.1.5. Circulação
2.1.6. Criadores
2.1.7. Enhanced Content
2.1.8. I18N/L10N
2.1.9. Uso local
2.1.10. Logs
2.1.11. OPAC
2.1.12. Usuários
2.1.13. Pesquisa
2.1.14. Periódicos
2.1.15. Staff Client
2.1.16. Ferramentas
2.1.17. Web Services
2.2. Parâmetros básicos
2.2.1. Bibliotecas & Grupos
2.2.2. Tipo de Material
2.2.3. Valores autorizados
2.3. Patrons & Circulation
2.3.1. Categorias de usuários
2.3.2. Circulation and Fine Rules
2.3.3. Tipos de atributos de usuários
2.3.4. Limites de transferência entre bibliotecas
2.3.5. Matriz de custo de transporte
2.3.6. Alertas de circulação de itens
2.3.7. Cidades
2.4. Catalog Administration
2.4.1. Planilhas bibliográficas MARC
2.4.2. Mapeamento Koha para MARC
2.4.3. Keywords to MARC Mapping
2.4.4. Teste do modelo Bibliográfico MARC
2.4.5. Tipos de autoridade
2.4.6. Fontes de classificação
2.4.7. Regras de concordância
2.4.8. OAI Sets Configuration
2.5. Aquisições
2.5.1. Moedas e taxas de câmbio
2.5.2. Orçamentos
2.5.3. Fundos
2.6. Parâmetros adicionais
2.6.1. Servidores Z39.50
2.6.2. Você quis dizer
3. Ferramentas
3.1. Usuários e circulação
3.1.1. Listas de usuários
3.1.2. Comentários
3.1.3. Patron Import
3.1.4. Mensagens & Comprovantes
3.1.5. Disparar mensagens de atraso
3.1.6. Criador de cartões de usuários
3.1.7. Usuários (tornar anônimo ou excluir)
3.1.8. Edição de usuários em lote
3.1.9. Tag Moderation
3.1.10. Upload Patron Images
3.1.11. Rotating Collections
3.2. Catálogo
3.2.1. Modificação de itens em lote
3.2.2. Exclusão de itens em lote
3.2.3. Export Data (MARC & Authorities)
3.2.4. Inventário
3.2.5. Gerador de etiquetas
3.2.6. Criar Etiqueta Rápida
3.2.7. Templates MARC de transformação
3.2.8. Stage MARC Records for Import
3.2.9. Staged MARC Record Management
3.2.10. Upload Local Cover Image
3.3. Additional Tools
3.3.1. Calendário
3.3.2. CSV Profiles
3.3.3. Log Viewer
3.3.4. Notícias
3.3.5. Task Scheduler
3.3.6. Quote of the Day (QOTD) Editor
4. Usuários
4.1. Add a new patron
4.2. Adicionar um Funcionário
4.3. Add a Statistical Patron
4.4. Duplicar um usuário
4.5. Add Patron Images
4.6. Editando Usuários
4.7. Managing Patron Self Edits
4.8. Patron Permissions
4.8.1. Configurando Permissões de Usuários
4.8.2. Permissões de Usuário Definidas
4.9. Patron Information
4.9.1. Empréstimo
4.9.2. Detalhes
4.9.3. Multas
4.9.4. Lista de circulação
4.9.5. Histórico de circulação
4.9.6. Log de alterações
4.9.7. Correspondências
4.9.8. Estatísticas
4.9.9. Arquivos
4.9.10. Sugestões de aquisição
4.10. Pesquisar Usuários
5. Circulação
5.1. Check Out (Issuing)
5.1.1. Checking Items Out
5.1.2. Mensagens de empréstimo
5.1.3. Avisos de empréstimos
5.2. Renewing
5.3. Check In (Returning)
5.3.1. Devolvendo itens em
5.3.2. Mensagens de devolução
5.4. Mensagens de circulação
5.4.1. Configuração de Mensagens
5.4.2. Adicionando uma mensagem
5.4.3. Visualizando mensagens
5.5. Reservas
5.5.1. Reservando na Interface administrativa
5.5.2. Gerenciar reservas
5.5.3. Recebendo reservas
5.6. Transferências
5.7. Set Library
5.8. Catalogação expressa
5.9. Relatórios de circulação
5.9.1. Fila de reservas
5.9.2. Reservas a confirmar
5.9.3. Reservas aguardando retirada
5.9.4. Taxas de reservas
5.9.5. Transferências a receber
5.9.6. Atrasos
5.9.7. Atraso com multas
5.10. Tracking In house Use
5.11. In Processing / Book Cart Locations
5.12. Self Checkout
5.13. Offline Circulation Utilities
5.13.1. Offline Circulation in Koha
5.13.2. Firefox Plugin
5.13.3. Offline Circ Tool for Windows
6. Catalogação
6.1. Bibliographic Records
6.1.1. Adding Records
6.1.2. Adding Analytic Records
6.1.3. Editing Records
6.1.4. Duplicating Records
6.1.5. Merging Records
6.1.6. Deleting Records
6.2. Item Records
6.2.1. Adding Items
6.2.2. Editing Items
6.2.3. Item Information
6.2.4. Moving Items
6.2.5. Deleting Items
6.2.6. Histórico de circulação do material
6.3. Autoridades
6.3.1. Adicionando autoridades
6.3.2. Pesquisando autoridades
6.3.3. Editando autoridades
6.3.4. Merging Authorities
6.4. Cataloging Guides
6.4.1. Bibliographic Record Cataloging Cheat Sheet
6.4.2. Item/Holdings Record Cataloging Guide
6.4.3. Handling On Order Items and Holds
7. Reservas do curso
7.1. Configuração de Reservas para Cursos
7.2. Adding Courses
7.3. Adding Reserve Materials
7.4. Course Reserves in the OPAC
8. Periódicos
8.1. Manage Serial Frequencies
8.2. Manage Serial Numbering Patterns
8.3. Add a subscription
8.4. Receive Issues
8.5. Create a Routing List
8.6. Subscriptions in Staff Client
8.7. Subscriptions in OPAC
8.8. Claim Late Serials
8.9. Verificar vencimento de assinatura de periódico
8.10. Renewing Serials
8.11. Searching Serials
9. Aquisições
9.1. Configurar
9.2. Fornecedores
9.2.1. Adicionar um fornecedor
9.2.2. Visualizar/Editar um fornecedor
9.2.3. Contratos de fornecedores
9.3. Managing Suggestions
9.4. Placing Orders
9.4.1. Create a basket
9.4.2. Criar um grupo de cestos
9.4.3. Printing baskets
9.5. Recebendo pedidos
9.6. Faturas
9.7. Reclamações & Pedidos atrasados
9.8. Acquisition Searches
9.9. Budget/Fund Tracking
10. Lists & Cart
10.1. Listas
10.1.1. Create a List
10.1.2. Add to a List
10.1.3. Viewing Lists
10.1.4. Unindo registros bibliográficos a partir das Listas
10.2. Cart
11. Relatórios
11.1. Custom Reports
11.1.1. Add Custom Report
11.1.2. Editar Relatórios Personalizados
11.1.3. Gerar Relatórios Personalizados
11.2. Statistics Reports
11.2.1. Acquisitions Statistics
11.2.2. Patron Statistics
11.2.3. Catalog Statistics
11.2.4. Circulation Statistics
11.2.5. Serials Statistics
11.2.6. Holds Statistics
11.2.7. Usuários com mais empréstimos
11.2.8. Most Circulated Items
11.2.9. Usuários sem empréstimos
11.2.10. Itens nunca emprestados
11.2.11. Catálogo por tipo de documento
11.2.12. Itens extraviados
11.2.13. Average Loan Time
11.3. Report Dictionary
12. OPAC
12.1. Search Results
12.1.1. Results Overview
12.1.2. Filtros
12.1.3. Search RSS Feeds
12.2. Bibliographic Record
12.3. Lists & Cart
12.3.1. Listas
12.3.2. Cart
12.4. Placing Holds
12.5. Enhanced Content
12.5.1. Tagging
12.5.2. Comentários
12.5.3. Zotero
12.5.4. Custom RSS Feeds
12.6. OPAC Self Registration
12.7. My Account
12.7.1. My Summary
12.7.2. Patron Flags
12.7.3. My Fines
12.7.4. My Details
12.7.5. Minhas tags
12.7.6. Change My Password
12.7.7. My Search History
12.7.8. My Reading History
12.7.9. My Privacy
12.7.10. My Purchase Suggestions
12.7.11. My Messaging
12.7.12. My Lists
12.8. Sugestões de aquisição
12.9. Mobile OPAC
13. Pesquisa
13.1. Advanced Search Prefixes
13.2. Guide to Searching
13.2.1. Indexing and Searching Description
13.2.2. Indexing Configuration
13.2.3. Basic Searching
13.2.4. Advanced Searching
13.2.5. Common Command Language Searching
13.3. Koha Search Indexes
14. Plugin System
14.1. Set up
15. Search History
16. Sobre o Koha
16.1. Informação do servidor
16.2. Perl Modules
16.3. System Information
17. Implementation Checklist
17.1. Data Migration
17.2. Admin Configuration
17.3. Localization Configuration
17.4. Circulation Configuration
17.5. Patron Configuration
17.6. Cataloging Configuration
17.7. Authorities Configuration
17.8. Searching Configuration
17.9. OPAC Configuration
17.9.1. Editable OPAC Regions
17.10. Enhanced Content Configuration
17.11. Acquisitions Configuration
17.12. Serials Configuration
17.13. Planning for Go-Live
18. SOPAC2 Installation
18.1. Introduction
18.2. Installation of Locum and Insurge
18.2.1. Dependencies
18.2.2. Download
18.2.3. Creation of the Database
18.2.4. Sync DSN
18.2.5. Installation of Insurge
18.2.6. Installation of Locum
18.3. Installation of Koha Connector
18.4. Harvest Records
18.5. Installation of Sphinx
18.5.1. Dependencies
18.5.2. Download and Compile
18.5.3. Creation of User and Group
18.5.4. The Sphinx daemon
18.5.5. Configuration
18.5.6. Indexing documents
18.6. Installation of SOPAC2
18.6.1. Download
18.6.2. Installation
18.6.3. Configuration
19. Cron Jobs
19.1. Cron Jobs
19.1.1. Pesquisar
19.1.2. Circulação
19.1.3. Usuários
19.1.4. Correspondências
19.1.5. In Processing/Book Cart
19.1.6. Catálogo
19.1.7. OPAC
19.1.8. System Administration
19.1.9. Aquisições
19.1.10. Deprecated scripts
20. Web Services
20.1. OAI-PMH
20.1.1. Sample OAI Conf File
20.2. REST services
21. Using the SRU server
21.1. Using the SRU server
21.1.1. Explain
21.1.2. Pesquisar
21.1.3. Retrieve
A. System Preference Defaults
A.1. ISBD Defaults
A.1.1. MARC Default
A.1.2. UNIMARC Default
B. Configuring Receipt Printers
B.1. For Epson TM-T88III (3) & TM-T88IV (4) Printers
B.1.1. In the Print Driver
B.1.2. In Firefox
B.2. For Epson TM-T88II (2) Printers
B.2.1. In Firefox
B.3. For Star SP542 Printers
B.3.1. Installing the Printer
B.4. Configuring Firefox to Print to Receipt Printer
C. Notice & Slips Guides
C.1. Field Guide for Notices & Slips
D. Example Notice
E. Sample Serials
E.1. Reader's Digest (0034-0375)
E.2. People Weekly (1076-0091)
E.3. Et-Mol
E.4. Backpacker (0277-867X)
E.5. Keats-Shelley Journal (0453-4387)
E.6. Computers in Libraries (1041-7915)
F. Sample List & Cart Emails
F.1. Example Email from List
F.2. Example Email from Cart
G. Using Koha as a Content Management System (CMS)
G.1. Configurar
G.1.1. Editing the pages template
G.1.2. Solução de problemas
G.1.3. Bonus Points
G.2. Usage
G.2.1. Adding Pages
G.2.2. Viewing your page
G.2.3. Example
G.2.4. Live Examples
H. Resetting the Koha Database
H.1. Delete Tables
H.2. Reset the Zebra Index
I. Important Links
I.1. Koha Related
I.2. Cataloging Related
I.3. Enhanced Content Related
I.4. Design Related
I.5. Reports Related
I.6. Installation Guides
I.7. Misc
J. Koha XSLT Item Types
K. MarcEdit
K.1. Adding a prefix to call numbers
K.2. Importing Excel data into Koha
K.2.1. Converting from Excel format into .mrk format
K.2.2. Convert .mrk file to .mrc
K.2.3. Import .mrc into Koha
L. Talking Tech
L.1. Installation and Setup Instructions
L.2. Sending Notices File
L.3. Receiving Results File
M. OCLC Connexion Gateway
M.1. Setting up OCLC service on Koha
M.2. Setting up your OCLC desktop client
M.3. Using the OCLC Connexion Gateway
M.3.1. Exporting records one by one
M.3.2. Exporting records in a batch
M.3.3. Items in OCLC
N. FAQs
N.1. Mostrar
N.1.1. Custom Item Type/Authorized Value Icons
N.1.2. Customizing Koha Images
N.1.3. OPAC Display Fields
N.1.4. Subtitle Display on Bib Records
N.1.5. Customize Logo on Staff Client
N.1.6. Show patrons the barcodes of items they have checked out
N.2. Circulation/Notices
N.2.1. Book drop Date
N.2.2. Holds to Pull and Holds Queue
N.2.3. Duplicate Overdue Notices
N.2.4. Printing Overdue Notices
N.2.5. Unable to Renew Items
N.2.6. Unable to Place Holds
N.2.7. Keyboard Shortcuts
N.2.8. SMS Notices/Messages
N.3. Catalogação
N.3.1. Authority Fields
N.3.2. Mapeamento Koha para MARC
N.3.3. Number of Items Per Bib Record
N.3.4. Estatísticas
N.4. Aquisições
N.4.1. Planning Categories
N.5. Periódicos
N.5.1. Advanced Patterns
N.6. Relatórios
N.6.1. Define Codes Stored in DB
N.6.2. Runtime Parameters
N.6.3. Results Limited
N.7. Pesquisa
N.7.1. Advanced Search
N.7.2. Wildcard Searching
N.7.3. Title Searching
N.8. Enhanced Content
N.8.1. FRBRizing Content
N.8.2. Amazon
N.9. System Administration
N.9.1. Errors in Zebra Cron
N.9.2. Making Z39.50 Target Public
N.9.3. Shelving Location Authorized Values
N.9.4. Why do I need Authorized Values?
N.9.5. How do I clean up the sessions table?
N.10. Hardware
N.10.1. Barcode Scanners
N.10.2. Impressoras
O. Extending Koha
O.1. Amazon lookup script for Koha libraries
O.2. Keyword Clouds
O.3. Newest Titles Pulldown
O.4. Cataloging and Searching by Color
P. Koha and Your Website
P.1. Koha search on your site
Q. GNU General Public License version 3

Capítulo 1. Introduction

1.1. Koha Basics

Koha is the first free and open source software library automation package (ILS). Development is sponsored by libraries of varying types and sizes, volunteers, and support companies from around the world.
Learn more about Koha by visiting the official Koha website: http://koha-community.org

1.2. Koha Recommendations

Full system recommendations can be found on the official Koha wiki along with the developer documentation: http://wiki.koha-community.org
When working in the Koha staff client it is strongly recommended that you use the Firefox browser. Koha's staff client is not supported in Internet Explorer and has not yet been fully optimized for Google Chrome.

1.3. Using this Manual

This manual is always changing and suggestions for edits can be sent to the Documentation Manager via the DOCS mailing list. The manual is organized by Koha module. At the start of most sections (and throughout) you will find 'Get there' tips. These lines tell you how to get to the section in Koha.
For example: Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences
The instruction tells you where to find the necessary menu option at the top of the Koha staff client.
Links will be found throughout the manual to other sections in the manual and images will depict what should be seen on the screen.
The manual can be searched using the custom Google search on the Koha Documentation page.

1.4. Contributing to the Manual

This manual is an ever-changing document and edits to the manual are welcome at any time.
The Koha Manual is managed by the Documentation Manager, but that doesn't mean we can't all participate in making the best manual possible.
To edit the manual we recommend oXygen or other XML/DocBook editor. We ask that every chapter and section have an ID tag associated with it to enable permanent linking and searching.
Patches to the manual should be emailed to the DOCS mailing list and will be reviewed by the Documentation Manager before inclusion.

Capítulo 2. Administração

2.1. Configurações globais do sistema

Nas 'Preferências Gerais do Sistema' você pode controlar o funcionamento geral do Koha. Configure estas preferências antes de qualquer coisa que você fizer no Koha.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences
As preferências do sistema podem ser pesquisadas (por qualquer parte do nome da preferência ou de sua descrição) utilizando a caixa de pesquisa na página de 'Administração' ou a caixa de busca no topo de cada aba de preferência do sistema.
When editing preferences a '(modified)' tag will appear next to items you change until you click the 'Save All' button:
After saving your preferences you'll get a confirmation message telling you what preferences were saved:
Cada seção das preferências podem serem ordenadas alfabeticamente clicando na pequena seta para baixo a direita da palavra 'Preferência' na coluna principal
If the preference refers to monetary values (like maxoutstanding) the currency displayed will be the default you set in your Currency and Exchange Rate administration area. In the examples to follow they will all read USD for U.S. Dollars.

Importante

For libraries systems with unique URLs for each site the system preference can be overridden by editing your koha-http.conf file this has to be done by a system administrator or someone with access to your system files. For example if all libraries but one want to have search terms highlighted in results you set the OpacHighlightedWords preference to 'Highlight' then edit the koha-http.conf for the library that wants this turned off by adding 'SetEnv OVERRIDE_SYSPREF_OpacHighlightedWords "0"'. After restarting the web server that one library will no longer see highlighted terms. Consult with your system administrator for more information.

2.1.1. Aquisições

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Acquisitions

2.1.1.1. Policy

2.1.1.1.1. AcqCreateItem
Default: placing an order
Asks: Create an item when ___.
Values:
  • cataloging a record
  • placing an order
  • receiving an order
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you decide when you'd like to create an item record in Koha. If you choose to add an item record when 'placing an order' then you will enter item information in as you place records in your basket. If you choose to add the item when 'receiving an order' you will be asked for item record information when you're receiving orders in acquisitions. If you choose to add the item when 'cataloging a record' then item records will not be created in acquisitions at all, you will need to go to the cataloging module to add the items.
2.1.1.1.2. AcqItemSetSubfieldsWhenReceived
Asks: Upon receiving items, update their subfields if they were created when placing an order (e.g. o=5|a="foo bar"). ___
Descrição:
  • This preference allows you to set default values for items that you receive via acquisitions. Enter the data as subfield=value and split your values with a bar ( | ). For example you can remove the Ordered status on the item automatically when you receive it just by entering 7=0 in this preference. That will set the Not for Loan status (subfield 7) to 0 which is available.
2.1.1.1.3. AcqViewBaskets
Default: created by staff member
Asks: Show baskets ___
Values:
  • created by staff member
  • from staff member's branch
  • in system, regardless of owner
Descrição:
  • When in acquisitions this preference allows you to control whose baskets you can see when looking at a vendor. The default value of 'created by staff member' makes it so that you only see the baskets you created. Choosing to see baskets 'from staff member's branch' will show you the baskets created by anyone at the branch you're logged in at. Finally, you can choose to set this preference to show you all baskets regardless of who created it ('in system, regardless of owner). Regardless of which value you choose for this preference, superlibrarians can see all baskets created in the system.
2.1.1.1.4. AcqWarnOnDuplicateInvoice
Default: Do not warn
Asks: ___ when the librarian tries to create an invoice with a duplicate number.
Values:
  • Do not warn
  • Warn
2.1.1.1.5. BasketConfirmations
Default: always ask for confirmation
Asks: When closing or reopening a basket, ___.
Values:
  • always ask for confirmation
  • do not ask for confirmation
Descriptions:
  • This preference adds the option to skip confirmations on closing and reopening a basket. If you skip the confirmation, you do not create a new basket group.
2.1.1.1.6. CurrencyFormat
Default: 360,000.00 (US)
Asks: Display currencies using the following format ___
Values:
  • 360,000.00 (US)
  • 360 000,00 (FR)
2.1.1.1.7. gist
Default: 0
Asks: The default tax rate is ___
Descrição:
  • This preference will allow the library to define a default Goods and Services Tax rate. The default of value of 0 will disable this preference.

Nota

Enter this value as a number (.06) versus a percent (6%).
2.1.1.1.8. MarcFieldsToOrder
Asks: Set the mapping values for a new order line created from a MARC record in a staged file.
Descrição:
  • This preference includes MARC fields to check for order information to use when ordering from a staged file in acquisitions. You can use the following fields: price, quantity, budget_code, discount, sort1, sort2.
    For example:
    price: 947$a|947$c
    quantity: 969$h
    budget_code: 922$a
2.1.1.1.9. UniqueItemFields
Default: barcode
Asks:___ (space-separated list of fields that should be unique for items, must be valid SQL fields of items table)
Descrição:
  • If this preference is left blank when adding items in acquisitions there will be no check for uniqueness. This means that a duplicate barcode can be created in acquisitions which will cause errors later when checking items in and out.

2.1.1.2. Printing

2.1.1.2.1. OrderPdfFormat
Default: pdfformat::layout2pages
Asks: Use ___ when printing basket groups.

2.1.2. Administração

These preferences are general settings for your system.
Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Administration

2.1.2.1. CAS Authentication

The Central Authentication Service (CAS) is a single sign-on protocol for the web. If you don't know what this is, leave these preferences set to their defaults.
2.1.2.1.1. AllowPKIAuth
Default: no
Asks: Use ___ field for SSL client certificate authentication
Values:
  • no
  • the common name
  • the email address
2.1.2.1.2. casAuthentication
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ CAS for login authentication.
2.1.2.1.3. casLogout
Default: Don't logout
Asks: ___ of CAS when logging out of Koha.
2.1.2.1.4. casServerUrl
Asks: The CAS Authentication Server can be found at ___

2.1.2.2. Interface options

These preference are related to your Koha interface
2.1.2.2.1. DebugLevel
Default: lots of
Asks: Show ___ debugging information in the browser when an internal error occurs.
Values:
  • lots of - will show as much information as possible
  • no - will only show basic error messages
  • some - will show only some of the information available
Descrição:
  • This preference determines how much information will be sent to the user's screen when the system encounters an error. The most detail will be sent when the value level is set at 2, some detail will be sent when the value is set at 1, and only a basic error message will display when the value is set at 0. This setting is especially important when a system is new and the administration is interested in working out the bugs (errors or problems) quickly. Having detailed error messages makes quick fixes more likely in problem areas.
2.1.2.2.2. delimiter
Default: semicolons
Asks: Separate columns in an exported report file with ___ by default.
Values:
  • #'s
  • backslashes
  • commas
  • semicolons
  • slashes
  • tabs
Descrição:
  • This preference determines how reports exported from Koha will separate data. In many cases you will be able to change this option when exporting if you'd like.
2.1.2.2.3. KohaAdminEmailAddress
This is the default 'From' address for emails unless there is one for the particular branch, and is referred to when an internal error occurs.
Asks: Use ___ as the email address for the administrator of Koha.
Descrição:
  • This preference allows one email address to be used in warning messages set to the OPAC. If no email address is set for the branch this address will receive messages from patrons regarding modification requests, purchase suggestions, and questions or information regarding overdue notices. It is recommended that a email address that can be accessed by multiple staff members be used for this purpose so that if one librarian is out the others can address these requests. This email address can be changed when needed.
2.1.2.2.4. noItemTypeImages
Default: Show
Asks: ___ itemtype icons in the catalog.
Values:
  • Shows
  • Don't show
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the system administrator to determine if users will be able to set and see an item type icon the catalog on both the OPAC and the Staff Client. The images will display in both the OPAC and the Staff Client/Intranet. If images of item types are disabled, text labels for item types will still appear in the OPAC and Staff Client.
2.1.2.2.5. virtualshelves
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff and patrons to create and view saved lists of books.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't Allow
Descrição:
  • This preference controls whether the lists functionality will be available in the staff client and OPAC. If this is set to "Don't allow" then no one will be able to save items to public or private lists.

2.1.2.3. Login options

These preferences are related to logging into your Koha system
2.1.2.3.1. AutoLocation
Default: Don't require
Asks: ___ staff to log in from a computer in the IP address range specified by their library (if any).
  • Set IP address range in the library administration area
Values:
  • Don't require
  • Require
Descrição:
  • This preference protects the system by blocking unauthorized users from accessing the staff client program and settings. Authorized and unauthorized users are determined by their computer's IP addresses. When the preference is set to 'Require', IP authorization is in effect and unauthorized IP addresses will be blocked. This means that staff cannot work from home unless their IP address has been authorized. When set to 'Don't require', anyone with a staff client login will have access no matter which IP address they are using.
2.1.2.3.2. IndependentBranches
Default: Don't prevent
Asks: ___ staff (but not superlibrarians) from modifying objects (holds, items, patrons, etc.) belonging to other libraries.
Values:
  • Don't prevent
  • Prevent
Descrição:
  • This preference should only be used by library systems which are sharing a single Koha installation among multiple branches but are considered independent organizations, meaning they do not share material or patrons with other branches and do not plan to change that in the future. If set to 'Prevent' it increases the security between library branches by: prohibiting staff users from logging into another branch from within the staff client, filtering out patrons from patron searches who are not a part of the login branch conducting the search, limiting the location choices to the login branch when adding or modifying an item record, preventing users from other branch locations from placing holds or checking out materials from library branches other than their own, and preventing staff from editing item records which belong to other library branches. All of these security safeguards can be overridden only by the superlibrarian, the highest level of privileges.

Importante

It is important that this value be set before going live and that it NOT be changed
2.1.2.3.3. SessionStorage
Default: in the MySQL database
Asks: Store login session information ___
Values:
  • as temporary files
  • in the MySQL database
  • in the PostgreSQL database
    • Importante

      PostgreSQL is not yet supported
Descrição:
  • This preference allows administrators to choose what format session data is stored in during web sessions.
2.1.2.3.4. timeout
Default: 12000000
Asks: Automatically log out users after ___ seconds of inactivity.
Descrição:
  • This preference sets the length of time the Staff Client or OPAC accounts can be left inactive before re-logging in is necessary. The value of this preference is in seconds. At this time, the amount of time before a session times out must be the same for both the Staff Client and the OPAC.

2.1.2.4. Mozilla Persona

2.1.2.4.1. Persona
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ Mozilla persona for login.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • Mozilla Persona is an OpenID-like service that lets you log in to multiple websites with your Mozilla credentials. If you allow Persona log in for Koha then your patrons can log in to the OPAC using their Mozilla Persona. Learn more about Persona on the official Mozilla site.

    Importante

    For Persona log in to work you will need you OPACBaseURL preference to be set correctly.

2.1.2.5. Search Engine

2.1.2.5.1. SearchEngine

Importante

This preference is highly experimental and should not be changed from the default value in a production environment.
Default: Zebra
Asks: ___ is the search engine used.
Values:
  • Solr
  • Zebra
Descrição:
  • This preference will be used to control which search engine Koha uses for catalog searches in the OPAC and the staff client.

2.1.3. Autoridades

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Authorities

2.1.3.1. Geral

2.1.3.1.1. AuthDisplayHierarchy
Default: Don't display
Asks: ___ broader term/narrower term hierarchies when viewing authorities.
Values:
  • Mostrar
  • Don't display
Descrição:
  • If your authority records includes 5xx fields with linked references to broader and/or narrower see also references this preference will turn on a display of those authorities at the top of the record.
2.1.3.1.2. AutoCreateAuthorities
Default: do not generate
Asks: When editing records, ___ authority records that are missing.
Values:
  • do not generate
  • generate

Importante

BiblioAddsAuthorities must be set to "allow" for this to have any effect
Descrição:
  • When this and BiblioAddsAuthorities are both turned on, automatically create authority records for headings that don't have any authority link when cataloging. When BiblioAddsAuthorities is on and AutoCreateAuthorities is turned off, do not automatically generate authority records, but allow the user to enter headings that don't match an existing authority. When BiblioAddsAuthorities is off, this has no effect.
2.1.3.1.3. BiblioAddsAuthorities
Default: allow
Asks: When editing records, ___ them to automatically create new authority records if needed, rather than having to reference existing authorities.
Values:
  • allow
    • This setting allows you to type values in the fields controlled by authorities and then adds a new authority if one does not exist
  • don't allow
    • This setting will lock the authority controlled fields, forcing you to search for an authority versus allowing you to type the information in yourself.
2.1.3.1.4. dontmerge
Default: Don't
Asks: ___ automatically update attached biblios when changing an authority record.
Values:
  • Do
  • Don't
Descrição:
  • This preference tells Koha how to handle changes to your Authority records. If you edit an authority record and this preference is set to 'Do' Koha will immediately update all of the bib records linked to the authority with the new authority record's data. If this is set to "Don't" then Koha won't edit bib records when changes are made to authorities, rather, this is done later by the merge_authority.pl cronjob.

Importante

If this is set to "Don't automatically update" you will need to ask your administrator to enable the merge_authority.pl cronjob.
2.1.3.1.5. MARCAuthorityControlField008
Default: || aca||aabn | a|a d
Asks: Use the following text for the contents of MARC21 authority control field 008 position 06-39 (fixed length data elements).

Importante

Do not include the date (position 00-05) in this preference, Koha will calculate automatically and put that in before the values in this preference.
Descrição:
  • This preference controls the default value in the 008 field on Authority records. It does not effect bibliographic records.
2.1.3.1.6. UNIMARCAuthorityField100
Default: afrey50 ba0
Asks: Use the following text for the contents of UNIMARC authority field 100 position (fixed length data elements).

Importante

Do not include the date (position 00-07) in this preference, Koha will calculate automatically and put that in before the values in this preference.
Descrição:
  • This preference controls the default value in the 100 field on Authority records cataloged in UNIMARC. It does not effect bibliographic records.
2.1.3.1.7. UseAuthoritiesForTracings
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ authority record numbers instead of text strings for searches from subject tracings.
Values:
  • Don't use
    • Search links look for subject/author keywords (example: opac-search.pl?q=su:Business%20networks)
  • Use
    • Search links look for an authority record (example: opac-search.pl?q=an:354)
Descrição:
  • For libraries that have authority files, they may want to make it so that when a link to an authorized subject or author is clicked on the OPAC or staff client it takes the searcher only to a list of results with that authority record. Most libraries do not have complete authority files and so setting this preference to 'Don't use' will allow searchers to click on links to authors and subject headings and perform a keyword search against those fields, finding all possible relevant results instead.

2.1.3.2. Linker

These preferences will control how Koha links bibliographic records to authority records. All bibliographic records added to Koha after these preferences are set will link automatically to authority records, for records added before these preferences are set there is a script (misc/link_bibs_to_authorities.pl) that your system administrator can run to link records together.
2.1.3.2.1. CatalogModuleRelink
Default: Do not
Asks: ___ automatically relink headings that have previously been linked when saving records in the cataloging module.
Values:
  • Do
  • Do not
Descrição:
  • Longtime users of Koha don't expect the authority and bib records to link consistently. This preference makes it possible to disable authority relinking in the cataloging module only (i.e. relinking is still possible if link_bibs_to_authorities.pl is run). Note that though the default behavior matches the previous behavior of Koha (retaining links to outdated authority records), it does not match the intended behavior (updating biblio/authority link after bibliographic record is edited). Libraries that want the intended behavior of authority control rather than the way Koha used to handle linking should set CatalogModuleRelink to 'Do'. Once setting this to 'Do' the following preferences can also be set.
2.1.3.2.2. LinkerKeepStale
Default: Do not
Asks: ___ keep existing links to authority records for headings where the linker is unable to find a match.
Values:
  • Do
  • Do not
Descrição:
  • When set to 'Do', the linker will never remove a link to an authority record, though, depending on the value of LinkerRelink, it may change the link.
2.1.3.2.3. LinkerModule
Default: Default
Asks: Use the ___ linker module for matching headings to authority records.
Values:
  • Padrão
    • Retains Koha's previous behavior of only creating links when there is an exact match to one and only one authority record; if the LinkerOptions preference is set to 'broader_headings', it will try to link headings to authority records for broader headings by removing subfields from the end of the heading
  • First match
    • Creates a link to the first authority record that matches a given heading, even if there is more than one authority record that matches
  • Last match
    • Creates a link to the last authority record that matches a given heading, even if there is more than one record that matches
Descrição:
  • This preference tells Koha which match to use when searching for authority matches when saving a record.
2.1.3.2.4. LinkerOptions
Asks: Set the following options for the authority linker ___

Importante

This feature is experimental and shouldn't be used in a production environment until further expanded upon.
Descrição:
  • This is a pipe separated (|) list of options. At the moment, the only option available is "broader_headings." With this option set to "broader_headings", the linker will try to match the following heading as follows:
    =600 10$aCamins-Esakov, Jared$xCoin collections$vCatalogs$vEarly works to 1800.
    First: Camins-Esakov, Jared--Coin collections--Catalogs--Early works to 1800
    Next: Camins-Esakov, Jared--Coin collections--Catalogs
    Next: Camins-Esakov, Jared--Coin collections
    Next: Camins-Esakov, Jared (matches! if a previous attempt had matched, it would not have tried this)
2.1.3.2.5. LinkerRelink
Default: Do
Asks: ___ relink headings that have previously been linked to authority records.
Values:
  • Do
  • Do not
Descrição:
  • When set to 'Do', the linker will confirm the links for headings that have previously been linked to an authority record when it runs, correcting any incorrect links it may find. When set to 'Do not', any heading with an existing link will be ignored, even if the existing link is invalid or incorrect.

2.1.4. Catalogação

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Cataloging

2.1.4.1. Mostrar

2.1.4.1.1. AcquisitionDetails
Default: Display
Asks: ___ acquisition details on the biblio detail page.
Values:
  • Mostrar
  • Don't display
Descrição:
  • This preference controls whether a tab will show on the detail page in the staff client that includes detailed acquisitions information for the title. This tab will include links to order information stored in the acquisitions module.
2.1.4.1.2. authoritysep
Default: --
Asks: Separate multiple displayed authors, series or subjects with ___.
2.1.4.1.3. hide_marc
Default: Display
Asks: ___ MARC tag numbers, subfield codes and indicators in MARC views.
Values:
  • Display -- shows the tag numbers on the cataloging interface
  • Don't display -- shows just descriptive text when cataloging
2.1.4.1.4. IntranetBiblioDefaultView
Default: ISBD form
Asks: By default, display biblio records in ___
Values:
  • ISBD form -- displays records in the staff client in the old card catalog format
    • See ISBD preference for more information
  • Labelled MARC form -- displays records in the staff client in MARC with text labels to explain the different fields
  • MARC form -- displays records in the staff client in MARC
  • normal form -- visual display in the staff client (for the average person)
Descrição:
  • This setting determines the bibliographic record display when searching the catalog on the staff client. This setting does not affect the display in the OPAC which is changed using the BiblioDefaultView preference under the OPAC preference tab. This setting changes the look of the record when first displayed. The MARC and ISBD views can still be seen by clicking in the sidebar.
2.1.4.1.5. ISBD
Asks: Use the following as the ISBD template:
Descrição:
  • This determines how the ISBD information will display. Elements in the list can be reordered to produce a different ISBD view. ISBD, the International Standard Bibliographic Description, was first introduced by IFLA (International Federation of Library Associations) in 1969 in order to provide guidelines for descriptive cataloging. The purpose of ISBD is to aid the international exchange of bibliographic records for a variety of materials.
2.1.4.1.6. LabelMARCView
Default: Don't
Asks: ___ collapse repeated tags of the same type into one tag entry.
Values:
  • Do -- will combine all identical tag numbers under one heading in the MARC view in the OPAC and Staff Client
  • Don't -- will list all of the tags individually in the MARC view in the OPAC and Staff Client
2.1.4.1.7. NotesBlacklist
Asks: Don't show these ___ note fields in title notes separator (OPAC record details) and in the description separator (Staff client record details).
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you define which of your note fields are hidden from the title notes (OPAC) and descriptions (Staff) tabs. Enter the values as a comma separated list. For example to hide the local note and the bibliography note in MARC21 enter 504, 590.
2.1.4.1.8. OpacSuppression, OpacSuppressionByIPRange, OpacSuppressionRedirect, and OpacSuppressionMessage
OpacSuppression Default: Don't hide
Asks: ___ items marked as suppressed from OPAC search results. Note that you must have the Suppress index set up in Zebra and at least one suppressed item, or your searches will be broken. Restrict the suppression to IP adresses outside of the IP range ___ (Leave blank if not used. Define a range like 192.168..) Redirect the opac detail page for suppressed records to ___ Display the following message on the redirect page for suppressed biblios ___.
OpacSuppression Values:
  • Don't hide
    • Will show records in OPAC search results if they are marked suppressed
  • Hide
    • Will not show records in OPAC search results if they're marked as suppressed
OpacSuppressionRedirect Values:
  • an explanatory page ('This record is blocked').
  • the 404 error page ('Not found').
Descrição:
  • These preferences control hiding of bibliographic records from display in the OPAC. Each bibliogrphic record you want to hide from the OPAC simply needs to have the value "1" in the field mapped with Suppress index (942$n field in MARC21, no official field in UNIMARC). The indexer then hides it from display in OPAC but will still display it in the Staff Client. If you want to further control suppression you can set an IP address range to still show suppressed items to. Define a range like 192.168.. If you don't want to limit suppression in this way, leave the IP field blank. You can also decide what the patrons will see in the OPAC when a title is suppressed by setting the OpacSuppressionRedirect and OpacSuppressionMessage preferences. You can either show the patron a 404 page if they try to see a suppressed record or you can create a custom page by entering the HTML in the OpacSuppressionMessage part of this preference.

    Nota

    An authorized value for the MARC21 942$n field (or the equivalent UNIMARC field) should be set to eliminate errors. One example would be to create an authorized value titled SUPPRESS with a value of 0 for don't suppress and 1 for suppress.

Importante

If this preference is set to 'hide' and you have the 942n field set to 1, it will hide the entire bib record - not just an individual item.

Importante

You must have the Suppress index set up in Zebra and at least one record with the value "1" in the field mapped with this index, or your searches will be completely broken in OPAC (you won't get any results at all).
2.1.4.1.9. SeparateHoldings & SeparateHoldingsBranch
SeparateHoldings default: Don't separate
SeparateHoldingsBranch default: home library
Asks: ___ items display into two tabs, where the first tab contains items whose ___ is the logged in user's library. The second tab will contain all other items.
SeparateHoldings values:
  • Don't separate
  • Separate
SeparateHoldingsBranch values:
  • holding library
  • home library
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you decide if you would like to have the holding information on the bibliographic detail page in the staff client split in to multiple tabs. The default is to show all holdings on one tab.
2.1.4.1.10. URLLinkText
Default: Online Resource
Asks: Show ___ as the text of links embedded in MARC records.
Descrição:
  • If the 856 field does not have a subfield 3 or y defined, the OPAC will say 'Click here to access online.' If you would like the field to say something else enter that in this field.
2.1.4.1.11. UseControlNumber
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ record control number ($w subfields) and control number (001) for linking of bibliographic records.
Values:
  • Don't use
    • When clicking on links to titles that appear next to 'Continues' and 'Continued by' in the detail display Koha will perform a title search
  • Use
    • When clicking on links to titles that appear next to 'Continues' and 'Continued by' in the detail display Koha will perform a control number (MARC field 001) search

Importante

Unless you are going in and manually changing 773$w to match your rigorously-defined bibliographic relationships, you should set this preference to "Don't use" and instead set EasyAnalyticalRecords to "Display"
Descrição:
  • If you have a serial called "Journal of Interesting Things" which has a separate record from when it was called "Transactions of the Interesting Stuff Society," you could add linking fields to indicate the relationship between the two records. UseControlNumber allows you to use your local accession numbers for those links. In MARC21, the relevant sections of the two records might look like this:
        =001    12345
        =110  2_$aInteresting Stuff Society.
        =245  10$aTransactions of the Interesting Stuff Society.
        =785  00$aInteresting Stuff Society$tJournal of Interesting Things.$w12346
         
        =001    12346
        =110  2_$aInteresting Stuff Society.
        =245  10$aJournal of Interesting Things.
        =780  00$aInteresting Stuff Society$tTransactions of the Interesting Stuff Society.$w12345
    With UseControlNumber set to 'Use', the 78x links will use the Control Numbers is subfield $w, instead of doing a title search on "Journal of Interesting Things" and "Transactions of the Interesting Stuff Society" respectively.

2.1.4.2. Importing

2.1.4.2.1. AggressiveMatchOnISBN
Default: don't
Asks: When matching on ISBN with the record import tool, ___ attempt to match aggressively by trying all variations of the ISBNs in the imported record as a phrase in the ISBN fields of already cataloged records.
Values:
  • do
  • don't
Descrição:
  • This preference allows you to choose to alter the ISBN matching rule used when staging records for import to be more aggressive. This means that all text will be stripped from the ISBN field so that a pure number match is possible. If this preference is set to "Don't" then Koha will find a match only if the ISBN fields are identical.

Importante

Note that this preference has no effect if UseQueryParser is on.

2.1.4.3. Interface

2.1.4.3.1. advancedMARCeditor
Default: Don't display
Asks: ___ descriptions of fields and subfields in the MARC editor.
Descrição:
  • This preference determines whether or not MARC field names will be present when editing or creating MARC records.
Values:
  • Mostrar
  • Don't display
2.1.4.3.2. DefaultClassificationSource
Default: Dewey Decimal System
Asks: Use ___ as the default classification source.
Values:
  • ANSCR (Sound Recordings)
  • Dewey Decimal Classification
  • Library of Congress Classification
  • Other/Generic Classification Scheme
  • SuDoc Classification (U.S. GPO)
  • Classificação Decimal Universal
2.1.4.3.3. EasyAnalyticalRecords

Linda Culberson

Ms. Dept. of Archives and History

Editado por

Nicole C. Engard

Fixed typos, changed content where necessary and added new screenshots. 
October 2011
Default: Don't Display
Asks: ___ easy ways to create analytical record relationships
Values:
  • Mostrar
  • Don't Display

Importante

If you decide to use this feature you'll want to make sure that your UseControlNumber preference is set to "Don't use" or else the "Show analytics" links in the staff client and the OPAC will be broken.
Descrição:
  • An analytic entry in a catalog is one that describes a part of a larger work that is also described in the catalog. In bibliographic cataloging, analytic entries may be made for chapters in books or special issues of articles in periodicals. In archival cataloging, analytic entries may be made for series or items within a collection. This feature in Koha allows for an easy way of linking analytic entries to the host records, and this system preference adds several new menu options to the staff cataloging detail pages to allow that to happen.

2.1.4.4. Record Structure

2.1.4.4.1. AlternateHoldingsField & AlternateHoldingsSeparator
Asks: Display MARC subfield ___ as holdings information for records that do not have items, with the subfields separated by ___.
Descrição:
  • Sometimes libraries migrate to Koha with their holding info in the 852 field (OCLC holdings information field) and choose not to transfer that information into the 952 (Koha holdings information field) because they don't plan on circulating those items. For those libraries or other libraries that have data in the 852 fields of their records that they want to display, these preferences let you choose to display holdings info from a field other than the 952 field. The AlternateHoldingsField preference can contain multiple subfields to look in; for instance 852abhi would look in 852 subfields a, b, h, and i.
  • With AlternateHoldingsField set to 852abhi and AlternateHoldingsSeparator set to a space the holdings would look like the following:
2.1.4.4.2. autoBarcode
Default: generated in the form <branchcode>yymm0001
Asks: Barcodes are ___
Values:
  • generated in the form <branchcode>yymm0001
  • generated in the form <year>-0001, <year>-0002
  • generated in the form 1, 2, 3
  • incremental EAN-13 barcodes
  • not generated automatically
Descrição:
  • This setting is for libraries wishing to generate barcodes from within Koha (as opposed to scanning in pre-printed barcodes or manually assigning them). The default behavior makes it so that when you click in the barcode field (952$p in MARC21) it will populate with the automatic barcode you have chosen. If you would rather it only enter an automatic barcode when you click on the plugin (the ... to the right of the field) you can change the plugin used for that field in the framework. Set the plugin for 952$p (if using MARC21 or equivalent field mapped to items.barcode in your local MARC format) for your frameworks to barcode_manual.pl instead of barcode.pl. Learn more about editing frameworks under the MARC Bibliographic Frameworks section of this manual.
2.1.4.4.3. DefaultLanguageField008
Default: Empty defaults to eng
Asks: Fill in the default language for field 008 Range 35-37 of MARC21 records ___.
Descrição:
  • This preference will allow you to set the language for your MARC21 008 field by default. If this is left empty it will default to English (eng). See the MARC Code List for Languages for additional values for this preference.

Nota

This preference won't have any effect if your records are in UNIMARC.
2.1.4.4.4. item-level_itypes
Default: specific item
Asks: Use the item type of the ___ as the authoritative item type (for determining circulation and fines rules, etc).
Values:
  • biblio record
  • specific item
Descrição:
  • This preference determines whether the item type Koha uses for issuing rules will be an attribute of the bibliographic record or the item record. Most libraries refer to the item record for item types. It also determines if the item type icon appears on the OPAC search results. If you have the preference set to 'biblio record' then Koha displays the item type icon on the search results to the left of the result info.
2.1.4.4.5. itemcallnumber
Default: 082ab
Asks: Map the MARC subfield to an item's callnumber.

Nota

This can contain multiple subfields to look in; for instance 082ab would look in 082 subfields a and b.
Descrição:
  • This setting determines which MARC field will be used to determine the call number that will be entered into item records automatically (952$o). The value is set by providing the MARC field code (050, 082, 090, 852 are all common in MARC21) and the subfield codes without the delimiters ($a, $b would be ab).
Examples:
  • Dewey: 082ab or 092ab; LOC: 050ab or 090ab; from the item record: 852hi
2.1.4.4.6. marcflavour
Default: MARC21
Asks: Interpret and store MARC records in the ___ format.
Values:
  • MARC21
    • The standard style for the US, Canada, Australia, New Zealand, United Kingdom, Germany and other countries
  • UNIMARC
    • The standard style used in France, Italy, Portugal, Russia, and other countries
  • NORMARC
    • The standard style for Norway
Descrição:
  • This preference defines global MARC style (MARC21, UNIMARC or NORMARC) used for encoding.

Importante

Changing the value of this preference will not convert your records from one MARC style to an other.
2.1.4.4.7. MARCOrgCode
Default: OSt
Asks: Fill in the MARC organization code ___ by default in new MARC21 records (leave blank to disable).
Descrição:
  • The MARC Organization Code is used to identify libraries with holdings of titles and more.
Learn more and find your library's MARC21 code on the MARC Code list for Organizations or in Canada on the Canadian Symbols Directory.

Nota

This preference won't have any effect if your records are in UNIMARC.
2.1.4.4.8. NewItemsDefaultLocation
Asks: When items are created, give them the temporary location of ___ (should be a location code, or blank to disable).
2.1.4.4.9. PrefillItem
Default: the new item is not prefilled with last created item values.
Asks: When a new item is added ___
Values:
  • the new item is not prefilled with last created item values.
  • the new item is prefilled with last created item values.
Descrição:
  • This preference controls the behavior used when adding new items. Using the options here you can choose to have your next new item prefill with the values used in the last item was added to save time typing values or to have the item form appear completely blank. Using SubfieldsToUseWhenPrefill you can control specifically which fields are prefilled.
2.1.4.4.10. SubfieldsToUseWhenPrefill
Asks: Define a list of subfields to use when prefilling items ___

Importante

Separate values with a space.
Descrição:
  • When the PrefillItem preference is set to prefill item values with those from the last added item, this preference can control which fields are prefilled (and which are not). Enter a space separated list of fields that you would like to prefill when adding a new item.
2.1.4.4.11. z3950NormalizeAuthor & z3950AuthorAuthFields
Defaults: Don't copy & 701,702,700
Asks: ___ authors from the UNIMARC ___ tags (separated by commas) to the correct author tags when importing a record using Z39.50.
Description for z3950NormalizeAuthor:
  • This preference allows for 'Personal Name Authorities' to replace authors as the bibliographic authority. This preference should only be considered by libraries using UNIMARC.
Values for z3950NormalizeAuthor:
  • Exemplar
  • Don't copy
Description for z3950AuthorAuthFields:
  • This preference defines which MARC fields will be used for 'Personal Name Authorities' to replace authors as the bibliographic authorities. This preference only applies to those using UNIMARC encoding. The MARC fields selected here will only be used if 'z3950NormalizeAuthor' is set to "Copy". The default field are 700, 701, and 702.

2.1.4.5. Spine Labels

2.1.4.5.1. SpineLabelAutoPrint
Default: don't
Asks: When using the quick spine label printer, ___ automatically pop up a print dialog.
Values:
  • do
  • don't
2.1.4.5.2. SpineLabelFormat
Default: <itemcallnumber><copynumber>
Asks: Include the following fields on a quick-printed spine label: (Enter in columns from the biblio, biblioitems or items tables, surrounded by < and >.)
2.1.4.5.3. SpineLabelShowPrintOnBibDetails
Default: Don't display
Asks: ___ buttons on the bib details page to print item spine labels.
Values:
  • Mostrar
  • Don't display

2.1.5. Circulação

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Circulation

2.1.5.1. Checkin Policy

2.1.5.1.1. AllowMultipleIssuesOnABiblio
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to check out multiple items from the same record, except for records with subscriptions.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • If this preference is set to 'Allow' then patrons will be able to check out multiple copies of the same title at the same time. If it's set to "Don't allow" then patrons will only be allowed to check out one item attached to a record at a time. Regardless of the option chosen in this preference records with subscriptions attached will allow multiple check outs.
2.1.5.1.2. BlockReturnOfWithdrawnItems
Default: Block
Asks: ___ returning of items that have been withdrawn.
Values:
  • Block
  • Don't block
Descrição:
  • This preference controls whether and item with a withdrawn status (952$0 in MARC21) can be checked in or not.
2.1.5.1.3. CalculateFinesOnReturn
Default: Do
Asks: ___ calculate and update overdue charges when an item is returned.
Values:
  • Do
  • Don't
Descrição:
  • If this preference is set to "Do" and the fines cron job is off then Koha will calculate fines only when items are returned. If you have the fines cron job on and this preference set to "Do" then this preference will calculate fines based on the cron (usually run nightly) and then again when you check the item in. This option is best for those who are doing hourly loans. If this preference is set to "Don't" then fines will only be accrued if the fines cron job is running.

Importante

If you are doing hourly loans then you should have this set to 'Do'.

2.1.5.2. Checkout Policy

2.1.5.2.1. AgeRestrictionMarker
Asks: Restrict patrons with the following target audience values from checking out inappropriate materials: ___
Descrição:
  • This preference defines certain keywords that will trigger Koha to restrict checkout based on age. These restrictions can be overridden by the AgeRestrictionOverride preference. Enter in this field a series of keywords separated by bar (|) with no spaces. For example PG|R|E|EC|Age| will look for PG followed by an age number, R folllowed by an age number, Age followed by an age number, and so on. These values can appear in any MARC field, but Library of Congress recommends the 521$a (Target Audience Note). Whatever field you decide to use you must map the word agerestriction in the biblioitems table to that field in the Koha to MARC Mapping. When cataloging you can enter values like PG 13 or E 10 in the 521$a and Koha will then notify circulation librarians that the material may not be recommended for the patron based on their age.

    Importante

    You must map the word agerestriction in the biblioitems table to the MARC field where this information will appear via the Koha to MARC Mapping administration area.
2.1.5.2.2. AgeRestrictionOverride
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ staff to check out an item with age restriction.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • When the AgeRestrictionMarker preference is set, Koha will try to warn circulation librarians before checking out an item that might have an age restriction listed in the MARC record. This preference asks if you would like the staff to be able to still check out these items to patrons under the age limit.
2.1.5.2.3. AllFinesNeedOverride
Default: Require
Asks: ___ staff to manually override all fines, even fines less than noissuescharge.
Values:
  • Don't require
  • Require
Descrição:
  • This preference let's you decide if you want to always be warned that the patron has fines when checking out. If you have it set to 'Require' then no matter how much money the patron owes a message will pop up warning you that the patron owes money.
2.1.5.2.4. AllowFineOverride
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ staff to manually override and check out items to patrons who have more than noissuescharge in fines.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you decide if you staff can check out to patrons who owe more money than you usually let them carry on their account. If set to 'Allow' staff will be warned that the patrons owes money, but it won't stop the staff from checking out to the patron.
2.1.5.2.5. AllowItemsOnHoldCheckout
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ checkouts of items reserved to someone else. If allowed do not generate RESERVE_WAITING and RESERVED warning. This allows self checkouts for those items.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow

Importante

This system preference relates only to SIP based self checkout, not Koha's web based self checkout.
Descrição:
  • When this preference is set to 'Allow' patrons will be able to use your external self check machine to check out a book to themselves even if it's on hold for someone else. If you would like Koha to prevent people from checking out books that are on hold for someone else set this preference to "Don't allow."
2.1.5.2.6. AllowNotForLoanOverride
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff to override and check out items that are marked as not for loan.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This parameter is a binary setting which controls the ability of staff (patrons will always be prevented from checking these items out) to check out items that are marked as "not for loan". Setting it to "Allow" would allow such items to be checked out, setting it to "Don't allow" would prevent this. This setting determines whether items meant to stay in the library, such as reference materials, and other library resources can be checked out by patrons.
2.1.5.2.7. AllowRenewalLimitOverride
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff to manually override the renewal limit and renew a checkout when it would go over the renewal limit.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This preference is a binary setting which controls the ability of staff to override the limits placed on the number of times an item can be renewed. Setting it to "Allow" would allow such limits to be overridden, setting it to "Don't allow" would prevent this. This is a preference in which if it is set to "allow" it would allow the library staff to use their judgment for overriding the renew limit for special cases, setting it to "Don't allow" prevents an opportunity for abuse by the library staff.
2.1.5.2.8. AllowReturnToBranch
Default: to any library
Asks: Allow materials to be returned to ___
Values:
  • either the library the item is from or the library it was checked out from.
  • only the library the item is from.
  • only the library the item was checked out from.
  • to any library.
Descrição:
  • This preference lets the library system decide how they will accept returns. Some systems allow for items to be returned to any library in the system (the default value of this preference) others want to limit item returns to only specific branches. This preference will allow you to limit item returns (checkins) to the branch(es) set in the value.
2.1.5.2.9. AllowTooManyOverride
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff to override and check out items when the patron has reached the maximum number of allowed checkouts.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • If this preference is set to "Allow" then staff all will be presented with an option to checkout more items to a patron than are normally allowed in the Circulation and Fine Rules. If this preference is set to "Don't allow" then no staff member will be able to check out more than the circulation limit.
2.1.5.2.10. AutomaticItemReturn
Default: Do
Asks: ___ automatically transfer items to their home branch when they are returned.
Values:
  • Do
  • Don't
Descrição:
  • This preference is a binary setting which determines whether an item is returned to its home branch automatically or not. If set to "Don't", the staff member checking an item in at a location other than the item's home branch will be asked whether the item will remain at the non-home branch (in which case the new location will be marked as a holding location) or returned. Setting it to "Do" will ensure that items checked in at a branch other than their home branch will be sent to that home branch.
2.1.5.2.11. AutoRemoveOverduesRestrictions
Default: Do not
Asks: ___ allow OVERDUES restrictions triggered by sent notices to be cleared automatically when all overdue items are returned by a patron.
Values:
  • Do
  • Do not
Descrição:
  • Using the Overdue Notice/Status Triggers you can restrict patrons after they receive an overdue notice. This preference lets you define whether Koha will automatically remove that restriction once the overdue items in question are returned or not.
2.1.5.2.12. CircControl
Default: the library the item is from
Asks: Use the checkout and fines rules of ___
Values:
2.1.5.2.13. HomeOrHoldingBranch
Default: the library the item was checked out from
Asks: Use the checkout and fines rules of ___
Values:
  • the library the item is from
    • This is equivalent to 'home library'
  • the library the item was checked out from
    • This is equivalent to 'holding library'
Descrição:
  • This preference does several things.
    • If CircControl is set to 'the library the item is from' then the circulation and fines policies will be determined by the item's library where HomeOrHoldingBranch chooses if item's home library is used or holding library is used.
    • If IndependentBranches is set to 'Prevent' then the value of this preference is used in figuring out if the item can be checked out. If the item's home library does not match the logged in library, the item cannot be checked out unless you are a superlibrarian.

Importante

It is not recommend that this setting be changed after initial setup of Koha because it will change the behavior of items already checked out.
2.1.5.2.14. HomeOrHoldingBranchReturn
Default: the library the item is from
Asks: On checkin route the returned item to ___
Values:
  • the library the item is from
  • the library item was checked out from
Descrição:
  • This preference will control where Koha prompts you to return the checked in item to. The value in this preference is overridden by any values you have related to item returns and floating collections in the Circulation and Fine Rules.
2.1.5.2.15. InProcessingToShelvingCart
Default: Don't move
Asks: ___ items that have the location PROC to the location CART when they are checked in.
Values:
  • Don't move
  • Move
2.1.5.2.16. IssuingInProcess
Default: Don't prevent
Asks: ___ patrons from checking out an item whose rental charge would take them over the limit.
Values:
  • Don't prevent
  • Prevent
Descrição:
  • This preference determines if a patron can check items out if there is an overdue fine on the account and any of the materials the patron wishes to check out will potentially tip the account balance over the maximum fines policy the library has in place.
Example: Your library has a $5 limit set for 'fines' (ie, after incurring $5 in fines, a patron can no longer check out items). A patron comes to the desk with 5 items to check out (4 books and a video) The patron has $4 in charges already on their account. One of the videos has a rental charge of $1, therefore making the total fines on the patron's account suddenly $5 (the limit).
2.1.5.2.17. IssueLostItem
Default: display a message
Asks: When issuing an item that has been marked as lost, ___.
Values:
  • display a message
  • do nothing
    • This option will just check the item out without notifying you that the item was marked lost.
  • require confirmation
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you define how library staff are notified that an item with a lost status is being checked out. This will help staff mark items as 'available' if you choose to 'display a message' or 'require confirmation.' If you choose to 'do nothing,' there will be no notification that the item being checked out is marked as 'lost.'
2.1.5.2.18. ManInvInNoissuesCharge
Default: Include
Asks: ___ MANUAL_INV charges when summing up charges for noissuescharge.
Values:
  • Don't include
  • Include
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you decide if charges entered as manual invoices are included when calculating the noissuescharge. If this is set to include then Koha will include all manual invoices when deciding if the patron owes too much money to check anything else out of the library. If it's set to Don't include then Koha will ignore all manual invoice charges when figuring out if the patron owes too much money to checkout additional materials.
2.1.5.2.19. maxoutstanding
Default: 5
Asks: Prevent patrons from making holds on the OPAC if they owe more than ___ USD in fines.
2.1.5.2.20. noissuescharge
Default: 5
Asks: Prevent patrons from checking out books if they have more than ___ USD in fines.
Descrição:
  • This preference is the maximum amount of money owed to the library before the user is banned from borrowing more items. Using the ManInvInNoissuesCharge and RentalsInNoissuesCharge preferences you can control which types of charges are considered in this total. This also coincides with maxoutstanding that limits patrons from placing holds when the maximum amount is owed to the library.
2.1.5.2.21. OverduesBlockCirc
Default: Ask for confirmation
Asks: ___ when checking out to a borrower that has overdues outstanding
Values:
  • Ask for confirmation
    • Will not let you check an item out to patrons with overdues until a librarian confirms that it is okay
  • Block
    • Block all patrons with overdue items from being able to check out
  • Don't block
    • Allow all patrons with overdue items to continue to check out
2.1.5.2.22. OverdueNoticeBcc
Asks: Send all notices as a BCC to this email address ___
This preference makes it so that a librarian can get a copy of every notice sent out to patrons.

Nota

If you'd like more than one person to receive the blind copy you can simply enter in multiple email addresses separated by commas.

Nota

The name of this preference is misleading, it does not only send overdues, but all notices to the BCC address.
2.1.5.2.23. PrintNoticesMaxLines
Asks: Include up to ___ item lines in a printed overdue notice.

Nota

If the number of items is greater than this number, the notice will end with a warning asking the borrower to check their online account for a full list of overdue items.

Nota

Set to 0 to include all overdue items in the notice, no matter how many there are.

Importante

This preference only refers to the print notices, not those sent via email.
2.1.5.2.24. RenewalPeriodBase
Default: the old due date of the checkout
Asks: When renewing checkouts, base the new due date on ___
Values:
  • the old due date of the checkout
  • the current date
2.1.5.2.25. RenewalSendNotice
Default: Don't send
Asks: ____ a renewal notice according to patron checkout alert preferences.
Values:
  • Don't send
  • Enviar
Descrição:
  • If a patron has chosen to receive a check out notice in their messaging preferences and this preference is set to 'Send' then those patrons will also receive a notice when they renew materials. You will want to set up a new notice with the code of RENEWAL (if you don't already have it) with custom text for renewing items.

    Importante

    This preference requires that you have EnhancedMessagingPreferences set to 'Allow'
2.1.5.2.26. RentalsInNoissuesCharge
Default: Include
Asks: ___ rental charges when summing up charges for noissuescharge.
Values:
  • Don't include
  • Include
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you decide if rental charges are included when calculating the noissuescharge. If this is set to include then Koha will include all rental charges when deciding if the patron owes too much money to check anything else out of the library. If it's set to Don't include then Koha will ignore all rental charges when figuring out if the patron owes too much money to checkout additional materials.
2.1.5.2.27. ReturnBeforeExpiry
Default: Don't require
Asks: ___ patrons to return books before their accounts expire (by restricting due dates to before the patron's expiration date).
Values:
  • Don't require
  • Require
Descrição:
  • This is preference may prevent a patron from having items checked out after their library card has expired. If this is set to "Require", then a due date of any checked out item can not be set for a date which falls after the patron's card expiration. If the setting is left "Don't require" then item check out dates may exceed the expiration date for the patron's library card.
2.1.5.2.28. ReturnToShelvingCart
Default: Don't move
Asks: ___ all items to the location CART when they are checked in.
Values:
  • Don't move
  • Move
2.1.5.2.29. TransfersMaxDaysWarning
Default: 3
Asks: Show a warning on the "Transfers to Receive" screen if the transfer has not been received ___ days after it is sent.
Descrição:
  • The TransferMaxDaysWarning preference is set at a default number of days. This preference allows for a warning to appear after a set amount of time if an item being transferred between library branches has not been received. The warning will appear in the Transfers to Receive report.
2.1.5.2.30. UseBranchTransferLimits & BranchTransferLimitsType
Defaults: Don't enforce & collection code
Asks: ___ branch transfer limits based on ___
UseBranchTransferLimits Values:
  • Don't enforce
  • Enforce
BranchTransferLimitsType Values:
  • collection code
  • item type
BranchTransferLimitsType Description:
  • This parameter is a binary setting which determines whether items are transferred according to item type or collection code. This value determines how the library manager is able to restrict what items can be transferred between the branches.
2.1.5.2.31. useDaysMode
Default: Don't include
Asks: Calculate the due date using ___.
Values:
  • circulation rules only.
  • the calendar to push the due date to the next open day.
  • the calendar to skip all days the library is closed.
Descrição:
  • This preference controls how scheduled library closures affect the due date of a material. The 'the calendar to skip all days the library is closed' setting allows for a scheduled closure not to count as a day in the loan period, the 'circulation rules only' setting would not consider the scheduled closure at all, and 'the calendar to push the due date to the next open day' would only effect the due date if the day the item is due would fall specifically on the day of closure.
Example:
  • The library has put December 24th and 25th in as closures on the calendar. A book checked out by a patron has a due date of December 25th according to the circulation and fine rules. If this preference is set to 'circulation rules only' then the item will remain due on the 25th. If the preference is set to 'the calendar to push the due date to the next open day' then the due date will be December 26th. If the preference is set to 'the calendar to skip all days the library is closed' then the due date will be pushed to the 27th of December to accommodate for the two closed days.
The calendar is defined on a branch by branch basis. To learn more about the calendar, check out the 'Calendar & Holidays' section of this manual.
2.1.5.2.32. UseTransportCostMatrix
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ Transport Cost Matrix for calculating optimal holds filling between branches.
Values:
  • Don't use
  • Use
Descrição:
  • If the system is configured to use the Transport cost matrix for filling holds, then when attempting to fill a hold, the system will search for the lowest cost branch, and attempt to fill the hold with an item from that branch first. Branches of equal cost will be selected from randomly. The branch or branches of the next highest cost shall be selected from only if all the branches in the previous group are unable to fill the hold.
    The system will use the item's current holding branch when determining whether the item can fulfill a hold using the Transport Cost Matrix.

2.1.5.3. Reservas do curso

2.1.5.3.1. UseCourseReserves
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ course reserves
Values:
  • Don't use
  • Use
Descrição:
  • The Course Reserves module in Koha allows you to temporarily move items to 'reserve' and assign different circulation rules to these items while they are being used for a specific course.

2.1.5.4. Fines Policy

2.1.5.4.1. finesCalendar
Default: not including the days the library is closed
Asks: Calculate fines based on days overdue ___
Values:
  • directly
  • not including the days the library is closed
Descrição:
  • This preference will determine whether or not fines will be accrued during instances when the library is closed. Examples include holidays, library in-service days, etc. Choosing "not including the days the library is closed" setting will enable Koha to access its Calendar module and be considerate of dates when the library is closed. To make use of this setting the administrator must first access Koha's calendar and mark certain days as "holidays" ahead of time.
The calendar is defined on a branch by branch basis. To learn more about the calendar, check out the 'Calendar & Holidays' section of this manual.
2.1.5.4.2. FinesIncludeGracePeriod
Default: Include
Asks: ___ the grace period when calculating the fine for an overdue item.
Values:
  • Don't include
  • Include
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you control how Koha calculates fines when there is a grace period. If you choose to include the grace period when calculating fines then Koha will charge for the days in the grace period should the item be overdue more than those days. If you choose not to include the grace period then Koha will only charge for the days overdue after the grace period.
2.1.5.4.3. finesMode
Default: Calculate (but only for mailing to the admin)
Asks: ___ fines
Values:
  • Calculate (but only for mailing to the admin)
  • Calculate and charge
  • Don't calculate

Importante

Requires that you have the fines cron job running (misc/cronjobs/fines.pl)
2.1.5.4.4. RefundLostItemFeeOnReturn
Default: Refund
Asks: ___ lost item fees charged to a borrower when the lost item is returned.
Values:
  • Don't refund
  • Refund
Descrição:
  • When an item is marked lost in Koha the system charges the patron the replacement fee for the item. This preference lets you control how Koha handles returns of these items. By default when an item that was previously marked lost is checked in Koha refunds the patron the replacement fee. Change this preference to "Don't refund" if you would like Koha to not refund the replacement fee.
2.1.5.4.5. WhenLostChargeReplacementFee
Default: Charge
Asks: ___ the replacement price when a patron loses an item.
Values:
  • Custo
  • Don't charge
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you tell Koha what to do with an item is marked lost. If you want Koha can 'Charge' the patron the replacement fee listed on the item they lost or it can do nothing in reference to the patron and just mark the item lost in the catalog.
2.1.5.4.6. WhenLostForgiveFine
Default: Don't forgive
Asks: ___ the fines on an item when it is lost.
Values:
  • Don't forgive
  • Forgive
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the library to decide if fines are charged in addition to the replacement fee when an item is marked as lost. If this preference is set to 'Forgive' then the patron won't be charged fines in addition to the replacement fee.

2.1.5.5. Holds Policy

2.1.5.5.1. AllowHoldDateInFuture
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ hold requests to be placed that do not enter the waiting list until a certain future date.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
2.1.5.5.2. AllowHoldsOnDamagedItems
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ hold requests to be placed on damaged items.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This parameter is a binary setting which controls whether or not hold requests can be placed on items that are marked as "damaged" (items are marked as damaged by editing subfield 4 on the item record). Setting this value to "Don't allow" will prevent anyone from placing a hold on such items, setting it to "Allow" will allow it. This preference is important because it determines whether or not a patron can place a request for an item that might be in the process of being repaired or not in good condition. The library may wish to set this to "Don't allow" if they were concerned about their patrons not receiving the item in a timely manner or at all (if it is determined that the item is beyond repair). Setting it to "Allow" would allow a patron to place a hold on an item and therefore receive it as soon as it becomes available.
2.1.5.5.3. AllowHoldsOnPatronsPossessions
Default: Allow
Asks: ____ a patron to place a hold on a record where the patron already has one or more items attached to that record checked out.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • By setting to "Don't allow," you can prevent patrons from placing holds on items they already have out, thus preventing them from blocking anyone else from getting an item.
2.1.5.5.4. AllowHoldPolicyOverride
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff to override hold policies when placing holds.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This preference is a binary setting which controls whether or not the library staff can override the circulation and fines rules as they pertain to the placement of holds. Setting this value to "Don't allow" will prevent anyone from overriding, setting it to "Allow" will allow it. This setting is important because it determines how strict the libraries rules for placing holds are. If this is set to "Allow", exceptions can be made for patrons who are otherwise normally in good standing with the library, but there is opportunity for the staff to abuse this function. If it is set to "Don't allow", no abuse of the system is possible, but it makes the system entirely inflexible in respect to holds.
2.1.5.5.5. AllowOnShelfHolds
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ hold requests to be placed on items that are not checked out.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't Allow
Descrição:
  • This preference is a binary setting which controls the ability of patrons to place holds on items that are not currently checked out. Setting it to "Don't allow" allows borrowers to place holds on items that are checked out but not on items that are on the shelf (or assumed available in the library), setting it to "Allow" allows borrowers to place holds on any item that is available for loan whether it is checked out or not. This setting might be set to "Allow" if the library system is a multi branch system and patrons used the hold system to request items from other libraries, or if the library wanted to allow users to place holds on items from home through the OPAC. Setting it to "Don't allow" would enforce a first come, first served standard.

Importante

An item's hold status doesn't not affect whether or not the item is 'available' until the item is in 'waiting' status. Items with on-shelf holds will show as available until a librarian has pulled them from the shelf and checked the item in make it show 'waiting'.
2.1.5.5.6. AutoResumeSuspendedHolds
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ suspended holds to be automatically resumed by a set date.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • If this preference is set to 'Allow' then all suspended holds will be able to have a date at after which they automatically become unsuspended. If you have this preference set to 'Allow' you will also need the Unsuspend Holds cron job running.

Importante

The holds will become unsuspended the date after that entered by the patron.
2.1.5.5.7. canreservefromotherbranches
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ a user from one library to place a hold on an item from another library
Descrição:
  • This preference is a binary setting which determines whether patrons can place holds on items from other branches. If the preference is set to "Allow" patrons can place such holds, if it is set to "Don't allow" they cannot. This is an important setting because it determines if users can use Koha to request items from another branch. If the library is sharing an installation of Koha with other independent libraries which do not wish to allow interlibrary borrowing it is recommended that this parameter be set to "Don't allow".
Values:
2.1.5.5.8. ConfirmFutureHolds
Default: 0
Asks: Confirm future hold requests (starting no later than ___ days from now) at checkin time.
Descrição:
  • When confirming a hold at checkin time, the number of days in this preference is taken into account when deciding which holds to show alerts for. This preference does not interfere with renewing, checking out or transferring a book.

Nota

This number of days will be used too in calculating the default end date for the Holds to pull-report. But it does not interfere with issuing, renewing or transferring books.

Importante

This preference is only looked at if you're allowing hold dates in the future with AllowHoldDateInFuture or OPACAllowHoldDateInFuture
2.1.5.5.9. decreaseLoanHighHolds, decreaseLoanHighHoldsDuration and decreaseLoanHighHoldsValue
Asks: ___ the reduction of loan period to ___ days for items with more than ___ holds.
decreaseLoanHighHolds default: Don't enable
decreaseLoanHighHolds values:
Don't enable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • These preferences let you change the loan length for items that have many holds on them. This will not effect items that are already checked out, but items that are checked out after the decreaseLoanHighHoldsValue is met will only be checked out for the number of days entered in the decreaseLoanHighHoldsDuration preference.
2.1.5.5.10. DisplayMultiPlaceHold
Default: Don't enable
Asks: ___ the ability to place holds on multiple biblio from the search results
Values:
  • Don't enable
  • Enable
2.1.5.5.11. emailLibrarianWhenHoldIsPlaced
Default: Don't enable
Asks: ___ sending an email to the Koha administrator email address whenever a hold request is placed.
Values:
  • Don't enable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • This preference enables Koha to email the library staff whenever a patron requests an item to be held. While this function will immediately alert the librarian to the patron's need, it is extremely impractical in most library settings. In most libraries the hold lists are monitored and maintained from a separate interface. That said, many libraries that allow on shelf holds prefer to have this preference turned on so that they are alerted to pull an item from the shelf.

Importante

In order for this email to send you must have a notice template with the code of HOLDPLACED

Importante

This notice will only be sent if the process_message_queue.pl cronjob being run periodically to send the messages.
2.1.5.5.12. ExpireReservesMaxPickUpDelay
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ holds to expire automatically if they have not been picked by within the time period specified in ReservesMaxPickUpDelay
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • If set to 'allow' this will cancel holds that have been waiting for longer than the number of days specified in the ReservesMaxPickUpDelay system preference. Holds will only be cancelled if the Expire Holds cron job is runnning.
2.1.5.5.13. ExpireReservesMaxPickUpDelayCharge
Default: 0
Asks: If using ExpireReservesMaxPickUpDelay, charge a borrower who allows his or her waiting hold to expire a fee of ___ USD
Descrição:
  • If you are expiring holds that have been waiting too long you can use this preference to charge the patron for not picking up their hold. If you don't charge patrons for items that aren't picked up you can leave this set to the default which is 0. Holds will only be cancelled and charged if the Expire Holds cron job is running.
2.1.5.5.14. maxreserves
Default: 50
Asks: Patrons can only have ___ holds at once.
2.1.5.5.15. OPACAllowHoldDateInFuture
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to place holds that don't enter the waiting list until a certain future date.
Values:
2.1.5.5.16. OPACAllowUserToChooseBranch
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ a user to choose the branch to pick up a hold from.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • Changing this preference will not prevent staff from being able to transfer titles from one branch to another to fill a hold, it will only prevent patrons from saying they plan on picking a book up at a branch other than their home branch.
2.1.5.5.17. ReservesControlBranch
Default: item's home library
Asks: Check the ___ to see if the patron can place a hold on the item.
Values:
  • item's home library.
  • patron's home library.
2.1.5.5.18. ReservesMaxPickUpDelay
Default: 7
Asks: Mark a hold as problematic if it has been waiting for more than ___ days.
Descrição:
  • This preference (based on calendar days, not the Koha holiday calendar) puts an expiration date on an item a patron has on hold. After this expiration date the staff will have the option to release the unclaimed hold which then may be returned to the library shelf or issued to the next patron on the item's hold list. Items that are 'expired' by this preference are moved to the 'Holds Over' tab on the 'Holds Awaiting Pickup' report.
2.1.5.5.19. ReservesNeedReturns
Default: Don't automatically
Asks: ___ mark holds as found and waiting when a hold is placed specifically on them and they are already checked in.
Values:
  • Automatically
  • Don't automatically
Descrição:
  • This preference refers to 'item specific' holds where the item is currently on the library shelf. This preference allows a library to decide whether an 'item specific' hold is marked as "Waiting" at the time the hold is placed or if the item will be marked as "Waiting" after the item is checked in. This preference will tell the patron that their item is 'Waiting' for them at their library and ready for check out.
2.1.5.5.20. StaticHoldsQueueWeight & RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight
StaticHoldsQueueWeight Default: 0
RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight Default: in that order
Asks: Satisfy holds from the libraries ___ (as branchcodes, separated by commas; if empty, uses all libraries) ___
RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight Values:
  • in random order
    • If StaticHoldsQueueWeight is left at the default Koha will randomize all libraries, otherwise it will randomize the libraries listed.
  • in that order
    • If StaticHoldsQueueWeight is left at the default then this will use all of your branches in alphabetical order, otherwise it will use the branches in the order that you entered them in the StaticHoldsQueueWeight preference.
Descriptions:
  • These preferences control how the Holds Queue report is generated using a cron job.
    Caso você não queira que todas as suas bibliotecas façam parte dos empréstimos por reserva automática, você pode listar quais bibliotecas participam deste processo inserindo o código de todas as bibliotecas participantes, separados por vírgulas (ex. "MPL, CPL, SPL, BML" etc.).
    By default, the holds queue will be generated such that the system will first attempt to hold fulfillment using items already at the pickup library if possible. If there are no items available at the pickup library to fill a hold, build_holds_queue.pl will then use the list of libraries defined in StaticHoldsQueueWeight. If RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight is disabled ( which it is by default ), the script will assign fulfillment requests in the order the branches are placed in the StaticHoldsQueueWeight system preference.
    Por exemplo, se o seu sistema tem três bibliotecas de tamanhos variados (pequena, média e grande) e você deseja que a maior incidência de reservas recaia sobre as bibliotecas maiores antes das menores, você pode configurar StaticHoldsQueueWeight para algo como "GDE,MED,PEQ".
    Caso você queira que o encargo das reservas recaia de maneira equânime na rede de bibliotecas, simplesmente ative a preferência RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight.Quando esta preferência do sistema está ativa, a ordem na qual cada biblioteca será solicitada a atender reservas será aleatória a cada vez que a lista for gerada.
    Deixar StaticHoldsQueueWeight vazio é contraindicado neste ponto. Isso irá fazer com que o script build_holds_queue ignore RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight, fazendo com que o script preencha as reservas de forma não aleatória, mas sim seguindo a ordem alfabética.

Importante

The Transport Cost Matrix takes precedence in controlling where holds are filled from, if the matrix is not used then Koha checks the StaticHoldsQueueWeight. To use the Transport Cost Matrix simply set your UseTransportCostMatrix preference to 'Use'
2.1.5.5.21. SuspendHoldsIntranet
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ holds to be suspended from the intranet.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • The holds suspension feature can be turned on and off in the staff client by altering this system preference. If this is set to 'allow' you will want to set the AutoResumeSuspendedHolds system preference.
2.1.5.5.22. SuspendHoldsOpac
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ holds to be suspended from the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • The holds suspension feature can be turned on and off in the OPAC by altering this system preference. If this is set to 'allow' you will want to set the AutoResumeSuspendedHolds system preference.
2.1.5.5.23. TransferWhenCancelAllWaitingHolds
Default: Don't transfer
Asks: ___ items when cancelling all waiting holds.
Values:
  • Don't transfer
  • Transfer
Descrição:
  • When TransferWhenCancelAllWaitingHolds is set to "Don't transfer", no branch transfer records are created. Koha will not allow the holds to be transferred, because that would orphan the items at the library where the holds were awaiting pickup, without any further instruction to staff as to what items are at the library or where they need to go. When that system preference set to "Transfer", branch transfers are created, so the holds may be cancelled.

2.1.5.6. Interface

2.1.5.6.1. AllowAllMessageDeletion
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ staff to delete messages added from other libraries.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
2.1.5.6.2. AllowOfflineCirculation
Default: Do not enable
Asks: ___ offline circulation on regular circulation computers.
Values:
  • Do not enable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • Setting this preference to 'Enable' allows you to use the Koha interface for offline circulation. This system preference does not affect the Firefox plugin or the desktop application, any of these three options can be used for offline circulation without effecting the other.
2.1.5.6.3. CircAutocompl
Default: Try
Asks: ___ to automatically fill in the member when entering a patron search on the circulation screen.
Descrição:
  • This preference is a binary setting which determines whether auto-completion of fields is enabled or disabled for the circulation input field. Setting it to "Try" would enable a staff member to begin typing a name or other value into the field and have a menu pop up with suggestions for completing it. Setting it to "Don't try" would disable this feature. This preference can make staff members' jobs easier or it could potentially slow down the page loading process.
Values:
  • Don't try
  • Try
2.1.5.6.4. CircAutoPrintQuickSlip
Default: open a print quick slip window
Asks: When an empty barcode field is submitted in circulation ___
Values:
  • clear the screen
  • open a print quick slip window
  • open a print slip window
Descrição:
  • If this preference is set to open a quick slip (ISSUEQSLIP) or open a slip (ISSUESLIP) for printing it will eliminate the need for the librarian to click the print button to generate a checkout receipt for the patron they're checking out to. If the preference is set to clear the screen then "checking out" an empty barcode will clear the screen of the patron you were last working with.
2.1.5.6.5. FilterBeforeOverdueReport
Default: Don't require
Asks: ___ staff to choose which checkouts to show before running the overdues report.
Descrição:
  • Koha's overdue report shows you all of the overdue items in your library system. If you have a large library system you'll want to set this preference to 'Require' to force those running the report to first limit the data generated to a branch, date range, patron category or other such filter. Requiring that the report be filtered before it's run prevents your staff from running a system heavy report and slowing down other operations in the system.
Values:
  • Don't require
  • Require
2.1.5.6.6. FineNotifyAtCheckin
Default: Don't notify
Asks: ___ librarians of overdue fines on the items they are checking in.
Values:
  • Don't notify
  • Notify
Descrição:
  • With this preference set to 'Notify' all books that have overdue fines owed on them will pop up a warning when checking them in. This warning will need to acknowledged before you can continue checking items in. With this preference set to 'Don't notify,' you will still see fines owed on the patron record, you just won't have an additional notification at check in.
2.1.5.6.7. DisplayClearScreenButton
Default: Show
Asks: ___ a button to clear the current patron from the screen on the circulation screen.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
2.1.5.6.8. ExportRemoveFields
Asks: The following fields should be excluded from the patron checkout history CSV or iso2709 export ___
Descrição:
  • This space separated list of fields (e.g. 100a 245b) will automatically be excluded when exporting the patron's current checkout history.
2.1.5.6.9. ExportWithCsvProfile
Asks: Use the ___ CSV profile when exporting patron checkout history
Descrição:
  • Use this preference to define which CSV profile should be used when exporting patron's current checkout data. Enter the CSV Profile name as the value for this preference. If this preference is left blank you will not be able to export the patron's current checkout summary.
2.1.5.6.10. HoldsToPullStartDate
Default: 2
Asks: Set the default start date for the Holds to pull list to ___ day(s) ago.
Descrição:
  • The Holds to Pull report in circulation defaults to filtering holds placed 2 days ago. This preference allows you to set this default filter to any number of days.
2.1.5.6.11. itemBarcodeFallbackSearch
Default: Don't enable
Asks: ___ the automatic use of a keyword catalog search if the phrase entered as a barcode on the checkout page does not turn up any results during an item barcode search.
Values:
  • Don't enable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • Sometimes libraries want to checkout using something other than the barcode. Enabling this preference will do a keyword search of Koha to find the item you're trying to check out. You can use the call number, barcode, part of the title or anything you'd enter in the keyword search when this preference is enabled and Koha will ask you which item you're trying to check out.

Importante

While you're not searching by barcode a barcode is required on every title you check out. Only titles with barcodes will appear in the search results.
2.1.5.6.12. itemBarcodeInputFilter
Default: Don't filter
Asks: ___ scanned item barcodes.
Values:
  • Convert from CueCat format
  • Convert from Libsuite8 form
  • Don't filter
  • EAN-13 or zero-padded UPC-A from
  • Remove spaces from
  • Remove the first number from T-prefix style
    • This format is common among those libraries migrating from Follett systems
2.1.5.6.13. NoticeCSS
Asks: Include the stylesheet at ___ on Notices.

Importante

This should be a complete URL, starting with http://
Descrição:
  • If you would like to style your notices with a consistent set of fonts and colors you can use this preference to point Koha to a stylesheet specifically for your notices.
2.1.5.6.14. numReturnedItemsToShow
Default: 20
Asks : Show the ___ last returned items on the checkin screen.
2.1.5.6.15. previousIssuesDefaultSortOrder
Default: earliest to latest
Asks: Sort previous checkouts on the circulation page from ___ due date.
Values:
  • earliest to latest
  • latest to earliest
2.1.5.6.16. RecordLocalUseOnReturn
Default: Don't record
Asks: ___ local use when an unissued item is checked in.
Values:
  • Don't record
  • Registro
Descrição:
  • When this preference is set to "Don't record" you can record local use of items by checking items out to the statistical patron. With this preference set to "Record" you can record local use by checking out to the statistical patron and/or by checking in a book that is not currently checked out.
2.1.5.6.17. soundon
Default: Don't enable
Asks: ___ circulation sounds during checkin and checkout in the staff interface.
Values:
  • Don't enable
  • Enable

Importante

This feature is not supported by all browsers. Requires an HTML5 compliant browser.
2.1.5.6.18. SpecifyDueDate
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff to specify a due date for a checkout.
Due dates are calculated using your circulation and fines rules, but staff can override that if you allow them to specify a due date at checkout.
Descrição:
  • This preference allows for circulation staff to change a due date from the automatic due date to another calendar date. This option would be used for circumstances in which the due date may need to be decreased or extended in a specific circumstance. The "Allow" setting would allow for this option to be utilized by staff, the "Don't allow" setting would bar staff from changing the due date on materials.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
2.1.5.6.19. SpecifyReturnDate
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ staff to specify a return date for a check in.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you decide if staff can specify an arbitrary return date when checking in items.
2.1.5.6.20. todaysIssuesDefaultSortOrder
Default: latest to earliest
Asks: Sort today's checkouts on the circulation page from ___ due date.
Values:
  • earliest to latest
  • latest to earliest
2.1.5.6.21. UpdateTotalIssuesOnCirc
Default: Do not
Asks: ___ update a bibliographic record's total issues count whenever an item is issued
Values:
  • Do

    Importante

    This increases server load significantly; if performance is a concern, use the cron job to update the total issues count instead.
  • Do not
Descrição:
  • Koha can track the number of times and item is checked out and store that on the item record in the database. This information is not stored by default. Setting this preference to 'Do' will tell Koha to track that info everytime the item is checked out in real time. Otherwise you could use the cron job to have Koha update that field nightly.
2.1.5.6.22. UseTablesortForCirc
Default: Don't enable
Asks: ___ the sorting of current patron checkouts on the circulation screen.
Values:
  • Don't enable
  • Enable

Importante

Enabling this function may slow down circulation time for patrons with many checkouts.
2.1.5.6.23. WaitingNotifyAtCheckin
Default: Don't notify
Asks: ___ librarians of waiting holds for the patron whose items they are checking in.
Values:
  • Don't notify
  • Notify
Descrição:
  • When checking in books you can choose whether or not to have a notice pop up if the patron who returned the book has a hold waiting for pick up. If you choose 'Notify' for WaitingNotifyAtCheckin then every time a hold is found for the patron who had the book out last a message will appear on your check in screen.

2.1.5.7. Self Checkout

2.1.5.7.1. AllowSelfCheckReturns
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ patrons to return items through web-based self checkout system.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This preference is used to determine if you want patrons to be allowed to return items through your self check machines. By default Koha's self check interface is simply for checking items out.
2.1.5.7.2. AutoSelfCheckAllowed, AutoSelfCheckID & AutoSelfCheckPass

Importante

Most libraries will want to leave this set to 'Don't allow.' This preference turns off the requirement to log into the self checkout machine with a staff username and password by storing the username and password for automatic login.
AutoSelfCheckAllowed Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ the web-based self checkout system to automatically login with this staff login ___ and this password ___ .
AutoSelfCheckAllowed Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
AutoSelfCheckID Value:
  • The username of a staff patron with 'circulate' permissions.
AutoSelfCheckPass Value:
  • The password of a staff patron with 'circulate' permissions.
2.1.5.7.3. SCOUserCSS
Asks: Include the following CSS on all pages in the web-based self checkout
Descrição:
  • The CSS entered in this preference will be used on all of your Koha self checkout screens.
2.1.5.7.4. SCOUserJS
Asks: Include the following JavaScript on all pages in the web-based self checkout
Descrição:
  • The JavaScript entered in this preference will effect all of your Koha self checkout screens.
2.1.5.7.5. SelfCheckHelpMessage
Asks: Include the following HTML in the Help page of the web-based self checkout system
Descrição:
  • Clicking the 'Help' link in the top right of the self checkout interface opens up a three step process for using the self check interface. Adding HTML to this system preference will print that additional help text above what's already included.
2.1.5.7.6. SelfCheckoutByLogin
Default: Barcode
Asks: Have patrons login into the web-based self checkout system with their ___
Values:
  • Código de barras
  • Username and password
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you decide how your patrons will log in to the self checkout machine. Barcode is the patron's card number and their username and password is set using the opac/staff username and password fields on the patron record.
2.1.5.7.7. SelfCheckReceiptPrompt
Default: Show
Asks: ___ the print receipt popup dialog when self checkout is finished.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference controls whether a prompt shows up on the web based self check out when the patron clicks the 'Finish' button.
2.1.5.7.8. SelfCheckTimeout
Default: 120
Asks: Time out the current patron's web-based self checkout system login after ___ seconds.
Descrição:
  • After the machine is idle for the time entered in this preference the self check out system will log out the current patron and return to the starting screen.
2.1.5.7.9. ShowPatronImageInWebBasedSelfCheck
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ the patron's picture (if one has been added) when they use the web-based self checkout.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
2.1.5.7.10. WebBasedSelfCheck
Default: Don't enable
Asks: ___ the web-based self checkout system.
Values:
  • Don't enable
  • Enable
Enabling this preference will allow access to the self checkout module in Koha.

2.1.6. Criadores

These preferences have to do with creating content.
Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Creators

2.1.6.1. Patron Cards

These preferences are in reference to the Patron Card Creator tool.
2.1.6.1.1. ImageLimit
Asks: Limit the number of creator images stored in the database to ___ images.

2.1.7. Enhanced Content

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Enhanced Content

Importante

Always read the terms of service associated with external data sources to be sure that you are using the products within the allowed limits.

Nota

You cannot have more than one service for cover images (including local cover images) set up. If you set up more than one you will get multiple cover images. Instead choose only one source for cover images.

2.1.7.1. Todos

2.1.7.1.1. FRBRizeEditions
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ other editions of an item on the staff client
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • Using the rules set forth in the Functional Requirements for Bibliographic records, this option, when enabled, pulls all editions of the same title available in your collection regardless of material type. Items will appear under an 'Editions' tab on the detail page for the title in question.. According to Libraries Unlimited's Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science (http://lu.com/odlis/), FRBRizing the catalog involves collating MARC records of similar materials. FRBRization brings together entities (sets of Works, Expressions, or Manifestations), rather than just sets of Items. It can aid patrons in selecting related items, expressions, and manifestations that will serve their needs. When it is set to "Show", the OPAC will query one or more ISBN web services for associated ISBNs and display an Editions tab on the details pages. Once this preference is enabled, the library must select one of the ISBN options (ThingISBN and/or XISBN). This option is only for the Staff Client; the OPACFRBRizeEditions option must be enabled to have the Editions tab appear on the OPAC.

Importante

Requires that you turn on one or more of the ISBN services (ThingISBN and/or XISBN)
2.1.7.1.2. OPACFRBRizeEditions
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ other editions of an item on the OPAC.
Descrição:
  • Using the rules set forth in the Functional Requirements for Bibliographic records, this option, when enabled, pulls all editions of the same title available in your collection regardless of material type. Items will appear under an 'Editions' tab on the detail page for the title in question.. According to Libraries Unlimited's Online Dictionary for Library and Information Science (http://lu.com/odlis/), FRBRizing the catalog involves collating MARC records of similar materials. FRBRization brings together entities (sets of Works, Expressions, or Manifestations), rather than just sets of Items. It can aid patrons in selecting related items, expressions, and manifestations that will serve their needs. When it is set to "Show", the OPAC will query one or more ISBN web services for associated ISBNs and display an Editions tab on the details pages. Once this preference is enabled, the library must select one of the ISBN options (ThingISBN and/or XISBN). This option is only for the OPAC; the FRBRizeEditions option must be turned "On" to have the Editions tab appear on the Staff Client.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
This preference pulls all editions of the same title available in your collection regardless of material type. Items will appear under an 'Editions' tab on the detail page for the title in question.

Importante

Requires that you turn on one or more of the ISBN services (ThingISBN and/or XISBN)

2.1.7.2. Amazon

2.1.7.2.1. AmazonAssocTag
Asks: Put the associate tag ___ on links to Amazon.

Nota

This can net your library referral fees if a patron decides to buy an item after clicking through to Amazon from your site.
Descrição:
  • An Amazon Associates Tag allows a library to earn a percentage of all purchases made on Amazon when a patron accesses Amazon's site via links on the library's website. More information about the Amazon Associates program is available at Amazon's Affiliate Program's website, https://affiliate-program.amazon.com/. Before a tag can be obtained, however, the library must first apply for an Amazon Web Services (AWS) account. Applications are free of charge and can be made at http://aws.amazon.com. Once an AWS account has been established, the library can then obtain the Amazon Associates Tag.
2.1.7.2.2. AmazonCoverImages
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ cover images from Amazon on search results and item detail pages on the staff interface.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference makes it possible to either allow or prevent Amazon cover images from being displayed in the Staff Client. Cover images are retrieved by Amazon, which pulls the content based on the first ISBN number in the item's MARC record. Amazon offers this service free of charge. If the value for this preference is set to "Show", the cover images will appear in the Staff Client, and if it is set to "Don't show", the images will not appear. Finally, if you're using Amazon cover images, all other cover image services must be disabled. If they are not disabled, they will prevent AmazonCoverImages from functioning properly.
2.1.7.2.3. AmazonLocale
Default: American
Asks: Use Amazon data from its ___ website.
Value:
  • American
  • British
  • Canadian
  • French
  • German
  • Japonês
2.1.7.2.4. OPACAmazonCoverImages
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ cover images from Amazon on search results and item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference makes it possible to either allow or prevent Amazon cover images from being displayed in the OPAC. Cover images are retrieved by Amazon, which pulls the content based on the first ISBN number in the item's MARC record. Amazon offers this service free of charge. If the value for this preference is set to "Show", the cover images will appear in the OPAC, and if it is set to "Don't show", the images will not appear. Finally, if you're using Amazon cover images, all other cover image services must be disabled. If they are not disabled, they will prevent AmazonCoverImages from functioning properly.

2.1.7.3. Babelthèque

2.1.7.3.1. Babeltheque
Default: Don't
Asks: ___ include information (such as reviews and citations) from Babelthèque in item detail pages on the OPAC.
Descrição:
  • This preference makes it possible to display a Babeltheque tab in the OPAC, allowing patrons to access tags, reviews, and additional title information provided by Babeltheque. The information which Babeltheque supplies is drawn from the French language-based Babelio.com, a French service similar to LibraryThing for Libraries. More information about Babeltheque is available through its website, http://www.babeltheque.com. Libraries that wish to allow access to this information must first register for the service at http://www.babeltheque.com. Please note that this information is only provided in French.
Values:
  • Do
  • Don't
2.1.7.3.2. Babeltheque_url_js
Asks: ___ Defined the url for the Babeltheque javascript file (eg. http://www.babeltheque.com/bw_XX.js)
2.1.7.3.3. Babeltheque_url_update
Asks: ___ Defined the url for the Babeltheque update periodically (eq. http://www.babeltheque.com/.../file.csv.bz2).

2.1.7.4. Baker & Taylor

Importante

This is a pay service, you must contact Baker & Taylor to subscribe to this service before setting these options.
2.1.7.4.1. BakerTaylorEnabled
Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ Baker and Taylor links and cover images to the OPAC and staff client. This requires that you have entered in a username and password (which can be seen in image links).
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't add
Descrição:
  • This preference makes it possible to display Baker & Taylor content (book reviews, descriptions, cover images, etc.) in both the Staff Client and the OPAC. Libraries that wish to display Baker & Taylor content must first register and pay for this service with Baker & Taylor (http://www.btol.com). If Baker & Taylor content is enabled be sure to turn off other cover and review services to prevent interference.

Importante

To use this you will need to also set the BakerTaylorUsername & BakerTaylorPassword system preferences
2.1.7.4.2. BakerTaylorBookstoreURL
Asks: Baker and Taylor "My Library Bookstore" links should be accessed at https:// ___ isbn
Descrição:
  • Some libraries generate additional funding for the library by selling books and other materials that are purchased from or have been previously leased from Baker & Taylor. These materials can be accessed via a link on the library's website. This service is often referred to as "My Library Bookstore." In order to participate in this program, the library must first register and pay for the service with Baker & Taylor. Additional information about this and other services provided by Baker & Taylor is available at the Baker & Taylor website, http://www.btol.com. The BakerTaylorBookstoreURL preference establishes the URL in order to link to the library's Baker & Taylor-backed online bookstore, if such a bookstore has been established. The default for this field is left blank; if no value is entered, the links to My Library Bookstore will remain inactive. If enabling this preference, enter the library's Hostname and Parent Number in the appropriate location within the URL. The "key" value (key=) should be appended to the URL, and https:// should be prepended.
This should be filled in with something like koha.mylibrarybookstore.com/MLB/actions/searchHandler.do?nextPage=bookDetails&parentNum=10923&key=

Nota

Leave it blank to disable these links.

Importante

Be sure to get this information from Baker & Taylor when subscribing.
2.1.7.4.3. BakerTaylorUsername & BakerTaylorPassword
Asks: Access Baker and Taylor using username ___ and password ___
Descriptions:
  • This setting in only applicable if the library has a paid subscription to the external Content Café service from Baker & Taylor. Use the box provided to enter in the library's Content Café username and password. Also, ensure that the BakerTaylorBookstoreURL and BakerTaylorEnabled settings are properly set. The Content Café service is a feed of enhanced content such as cover art, professional reviews, and summaries that is displayed along with Staff Client/OPAC search results. For more information on this service please see the Baker & Taylor website: http://www.btol.com

Importante

Be sure to get this information from Baker & Taylor when subscribing.

2.1.7.5. Google

2.1.7.5.1. GoogleJackets
Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ cover images from Google Books to search results and item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't add
Descrição:
  • This setting controls the display of applicable cover art from the free Google Books database, via the Google Books API. Please note that to use this feature, all other cover services should be turned off.

2.1.7.6. HTML5 Media

2.1.7.6.1. HTML5MediaEnabled
Default: not at all
Asks: Show a tab with a HTML5 media player for files catalogued in field 856 ___
Values:
  • in OPAC and staff client
  • in the OPAC
  • in the staff client
  • not at all
Descrição:
  • If you have media elements in the 856 of your MARC record this preference can run/show those media files in a separate tab using HTML5.
2.1.7.6.2. HTML5MediaExtensions
Default: webm|ogg|ogv|oga|vtt
Asks: Media file extensions ___
Descrição:
  • Enter in file extensions separated with bar (|)

2.1.7.7. IDreamLibraries

IDreamBooks.com aggregates book reviews by critics to help you discover the very best of what's coming out each week. These preferences let you integrated content from IDreamBooks.com in to your Koha OPAC.

Nota

This is a new website and has limited content, so you may only see these features on new popular titles until the database grows some more.
2.1.7.7.1. IDreamBooksReadometer
Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ a "Readometer" that summarizes the reviews gathered by IDreamBooks.com to the OPAC details page.
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't add
2.1.7.7.2. IDreamBooksResults
Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ the rating from IDreamBooks.com to OPAC search results.
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't add
2.1.7.7.3. IDreamBooksReviews
Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ a tab on the OPAC details with book reviews from critics aggregated by IDreamBooks.com.
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't add

2.1.7.8. LibraryThing

LibraryThing for Libraries is a pay service. You must first contact LibraryThing directly for pricing and subscription information. Learn more at http://www.librarything.com/forlibraries. Also, for further configuration instructions please see the LibraryThing Wiki: http://www.librarything.com/wiki/index.php/Koha
2.1.7.8.1. LibraryThingForLibrariesEnabled
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ reviews, similar items, and tags from Library Thing for Libraries on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This setting is only applicable if the library has a paid subscription to the external LibraryThing for Libraries service. This service can provide patrons with the display of expanded information on catalog items such as book recommendations. It also can offer advanced features like tagged browsing, patron written reviews, and a virtual library display accessed from the details tab.

Importante

If this is set to 'show' you will need to enter a value in the 'LibraryThingForLibrariesID' system preference.
2.1.7.8.2. LibraryThingForLibrariesID
Asks: Access Library Thing for Libraries using the customer ID ___
Descrição:
  • This setting is only applicable if the library has a paid subscription to the external LibraryThing for Libraries service. Use the box provided to enter in the library's LibraryThing for Libraries ID as provided to the library by LibraryThing. The ID number is a series of numbers in the form ###-#########, and can be found on the library's account page at LibraryThing for Libraries. This service can provide patrons with the display of expanded information on catalog items such as book recommendations and cover art. It also can offer advanced features like tagged browsing, patron written reviews, and a virtual library display accessed from the details tab.
2.1.7.8.3. LibraryThingForLibrariesTabbedView
Default: in line with bibliographic information
Asks: Show Library Thing for Libraries content ___
Values:
  • in line with bibliographic information
  • in tabs
Descrição:
  • This setting is only applicable if the library has a paid subscription to the external LibraryThing for Libraries service. This service can provide patrons with the display of expanded information on catalog items such as book recommendations and cover art. It also can offer advanced features like tagged browsing, patron written reviews, and a virtual library display accessed from the details tab.
2.1.7.8.4. ThingISBN
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ the ThingISBN service to show other editions of a title
Values:
  • Don't use
  • Use
Descrição:
  • Set to 'Use' to display an "Editions" tab on the item's detail page. Editions are listed, complete with cover art (if you have one of the cover services enabled) and bibliographic information. The feed comes from LibraryThing's ThingISBN web service. This is a free service to non-commercial sites with fewer than 1,000 requests per day.

Importante

Requires FRBRizeEditions and/or OPACFRBRizeEditions set to 'show'

Importante

This is separate from Library Thing for Libraries and does not have a cost associated with it.

2.1.7.9. Local Cover Images

2.1.7.9.1. AllowMultipleCovers
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ multiple images to be attached to each bibliographic record.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • If this preference is set to 'Allow' then you can upload multiple images that will appear in the images tab on the bib record in the OPAC and the staff client. This preference requires that either one or both LocalCoverImages and OPACLocalCoverImages are set to 'Display.'
2.1.7.9.2. LocalCoverImages
Default: Don't display
Asks: ___ local cover images on intranet search and details pages.
Values:
  • Mostrar
  • Don't display
Descrição:
  • Setting this preference to 'Display' allows you to upload your own cover images to bib records and display them on the detail page in the staff client. At this time the cover will only show under the 'Images' tab on the holdings table on the detail display, not next to the title at the top left or on the search results.
2.1.7.9.3. OPACLocalCoverImages
Default: Don't display
Asks: ___ local cover images on OPAC search and details pages.
Values:
  • Mostrar
  • Don't display
Descrição:
  • Setting this preference to 'Display' allows you to upload your own cover images to bib records and display them on the detail page and search results in the OPAC.

2.1.7.10. Selecione o romancista

Novelist Select is not a free service. Contact your Ebsco representitive to get your log in information to embed this content in the OPAC.

Importante

Novelist Select does not include cover images for the search results and bibliographic detail pages. You can choose any other cover image service for this content or you can contract with Ebsco to get access to the Baker & Taylor Content Cafe for an added fee.
2.1.7.10.1. NovelistSelectEnabled
Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ Novelist Select content to the OPAC.
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't add

Importante

Enabling this requires that you have entered in a user profile and password in the NovelistSelectProfile & NovelistSelectPassword preferences
Descrição:
  • Novelist Select from Ebsco is a subscription service that can provide additional content in the OPAC.
2.1.7.10.2. NovelistSelectProfile & NovelistSelectPassword
Asks: Access Novelist Select using user profile ___ and password ___.

Importante

This information will be visible if someone views the source code on your OPAC.
Descrição:
  • Novelist Select from Ebsco is a subscription service that can provide additional content in the OPAC.
2.1.7.10.3. NovelistSelectView
Default: in an OPAC tab
Asks: Display Novelist Select content ___
Descrição:
  • Novelist Select provides a lot of content, for that reason you have four choices of where to display this content. The default view is in a tab in the holdings table.
    The content is the same if you choose to show it above the holdings table or below it. If shown in the right column of the page it's the same content, but displays a bit differently since space is limited.
Values:
  • above the holdings table
  • below the holdings table
  • in an OPAC tab
  • under the Save Record dropdown on the right

2.1.7.11. OCLC

2.1.7.11.1. XISBN
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ the OCLC xISBN service to show other editions of a title
Descrição:
  • Set to 'Use' to display an "Editions" tab on the item's detail page. Editions are listed, complete with cover art and bibliographic information. The feed comes from OCLC's xISBN web service. The feed limit for non-commercial sites is 1000 requests per day.
Values:
  • Don't use
  • Use

Importante

Requires FRBRizeEditions and/or OPACFRBRizeEditions set to 'show'
2.1.7.11.2. OCLCAffiliateID
Asks: Use the OCLC affiliate ID ___ to access the xISBN service.
Descrição:
  • This setting is only applicable if the library has an OCLC Affiliate ID. This allows WorldCat searching in the OPAC via the XISBN programming interface. Simply enter the library's OCLC Affiliate ID in the box provided. Please note that using this data is only necessary if FRBRizeEditions and/or OPACFRBRizeEditions and XISBN settings are enabled. For more information on this service please visit the OCLC website: http://www.worldcat.org/affiliate/default.jsp.

Importante

Unless you have signed up for an ID with OCLC, you are limited to 1000 requests per day. Available at: http://www.worldcat.org/affiliate/webservices/xisbn/app.jsp
2.1.7.11.3. XISBNDailyLimit
Default: 999
Asks: Only use the xISBN service ___ times a day.

Importante

Unless you have signed up for an ID with OCLC, you are limited to 1000 requests per day. Available at: http://www.worldcat.org/affiliate/webservices/xisbn/app.jsp

2.1.7.12. Open Library

2.1.7.12.1. OpenLibraryCovers
Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ cover images from Open Library to search results and item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't add
Descrição:
  • This setting controls the display of applicable cover art from the free Open Library database, via the Open Library API. Please note that to use this feature, all other cover services should be turned off.

2.1.7.13. Overdrive

OverDrive is an pay service. You must first contact OverDrive directly for pricing and subscription information. Enabling this service will integrate Overdrive results in to your OPAC searches. You will have to apply for these 3 pieces of information through an application as an API developer. Overdrive API applications are evaluated once a week so you may not be able to use this feature immediately after signing up. To learn more please contact your OverDrive representative.
2.1.7.13.1. OverDriveClientKey and OverDriveClientSecret
Asks: Include OverDrive availability information with the client key __ and client secret ___
Descrição:
  • OverDrive customers can get this information by visiting the OverDrive Developer Portal and following the instructions found there to apply as an API developer. Once this data and the OverDriveLibraryID are populated you will see OverDrive results on your OPAC searches.
2.1.7.13.2. OverDriveLibraryID
Asks: Show items from the OverDrive catalog of library # ___
Descrição:

2.1.7.14. Plugins

2.1.7.14.1. UseKohaPlugins
Default: Don't enable
Asks: ___ the ability to use Koha Plugins.
Values:
  • Don't enable
  • Enable

Nota

The plugin system must also be enabled in the Koha configuration file to be fully enabled. Learn more in the Plugins chapter.

2.1.7.15. Syndetics

Syndetics is a pay service. You must first contact Syndetics directly for pricing and subscription information.
2.1.7.15.1. SyndeticsEnabled
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ content from Syndetics.
Values:
  • Don't use
  • Use
Descrição:
  • When this option is enabled any of the Syndetics options can be used.

Importante

Requires that you enter your SyndeticsClientCode before this content will appear.
2.1.7.15.2. SyndeticsClientCode
Asks: Use the client code ___ to access Syndetics.
Descrição:
  • Once the library signs up for Syndetics' services, Syndetics will provide the library with an access code. (Visit the Syndetics homepage at http://www.bowker.com/syndetics/ for more information.) This is the code that must be entered to access Syndetics' subscription services. Syndetics is a paid subscription service. This value must be entered before SyndeticsEditions can be enabled. If the code is lost, corrupted, or forgotten, a new one can be obtained from http://www.bowker.com/syndetics/.

Importante

You will need to get your client code directly from Syndetics.
2.1.7.15.3. SyndeticsCoverImages & SyndeticsCoverImageSize
SyndeticsCoverImages Default: Don't show
SyndeticsCoverImageSize Default: medium
Asks: ___ cover images from Syndetics on search results and item detail pages on the OPAC in a ___ size.
Descriptions:
  • When enabled, SyndeticsCoverImages, allows libraries to display Syndetics' collection of full-color cover images for books, videos, DVDs and CDs on their OPAC. For each book or item that comes up during a user search, the cover image for that title will be displayed. Since these cover images come in three sizes, the optimum size must be selected using the SyndeticsCoverImageSize preference after SyndeticsCoverImages are enabled. Syndetics cover images come in two sizes: mid-size (187 x 187 pixels), and large (400 x 400 pixels). Syndetics is a paid subscription service. The SyndeticsClientCode must be entered and the SyndeticsEnabled option must be activated before this service can be used. Other cover image preferences should also be disabled to avoid interference.
SyndeticsCoverImages Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
SyndeticsCoverImageSize Values:
  • medium
  • large
2.1.7.15.4. SyndeticsAuthorNotes
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ notes about the author of a title from Syndetics on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • When this option is set to "Show", Syndetics provides notes and short author biographies for more that 300,000 authors, in both fiction and nonfiction. With this option enabled the library can display Syndetics Author Notes on the OPAC. According to the Syndetics Solutions website (http://www.bowker.com/syndetics/), Author Notes include lists of contributors for many multi-author texts and compilations. The SyndeticsClientCode must be entered and the SyndeticsEnabled option must be activated before this service can be used.
2.1.7.15.5. SyndeticsAwards
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ information from Syndetics about the awards a title has won on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • When this option is set to "Show", Syndetics provides its clients with a list of awards that any title has won. With this service enabled the library can display those awards for each book on its website. For each book or item that comes up during a user search, the list of awards for that title will be displayed. When a user clicks on a given award, information about that award is presented along with a list of the other titles that have won that award. If the user clicks on any title in the list, they will see holdings information about that title in their region. This option is a paid subscription service. The SyndeticsClientCode must be entered and the SyndeticsEnabled option must be activated before this service can be used.
2.1.7.15.6. SyndeticsEditions
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ information about other editions of a title from Syndetics on item detail pages on the OPAC
Descrição:
  • When enabled this option shows information on other editions of a title from Syndetics on the item detail pages of the OPAC. Syndetics is a paid subscription service. The SyndeticsClientCode must be entered and the SyndeticsEnabled option must be activated before this service can be used.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir

Importante

Requires OPACFRBRizeEditions set to 'show'
2.1.7.15.7. SyndeticsExcerpt
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ excerpts from of a title from Syndetics on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference allows Syndetics to display excerpts given to them from selected publishers. The excerpts are available from prominently reviewed new titles, both fiction and non-fiction. The excerpts include poems, essays, recipes, forwards and prefaces. Automatic links provided by the ISBNs within local MARC records are required to integrate Syndetics secured, high-speed Internet servers to the library OPACs. For more information see (http://www.bowker.com/syndetics/).
2.1.7.15.8. SyndeticsReviews
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ reviews of a title from Syndetics on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • Syndetics Reviews is an accumulation of book reviews available from a variety of journals and serials. The reviews page displays colored images of reviewed books dust jackets, partnered with the names of the journal or serial providing the review. Clicking on an icon opens a window revealing the book title, author's name, book cover icon and the critic's opinion of the book. Automatic links provided by the ISBNs within local MARC records are required to integrate Syndetics secured, high-speed Internet servers to the library OPACs. For more information see (http://www.bowker.com/syndetics/).
2.1.7.15.9. SyndeticsSeries
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ information on other books in a title's series from Syndetics on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • Each fiction title within a series is linked to the complete series record. The record displays each title in reading order and also displays the publication order, if different. Alternate series titles are also displayed. Automatic links provided by the ISBNs within local MARC records are required to integrate Syndetics secured, high- speed Internet servers to the library OPACs. For more information see (http://www.bowker.com/syndetics/).
2.1.7.15.10. SyndeticsSummary
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ a summary of a title from Syndetics on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • Providing more than 5.6 million summaries and annotations derived from book jackets, edited publisher copy, or independently written annotations from Book News, Inc. Covering fiction and non-fiction, this summaries option provides annotations on both trade and scholarly titles. For more information see (http://www.bowker.com/syndetics/).
2.1.7.15.11. SyndeticsTOC
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ the table of contents of a title from Syndetics on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference allows staff and patrons to review the Table of Contents from a wide variety of publications from popular self-help books to conference proceedings. Specific Information access is the main purpose for this option, allowing patrons guidance to their preferred section of the book. Special arrangements with selected book services is used to obtain the table of contents for new publications each year. Automatic links provided by the ISBNs within local MARC records are required to integrate Syndetics secured, high-speed Internet servers to the library OPACs. For more information see (http://www.bowker.com/syndetics/).

2.1.7.16. Tagging

2.1.7.16.1. TagsEnabled
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons and staff to put tags on items.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • Set to 'Allow' enable tagging. A tag is metadata, a word added to identify an item. Tags allow patrons to classify materials on their own. TagsEnabled is the main switch that permits the tagging features. TagsEnable must be set to 'Allow' to allow for other tagging features.
2.1.7.16.2. TagsModeration
Default: Don't require
Asks: ___ that tags submitted by patrons be reviewed by a staff member before being shown.
Values:
  • Don't require
  • Require
Descrição:
  • When set to 'Require,' all tags to be first filtered by the tag moderator. Only approved tags will be visible to patrons. When set to 'Don't require' tags will bypass the tag moderator and patrons' tags to be immediately visible. When this preference is enabled the moderator, a staff member, would approve the tag in the Staff Client. The moderator will have the option to approve or reject each pending tag suggestion.
When moderation is required all tags go through the tag moderation tool before becoming visible.
  • Get there: More > Tools > Tags
2.1.7.16.3. TagsShowOnList
Default: 6
Asks: Show ___ tags on search results on the OPAC.

Nota

Set the value to 0 (zero) to turn this feature off.
2.1.7.16.4. TagsInputOnList
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to input tags on search results on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
2.1.7.16.5. TagsShowOnDetail
Default: 10
Asks: Show ___ tags on item detail pages on the OPAC.

Nota

Set the value to 0 (zero) to turn this feature off.
2.1.7.16.6. TagsInputOnDetail
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to input tags on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
2.1.7.16.7. TagsExternalDictionary
Asks: Allow tags in the dictionary of the ispell executable ___ on the server to be approved without moderation.
Descrição:
  • The dictionary includes a list of accepted and rejected tags. The accepted list includes all the tags that have been pre-allowed. The rejected list includes tags that are not allowed. This preference identifies the "accepted" dictionary used. Ispell is an open source dictionary which can be used as a list of accepted terms. Since the dictionary allows for accurately spelled obscenities, the libraries policy may dictate that modifications are made to the Ispell dictionary if this preference is use. For more information about Ispell http://www.gnu.org/software/ispell/ispell.html. Enter the path on your server to a local ispell executable, used to set $Lingua::Ispell::path.

2.1.8. I18N/L10N

These preferences control your Internationalization and Localization settings.
Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > I18N/L10N

2.1.8.1. alphabet

Default: A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Asks: Use the alphabet ___ for lists of browsable letters. This should be a space separated list of uppercase letters.
Descrição:
  • This preference allows you define your own alphabet for browsing patrons in Koha.

2.1.8.2. CalendarFirstDayOfWeek

Default: Sunday
Asks: Use ___ as the first day of week in the calendar.
Values:
  • Segunda
  • Domingo
Descrição:
  • Using this preference you can control what day shows as the first day of the week in the calendar pop ups throughout Koha and on the Calendar tool. If you change this preference and don't see a change in your browser try clearing your cache since it makes changes to the Javascript on these pages.

2.1.8.3. dateformat

Default: mm/dd/yyyy
Asks: Format dates like ___
Values:
  • dd/mm/yyyy
  • mm/dd/yyyy
  • yyyy/mm/dd
Descrição:
  • This preference controls how the date is displayed. The options are the United States method, mm/dd/yyyy (04/24/2010), the metric method, dd/mm/yyyy (24/04/2010) or ISO, which is the International Standard of Organization, yyyy/mm/dd (2010/04/24). The International Standard of Organization would primarily be used by libraries with locations in multiple nations that may use different date formats, to have a single display type, or if the library would be in a region that does not use the United States or metric method. More information regarding the ISO date format can be found at http://www.iso.org/iso/iso_catalogue.htm.

2.1.8.4. language

Default: English
Asks: Enable the following languages on the staff interface
Values:
  • Inglês

2.1.8.5. opaclanguages

Default: English
Asks: Enable the following languages on the OPAC
Values:
  • Inglês
To install additional languages you need to run misc/translation/install-code.pl. For example, to install French you would run the following command install-code.pl fr-FR to make the templates, once they exist and are in the right place then they will show up as an option in this preference.

2.1.8.6. opaclanguagesdisplay

Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ patrons to select their language on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow

2.1.8.7. TimeFormat

Default: 24 hour format
Asks: Format times in ___
Values:
  • 12 hour format (eg 02:18PM)
  • 24 hour format (eg 14:18)

2.1.9. Uso local

These preferences are defined locally.
Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Local Use

Nota

Sometimes preferences which are either new or outdated will appear in this tab, if you didn't add any preferences to this tab then it's best to ignore preferences listed here.

2.1.10. Logs

Logs keep track of transaction on the system. You can decide which actions you want to log and which you don't using these preferences.
Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Logs

2.1.10.1. AuthoritiesLog

Default: Don't log
Asks: ___ changes to authority records.
Values:
  • Don't log
  • Log

2.1.10.2. BorrowersLog

Default: Log
Asks: ___ changes to patron records.
Values:
  • Don't log
  • Log

2.1.10.3. CataloguingLog

Default: Don't log
Asks: ___ any changes to bibliographic or item records.
Values:
  • Don't log
  • Log

Importante

Since this occurs whenever a book is cataloged, edited, or checked in or out it can be very resource intensive - slowing down your system.

2.1.10.4. FinesLog

Default: Log
Asks: ___ when overdue fines are charged or automatically forgiven.
Values:
  • Don't log
  • Log

2.1.10.5. IssueLog

Default: Log
Asks: ___ when items are checked out.
Values:
  • Don't log
  • Log

2.1.10.6. LetterLog

Default: Log
Asks: ___ when an automatic claim notice is sent.
Values:
  • Don't log
  • Log

Nota

This log tracks all notices that go to patrons including the overdue notices.

2.1.10.7. ReturnLog

Default: Log
Asks: ___ when items are returned.
Values:
  • Don't log
  • Log

2.1.10.8. SubscriptionLog

Default: Log
Asks: ___ when serials are added, deleted or changed.
Values:
  • Don't log
  • Log

2.1.11. OPAC

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > OPAC

2.1.11.1. Appearance

These preferences control how things appear in the OPAC.
2.1.11.1.1. AuthorisedValueImages
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ images for authorized values (such as lost statuses and locations) in search results and item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Get there: More > Administration > Authorized Values
2.1.11.1.2. BiblioDefaultView
Default: in simple form
Asks: By default, show bib records ___
Values:
  • as specified in the ISBD template.
    • See ISBD preference for more information
  • in simple form.
  • in their MARC format.
Descrição:
  • This preference determines the level of bibliographic detail that the patron will see on the OPAC detail page. The simple form displays the graphical interface; MARC format displays the MARC21 cataloging view; ISBD displays the ISBD (International Standard Bibliographic Description, AACR2) view.
2.1.11.1.3. COinSinOPACResults
Default: Include
Asks: ___ COinS / OpenURL / Z39.88 in OPAC search results.
Values:
  • Don't include
    • If you choose not to include COinS on the search results, it will still be loaded on the individual bibliographic records.
  • Include
    • Enabling this feature will slow OPAC search response times.
Descrição:
  • COinS stands for ContextObjects in Spans. COinS is a method to embed bibliographic metadata in the HTML code of web pages. This allows bibliographic software to publish machine-readable bibliographic items and client reference management software (such as Zotero) to retrieve bibliographic metadata. The metadata can also be sent to an OpenURL resolver. This allows, for instance, searching for a copy of a book in one's own library.
2.1.11.1.4. DisplayOPACiconsXSLT
Default: Don't show
Asks: On pages displayed with XSLT stylesheets on the OPAC, ___ icons for itemtype and authorized values.

Importante

OPACXSLTResultsDisplay and/or OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay must be set to use an XSLT stylesheet for this to show (default or custom)
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir

Nota

See the XSLT Icon Guide for more information on these icons.
2.1.11.1.5. hidelostitems
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ lost items on search and detail pages.
Descrição:
  • Items that are marked lost by the library can either be shown or not shown on the OPAC. By setting the value to "Don't show," the lost item is not shown on the OPAC. By setting the value "Show," the lost item is shown on the OPAC for patrons to view with a status of 'lost.'
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
2.1.11.1.6. HighlightOwnItemsOnOPAC & HighlightOwnItemsOnOPACWhich
HighlightOwnItemsOnOPAC Default: Don't emphasize
HighlightOwnItemsOnOPACWhich Default: patron's home library
Asks: ___ results from the ___ by moving the results to the front and increasing the size or highlighting the rows for those results.
HighlightOwnItemsOnOPAC Values:
  • Don't emphasize
  • Emphasize
HighlightOwnItemsOnOPACWhich Values:
  • OPAC's branch based via the URL
    • The library is chosen based on the Apache environment variable BRANCHCODE. For example, this could be added to the OPAC section of koha-httpd.conf: SetEnv BRANCHCODE "CPL"
  • patron's home library
    • The items emphasized will be those of the same library as the patron's library. If no one is logged into the OPAC, no items will be highlighted.

Importante

This preference will only effect sites that are not using an XSLT stylesheet. XSLT stylesheets are defined in the OPACXSLTResultsDisplay and OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay preferences.
2.1.11.1.7. LibraryName
Asks: Show ___ as the name of the library on the OPAC.

Nota

This value will appear in the title bar of the browser

Nota

Edit 'opacheader' if you'd like to add a library name above your search box on the OPAC
2.1.11.1.8. NoLoginInstructions
Asks: Show the following HTML on the OPAC login form when a patron is not logged in:
Descrição:
  • This preference allows you to override the default text seen on the log in page in the Koha OPAC. The default HTML is:
    <h5>Don't have a password yet?</h5>
    <p> If you don't have a password yet, stop by the circulation desk the next time you're in the library. We'll happily set one up for you.</p>
    <h5>Don't have a library card?</h5>
    <p> If you don't have a library card, stop by your local library to sign up.</p>
    Any HTML in this box will replace the above text below the log in box.
2.1.11.1.9. OpacAddMastheadLibraryPulldown
Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ a library select pulldown menu on the OPAC masthead.
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't Add
2.1.11.1.10. OPACBaseURL
Asks: The OPAC is located at http:// ___
Descrição:
  • This preference is looking for the URL of your public catalog (OPAC) without the http:// in front of it (enter www.mycatalog.com instead of http://www.mycatalog.com). Once it is filled in Koha will use it to generate permanent links in your RSS feeds, for your social network share buttons and in your staff client when generating links to bib records in the OPAC.

Importante

Do not include a trailing slash in the URL this will break links created using this URL. (example: www.google.com not www.google.com/)

Importante

This must be filled in with the URL of your public catalog for RSS, unAPI, and search plugins to work.

Importante

This must be filled in with the URL of your public catalog to show 'OPAC View' links from bib records in the staff client:
2.1.11.1.11. opaccolorstylesheet
Asks: Include the additional CSS stylesheet ___ to override specified settings from the default stylesheet.
Descrição:
  • The preference can look for stylesheets in the template directory for your OPAC language, for instance: /koha-tmpl/opac-tmpl/prog/en/css. If you upload a custom file, opac-mystyles.css to this directory, you can specify it by entering opac-mystyles.css in your opaccolorstylesheet system preference. This adds your custom stylesheet as a linked stylesheet alongside the OPAC's default CSS files. This method is preferable because linked stylesheets are cached by the user's browser, meaning upon repeat visits to your site the user's browser will not have to re-download the stylesheet, instead using the copy in the browser's cache.
  • If you would rather, you can upload your CSS to another server and enter the full URL pointing to it's location remember to begin the URL with http://

Nota

Leave this field blank to disable it

Nota

This file will add a linked CSS, not replace the existing default CSS.

Importante

If using the CCSR theme, this preference must be set to color.css and any user generated CSS must be appended to the default color.css file.
2.1.11.1.12. opaccredits
Asks: Include the following HTML in the footer of all pages in the OPAC:

Nota

Click the 'Click to edit; link to enter HTML to appear at the bottom of every page in the OPAC
Descrição:
  • This setting is for credits that will appear at the bottom of your OPAC pages. Credits traditionally encompass copyright information, last date updated, hyperlinks or other information represented in an HTML format. This is static information and any updates must be entered manually.
Learn more in the OPAC Editable Regions section.
2.1.11.1.13. OPACDisplay856uAsImage
Default: Neither details or results page
Asks: Display the URI in the 856u field as an image on: ___
Values:
  • Both results and details pages
    • Importante

      Not implemented yet
  • Detail page only
  • Neither details or results page
  • Results page only
    • Importante

      Not yet implemented
Descrição:
  • In addition to this option being set, the corresponding XSLT option must be turned on. Also, the corresponding 856q field must have a valid MIME image extension (e.g., "jpg") or MIME image type (i.e. starting with "image/"), or the generic indicator "img" entered in the field. When all of the requirements are met, an image file will be displayed instead of the standard link text. Clicking on the image will open it in the same way as clicking on the link text. When you click on the image it should open to full size, in the current window or in a new window depending on the value in the system pref OPACURLOpenInNewWindow.
2.1.11.1.14. OpacExportOptions
Default: bibtex|dc|marcxml|marc8|utf8|marcstd|mods|ris
Asks: List export options that should be available from OPAC detail page separated by |: ___
Descrição:
  • In the OPAC on the right of each bib record there is a menu that allows for saving the record in various formats. This patch will allow you to define which options are in the pull down menu. Available options are: BIBTEX (bibtex), Dublin Core (dc), MARCXML (marcxml), MARC-8 encoded MARC (marc8), Unicode/UTF-8 encoded MARC (utf8), Unicode/UTF-8 encoded MARC without local use -9xx, x9x, xx9- fields and subfields (marcstd), MODS (mods), and RIS (ris).
2.1.11.1.15. OpacFavicon
Asks: Use the image at ___ for the OPAC's favicon.

Importante

This should be a complete URL, starting with http://

Nota

Turn your logo into a favicon with the Favicon Generator.
Descrição:
  • The favicon is the little icon that appears next to the URL in the address bar in most browsers. The default value for this field (if left blank) is the small 'K' in the Koha logo.
2.1.11.1.16. opacheader
Asks: Include the following HTML in the header of all pages in the OPAC

Nota

This value will appear above the main content of your page

Nota

Edit 'LibraryName' if you'd like to edit the contents of the <title> tag
Learn more in the OPAC Editable Regions section.
2.1.11.1.17. OpacHighlightedWords
Default: Don't highlight
Asks: ___ words the patron searched for in their search results.
Values:
  • Don't highlight
  • Highlight
2.1.11.1.18. OpacKohaUrl
Default: Don't show
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • When this preference is set to 'Show' text will appear in the bottom right of the OPAC footer stating 'Powered by Koha' and linking to the official Koha website.
2.1.11.1.19. opaclayoutstylesheet
Default: opac.css
Asks: Use the CSS stylesheet /css/ ___ on all pages in the OPAC, instead of the default
Descrição:
  • This setting's function is to point to the *.css file used to define the OPAC layout. A *.css file is a cascading stylesheet which is used in conjunction with HTML to set how the HTML page is formatted and will look on the OPAC. There are two stylesheets that come with the system; opac.css and opac2.css. A custom stylesheet may also be used. The stylesheets listed in the opaclayoutstylesheet preference are held on the Koha server.

Nota

Leave this field blank to disable it and let Koha use the default file instead

Importante

Using a custom value in this preference causes Koha to completely ignore the default layout stylesheet.
2.1.11.1.20. OpacMaintenance
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ a warning that the OPAC is under maintenance, instead of the OPAC itself.

Nota

this shows the same warning as when the database needs to be upgraded, but unconditionally.
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the system administrator to turn off the OPAC during maintenance and display a message to users. When this preference is switched to "Show" the OPAC is not usable. The text of this message is not editable at this time.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
    • When this preference is set to show the maintenance message the ability to search the OPAC is disabled and a message appears
2.1.11.1.21. OpacMainUserBlock
Default: Welcome to Koha... <hr>
Asks: Show the following HTML in its own column on the main page of the OPAC
Descrição:
  • HTML entered in this field will appear in the center of the main page of your OPAC
Learn more in the OPAC Editable Regions section.
2.1.11.1.22. OpacMainUserBlockMobile
Asks: Show the following HTML in its own column on the main page of the OPAC (mobile version)
Descrição:
  • This content will display below the search boxes when viewing the OPAC on a mobile device as long as the theme you're using has a mobile version.

Importante

This preference is only used with the CCSR theme.
2.1.11.1.23. OpacMaxItemsToDisplay
Default: 50
Asks: Display up to ___ items on the biblio detail page
Descrição:
  • This preference will help with slow load times on the bibliographic detail pages by limiting the number of items to display by default. If the biblio has more items than this, a link is displayed instead that allows the user to choose to display all items.
2.1.11.1.24. OPACMobileUserCSS
Asks: Include the following CSS for the mobile view on all pages in the OPAC
Descrição:
  • This CSS will be used when your OPAC is viewed on a mobile device as long as the theme you're using has a mobile version.

Importante

This preference is only used with the CCSR theme.
2.1.11.1.25. OPACMySummaryHTML
Asks: Include a "Links" column on the "my summary" tab when a user is logged in to the OPAC, with the following HTML (leave blank to disable).
Descrição:
  • In this preference you can enter HTML that will appear on the 'Checked Out' tab on the 'My Summary' section when logged in to the OPAC. The placeholders {BIBLIONUMBER}, {TITLE}, {ISBN} and {AUTHOR} will be replaced with information from the displayed record. This can be used to enter in 'share' links for social networks or generate searches against other library catalogs.
Sample Data:
<p><a href="http://www.facebook.com/sharer.php?u=http://YOUROPAC.ORG/cgi-bin/koha/opac-detail.pl?biblionumber={BIBLIONUMBER}">Share on Facebook</a>
<br />TITLE: {TITLE}
<br />AUTHOR: {AUTHOR}
<br />ISBN: {ISBN}
<br />BIBLIONUMBER: {BIBLIONUMBER}</p>
2.1.11.1.26. OPACMySummaryNote
Asks: Note to display on the patron summary page.
Descrição:
  • This preference will display text above the patron's summary and below the welcome message when the patron logs in to the OPAC and view their 'my summary' tab.
2.1.11.1.27. OpacNav
Default: Important links here.
Asks: Show the following HTML on the left hand column of the main page and patron account on the OPAC (generally navigation links)
Learn more in the OPAC Editable Regions section.
2.1.11.1.28. OpacNavBottom
Asks: Show the following HTML on the left hand column of the main page and patron account on the OPAC, after OpacNav, and before patron account links if available:
Description: When a patron is logged in to their account they see a series of tabs to access their account information. OpacNav appears above this list of tabs and OpacNavBottom will appear below them. When not on the patron account pages the HTML in OpacNavBottom will just appear right below OpacNav.
2.1.11.1.29. OpacNavRight
Asks: Show the following HTML in the right hand column of the main page under the main login form.
Description: HTML entered in this preference will appear on the right hand side of the OPAC under the log in form. If the log in form is not visible this content will move up on the right column.
2.1.11.1.30. OPACNoResultsFound
No Default
Asks: Display this HTML when no results are found for a search in the OPAC
This HTML will display below the existing notice that no results were found for your search.

Nota

You can insert placeholders {QUERY_KW} that will be replaced with the keywords of the query.
2.1.11.1.31. OpacPublic
Default: Enable
Asks: ___ Koha OPAC as public. Private OPAC requires authentication before accessing the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't enable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • This preference determines if your OPAC is accessible and searchable by anyone or only by members of the library. If set to 'Don't enable' only members who are logged into the OPAC can search. Most libraries will leave this setting at its default of 'Enable' to allow their OPAC to be searched by anyone and only require login for access to personalized content.
2.1.11.1.32. OPACResultsSidebar
Asks: Include the following HTML under the facets in OPAC search results
Descrição:
  • The HTML entered in this preference will appear on the search results pages below the list of facets on the left side of the screen.
2.1.11.1.33. OPACSearchForTitleIn
Default: <li><a href="http://worldcat.org/search?q={TITLE}" target="_blank">Other Libraries (WorldCat)</a></li> <li><a href="http://www.scholar.google.com/scholar?q={TITLE}" target="_blank">Other Databases (Google Scholar)</a></li> <li><a href="http://www.bookfinder.com/search/?author={AUTHOR}&title={TITLE}&st=xl&ac=qr" target="_blank">Online Stores (Bookfinder.com)</a></li>
Asks: Include a "More Searches" box on the detail pages of items on the OPAC, with the following HTML (leave blank to disable)

Nota

The placeholders {BIBLIONUMBER}, {CONTROLNUMBER}, {TITLE}, {ISBN}, {ISSN} and {AUTHOR} will be replaced with information from the displayed record.
2.1.11.1.34. OpacSeparateHoldings & OpacSeparateHoldingsBranch
OpacSeparateHoldings default: Don't separate
OpacSeparateHoldingsBranch default: home library
Asks: ___ items display into two tabs, where the first tab contains items whose ___ is the logged in user's library. The second tab will contain all other items.
OpacSeparateHoldings values:
  • Don't separate
  • Separate
OpacSeparateHoldingsBranch values:
  • holding library
  • home library
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you decide if you would like to have the holding information on the bibliographic detail page in the OPAC split in to multiple tabs. The default is to show all holdings on one tab.
2.1.11.1.35. OPACShowBarcode
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ the item's barcode on the holdings tab.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference allows you to control whether patrons can see items' barcodes in the OPAC.
2.1.11.1.36. OPACShowCheckoutName
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ the name of the patron that has an item checked out on item detail pages on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference allows all patrons to see who has the item checked out if it is checked out. In small corporate libraries (where the OPAC is behind a firewall and not publicly available) this can be helpful so coworkers can just contact the patron with the book themselves. In larger public and academic libraries setting this to 'Show' would pose serious privacy issues.
2.1.11.1.37. OpacShowFiltersPulldownMobile
Default: Show
Asks: ___ the search filters pulldown on the mobile version of the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference controls whether patrons can choose a search type when viewing the OPAC on mobile devices. If this is set to 'Don't show' then all searches will be keyword searches. This preference assumes that you're using a theme with a mobile version.
2.1.11.1.38. OPACShowHoldQueueDetails
Default: Don't show any hold details
Asks: ___ to patrons in the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show any hold details
  • Show holds
  • Show holds and priority level
  • Show priority level
2.1.11.1.39. OpacShowLibrariesPulldownMobile
Default: Show
Asks: ___ the libraries pulldown on the mobile version of the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference controls whether the library selector pull down shows when viewing the OPAC on a mobile device as long as the theme you're using has a mobile version.
2.1.11.1.40. OpacShowRecentComments
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ a link to recent comments in the OPAC masthead.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • If you have chosen to allow comments in your OPAC by setting reviewson to 'Allow' you can include a link to the recent comments under the search box at the top of your OPAC with this preference.
2.1.11.1.41. OPACShowUnusedAuthorities
Default: Show
Asks: ___ unused authorities in the OPAC authority browser.
Values:
  • Do not show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • When patrons search your authority file via the OPAC they will see all authorities in your system even if you don't have them linked to any bibliographic records. This preference lets you determine what the default behavior is when searching authorities via the OPAC. If you choose 'Do not show' it will only show patrons authority records that are linked to bib records in the search results. Otherwise the system will show all authority records even if they aren't linked to records.
2.1.11.1.42. opacsmallimage
Asks: Use the image at ___ in the OPAC header, instead of the Koha logo. If this image is a different size than the Koha logo, you will need to customize the CSS.
Descrição:
  • The opacsmallimage system pref is a little tricky to deal with because you really have to tweak some CSS at the same time. The default CSS defines a region just large enough to display the Koha logo, and if your logo doesn't match the Koha logo's dimensions (120 pixels wide by 38 pixels high), it won't display correctly.

Importante

This should be a complete URL, starting with http://

Importante

This preference is only used in the prog and ccsr themes.
2.1.11.1.43. OpacStarRatings
Default: no
Asks: Show star-ratings on ___ pages.
Values:
  • no
  • only details
  • results and details
Descrição:
  • Star ratings are a way for your patrons to leave ratings without having to leave a full review. Patrons who are not logged in will only be able to see the stars, once logged in patrons can click on the stars on the details page to leave their own rating. Clicking on the stars on the search results will not submit a rating.
2.1.11.1.44. OpacSuggestionManagedBy
Default: Show
Asks: ___ the name of the staff member who managed a suggestion in OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • If you're allowing patrons to make purchase suggestions then they will see the 'my suggestions' tab when logged in. This tab shows the patron the librarian who approved or rejected the purchase suggestion. This preference controls if the patron sees the librarian's name or not.
2.1.11.1.45. opacthemes
Default: prog
Asks: Use the ___ theme on the OPAC.
Values:
  • bootstrap
    This theme is completely responsive
  • ccsr
    This theme comes with a mobile version.
  • prog
    This is the original Koha 3.x theme and does not come with a mobile version.
2.1.11.1.46. OPACURLOpenInNewWindow
Default: don't
Asks: When patrons click on a link to another website from your OPAC (like Amazon or OCLC), ___ open the website in a new window.
Values:
  • do
  • don't
Descrição:
  • This preference determines if URLs in the OPAC will open in a new window or not. When clicking on a link in the OPAC, a patron does not need to worry about navigating away from their search results.
2.1.11.1.47. OPACUserCSS
Asks: Include the following CSS on all pages in the OPAC
Descrição:
  • OPACUserCSS allows the administrator to enter styles that will overwrite the OPAC's default CSS as defined in 'opaclayoutstylesheet' or 'opacstylesheet'. Styles may be entered for any of the selectors found in the default style sheet. The default stylesheet will likely be found at http://your_koha_address/opac-tmpl/prog/en/css/opac.css. Unlike opaccolorstylesheet and opaclayoutstylesheet this preference will embed the CSS directly on your OPAC pages.
2.1.11.1.48. opacuserjs
Asks: Include the following JavaScript on all pages in the OPAC
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the administrator to enter JavaScript or JQuery that will be embedded across all pages of the OPAC. Administrators may use this preference to customize some of the interactive sections of Koha, customizing the text for the login prompts, for example. Sample JQuery scripts used by Koha libraries can be found on the wiki: http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/JQuery_Library.
2.1.11.1.49. OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay
Default: default
Asks: Display OPAC details using XSLT stylesheet at ___
Values:
  • leave empty to not use the XSLT stylesheet
    • In previous versions of Koha this was the setting that read 'normally'
  • enter "default" for the default one
  • put a path to define a XSLT file
    • ex: /path/to/koha/and/your/stylesheet.xsl
    • If in a multi-language system you can enter {langcode} in the path to tell Koha to look in the right language folder
      • ex: /home/koha/src/koha-tmpl/opac/prog/{langcode}/xslt/OpacDetail.xsl
      • ex. http://mykohaopac.org/{langcode}/stylesheet.xsl
  • put an URL for an external specific stylesheet
    • ex: http://mykohaopac.org/stylesheet.xsl
Descrição:
  • XSLT stylesheets allow for the customization of the details shows on the screen when viewing a bib record. This preference will allow you either use the default look that comes with Koha or design your own stylesheet.
2.1.11.1.50. OPACXSLTResultsDisplay
Default: default
Asks: Display OPAC results using XSLT stylesheet at ___
Values:
  • leave empty to not use the XSLT stylesheet
    • In previous versions of Koha this was the setting that read 'normally'
  • enter "default" for the default one
  • put a path to define a XSLT file
    • ex: /path/to/koha/and/your/stylesheet.xsl
    • If in a multi-language system you can enter {langcode} in the path to tell Koha to look in the right language folder
      • ex: /home/koha/src/koha-tmpl/opac/prog/{langcode}/xslt/OpacDetail.xsl
      • ex. http://mykohaopac.org/{langcode}/stylesheet.xsl
  • put an URL for an external specific stylesheet
    • ex: http://mykohaopac.org/stylesheet.xsl
Descrição:
  • XSLT stylesheets allow for the customization of the details shows on the screen when viewing the search results. This preference will allow you either use the default look that comes with Koha or design your own stylesheet.

2.1.11.2. Features

2.1.11.2.1. numSearchRSSResults
Default: 50
Asks: Display ___ search results in the RSS feed.
Descrição:
  • By default the RSS feed that is automatically generated for every search results page will list 50 items. This can sometimes be too much for some RSS feed readers and for some people this isn't enough. This preference allows you to adjust this number to show the best number of results for your patrons.
2.1.11.2.2. OpacAuthorities
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to search your authority records.
Descrição:
  • This preference displays the link on the OPAC for the authority search. By setting the preference to "Allow" patrons can use this search link of the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
    • A link labeled 'Authority search' will appear at the top of your OPAC under the search box
  • Don't allow
2.1.11.2.3. opacbookbag
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to store items in a temporary "Cart" on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the user to temporarily save a list of items found on the catalog. By using the Book Bag, or Cart, the user can print out or email a list of items found. The user does not need to be logged in. This list is temporary and will be emptied, or cleared, at the end of the session.
2.1.11.2.4. OpacBrowser

Importante

This preference only applies to French systems at this time.
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ patrons to browse subject authorities on OPAC
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow

Importante

run the Authorities Browser Cron Job to create the browser list
2.1.11.2.5. OpacBrowseResults
Default: enable
Asks: ___ browsing and paging search results from the OPAC detail page.
Values:
  • disable
  • enable
Descrição:
  • This preference will control the option to return to your results and/or browse them from the detail page in the OPAC.
2.1.11.2.6. OpacCloud

Importante

This preference only applies to French systems at this time.
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ a subject cloud on OPAC
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir

Importante

run the Authorities Browser Cron Job to create the browser list
2.1.11.2.7. OPACFinesTab
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to access the Fines tab on the My Account page on the OPAC.
Values:
2.1.11.2.8. OpacHoldNotes
Default: Do not allow
Asks: ___ users to add a note when placing a hold.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Não permitir
2.1.11.2.9. OpacItemLocation
Default: call number only
Asks: Show ____ for items on the OPAC search results.
Values:
  • call number only
  • collection code
  • location
Descrição:
  • This setting allows users of the OPAC results XSLT stylesheet to choose to display collection code or location in addition to call number.
2.1.11.2.10. OpacPasswordChange
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to change their own password on the OPAC.
Values:

Importante

Enabling this will break LDAP authentication.
2.1.11.2.11. OPACPatronDetails
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to notify the library of changes to their contact information from the OPAC.
Values:
Descrição:
  • If patrons are allowed to notify the library of changes to their account then staff will need to approve the changes via the staff client. Notification of patron account requests will appear on the dashaboard below the list of modules with other pending actions.
    Once you click the notification you will be presented with the changes the patron would like to make to their account and from there you can choose how to proceed.

    Nota

    You can control what fields patrons see and can modify via the OPAC by setting the PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerMandatoryField PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerUnwantedField preferences.
2.1.11.2.12. OPACpatronimage
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ patron images on the patron information page in the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • If patronimages is set to allow the upload of patron images via the staff client, then setting this preference to 'show' will show the patron what image you have on file for them when they view their personal information on their account in the OPAC.
2.1.11.2.13. OPACPopupAuthorsSearch
Default: Don't display
Asks: ___ the list of authors/subjects in a popup for a combined search on OPAC detail pages.
Values:
  • Mostrar
    • Importante

      This will only display the pop up if you are not using an XSLT stylesheet. Review your OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay to find out what stylesheet you're using.
  • Don't display
    • Authors and subjects will display as search links instead of pop up menus.
Descrição:
  • If this preference is set to 'Display' then clicking a subject or author from the details page in the OPAC will present the searcher with a pop up box. From this box you can check off any of the subjects or authors listed and search them all at once by clicking 'Search' at the bottom of the pop up. The default behavior is for Koha to search just the clicked author or subject.
2.1.11.2.14. OpacTopissue
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ patrons to access a list of the most checked out items on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
    • A link to 'Most Popular' will appear at the top of your OPAC
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the administrator to choose to show the "Most Popular" link at the top of the OPAC under the search box. The "Most Popular" page shows the top circulated items in the library, as determined by the number of times a title has been circulated. This allows users to see what titles are popular in their community. It is recommended that you leave this preference set to 'Don't allow' until you have been live on Koha for a couple of months, otherwise the data that it shows will not be an accurate portrayal of what's popular in your library.
2.1.11.2.15. opacuserlogin
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to log in to their accounts on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
    • The OPAC will still be searchable if patrons can't log in, this just disables the patron account access via the OPAC
2.1.11.2.16. QuoteOfTheDay
Default: Disable
Asks: ___ Quote of the Day display on OPAC home page
Values:
  • Disable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • This feature will allow you to enter a series of quotes that will then show on the OPAC homepage in random order. To add/edit quotes, visit the Quote of the Day Editor under Tools.
2.1.11.2.17. RequestOnOpac
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to place holds on items from the OPAC.
Values:
2.1.11.2.18. reviewson
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to make comments on items on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
    • Patrons comments/reviews all require moderation before they appear in the OPAC
    • opacuserlogin needs to be set to 'Allow'
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This button allows the patrons to submit comments on books they have read via the OPAC. If this preference is set to "Allow" reviews are first sent to the staff client for staff approval before the review is displayed in the OPAC. The staff member who reviews and approves comments may find the pending comments on the Comments tool. The staff member can then choose to approve or delete the comments.
2.1.11.2.19. ShowReviewer
Default: full name
Asks: Show ___ of commenter with comments in OPAC.
Values:
  • first name
  • first name and last initial
  • full name
  • last name
  • no name
  • nome de usuário
Descrição:
  • If you would like to protect your patron's privacy in the OPAC you can choose to hide their names or parts of their names from any of the comments they leave on bib records in your system. reviewson needs to be set to 'Allow' for this to preference to come in to play
2.1.11.2.20. ShowReviewerPhoto
Default: Show
Asks: ___ reviewer's photo beside comments in OPAC.
Values:
  • Hide
  • Exibir
    • reviewson needs to be set to 'Allow' and ShowReviewer needs to be set to 'Show' for this to preference to come in to play
Descrição:
  • This system preference allows libraries to show avatars next to patron's comments in the OPAC. These avatars are pulled from the Libravatar library, an open source powered product that allows Internet users to choose a small icon to display next to their name on various different websites. The library has no control over the images the patron chooses to display.
2.1.11.2.21. SocialNetworks
Default: Disable
Asks: ___ social network links in opac detail pages
Values:
  • Disable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • This preference will enable a line of social network share buttons below the right hand column on the detail pages of records in the OPAC.

Importante

In order for these share buttons to work when clicked you must have filled in your OPACBaseURL preference.
2.1.11.2.22. sugestão
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to make purchase suggestions on the OPAC.
Values:

2.1.11.3. Policy

2.1.11.3.1. AllowPurchaseSuggestionBranchChoice
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ patrons to select branch when making a purchase suggestion
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • If your library system lets patrons make purchase suggestions for a specific branch you can set this preference to 'Allow' to add a branch selection option to the purchase suggestion form.
2.1.11.3.2. BlockExpiredPatronOpacActions
Default: Don't block
Asks: ___ expired patrons from OPAC actions such as placing a hold or renewing.
Values:
  • Block
  • Don't block
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you set a default value for how Koha handles permissions for patrons who are expired. This preference can be overwritten by the setting on individual patron categories.
2.1.11.3.3. OpacAllowPublicListCreation
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ opac users to create public lists
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • Public lists are visible to anyone who visits your OPAC. With this preference you can control whether or now patrons are allowed to create these public lists. If this is set to "Don't allow" then only staff will be able to create public lists.

Importante

This preference will only be taken in to account if you have virtualshelves set to 'Allow'
2.1.11.3.4. OpacAllowSharingPrivateLists
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ opac users to share private lists with other patrons.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • This feature will add the option for patrons to share their lists with other patrons. When this is set to 'Allow' patrons will see a share link at the top of their list. When they click that link it will ask for the email of the patron they would like to share with. Koha will then email the patron an invitation to see the list.
2.1.11.3.5. OPACFineNoRenewals
Default: 99999
Asks: Only allow patrons to renew their own books on the OPAC if they have less than ___ USD in fines

Nota

Leave this field blank to disable

Importante

To allow renewals in the OPAC, opacuserlogin needs to be set to 'allow'
2.1.11.3.6. OpacHiddenItems
Asks: Allows to define custom rules for hiding specific items at opac.

Nota

See docs/opac/OpacHiddenItems.txt in your Koha install directory for more information
Descrição:
  • In this field you can enter criteria for items you would like to hide from display in the OPAC. This field takes any combination of item fields (from the items table in the Koha database) for blocking. For example a value of:
    itype: [07, 10]
    location: [STAFF, ISO]
    Will block items with an itype code of 07 or 10 as well as items that have a shelving location of STAFF or ISO.
    In items my items.itype 07 is defined in Item Types Administration as Staff Assigned My items.itype 10 in Item Types is Archival Copy The locations STAFF and ISO are in Authorized Values for category=LOC STAFF means it's assigned to the staff reading room and ISO means it is in the isolation room.
2.1.11.3.7. OPACItemHolds
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to place holds on specific items in the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
    • Patrons can place holds on specific items as well as the next available item.
    • opacuserlogin needs to be set to 'allow'
  • Don't allow
    • If this is disabled, users can only put a hold on the next available item.
2.1.11.3.8. OpacRenewalAllowed
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ patrons to renew their own books on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
    • Staff will still be able to renew items for patrons via the staff client
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the administration to choose if patrons can renew their checked out materials via their checked out history in the OPAC. It allows patrons to renew their materials without having to contact the library or having to return to the library.
2.1.11.3.9. OpacRenewalBranch
Default: the branch the item was checked out from
Asks: Use ___ as branchcode to store in the statistics table
Values:
  • NULL
  • 'OPACRenew'
  • the item's home branch
  • the patron's home branch
  • the branch the item was checked out from
Descrição:
  • This value is used in the statistics table to help with reporting. The statistics table in Koha keeps track of all checkouts and renewals, this preference defines which branch is entered in to the table when a patron renews an item for themselves via the OPAC.
2.1.11.3.10. OPACViewOthersSuggestions
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ purchase suggestions from other patrons on the OPAC.
Values:
2.1.11.3.11. SearchMyLibraryFirst
Default: Don't limit
Asks: ___ patrons' searches to the library they are registered at.
Values:
  • Don't limit
    • Searching the OPAC will show results from all libraries
    • If you're a one branch system, choose 'Don't limit'
  • Limit
    • Patrons will still be able to search other libraries via the Advanced search page - but will be limited to searches for their library only from the basic search box
    • opacuserlogin needs to be set to 'allow'
2.1.11.3.12. singleBranchMode
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ patrons to select their branch on the OPAC.
Values:
Descrição:
  • This preference is for libraries that have branches but do not want to share their items among other branches within their system. If the preference is set to "Don't allow" then holdings will be shown for all branches within a system. On the "Home" screen of the OPAC users have the choice of narrowing down results by item location. Setting this preference to "Allow" will display only one branch's holdings.

2.1.11.4. Privacy

2.1.11.4.1. AnonSuggestions
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ patrons that aren't logged in to make purchase suggestions.

Importante

If set to 'Allow', suggestions are connected to the AnonymousPatron
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
2.1.11.4.2. AnonymousPatron
Default: 0
Asks: Use borrowernumber ___ as the Anonymous Patron (for anonymous suggestions and reading history)

Nota

Before setting this preference create a patron to be used for all anonymous suggestions and/or reading history items. This patron can be any type and should be named something to make it clear to you that they're anonymous (ex. Anonymous Patron).

Importante

Remember to use the borrowernumber note the patron's cardnumber for this value. The borrowernumber can be found on the patron record under 'Library use' on the right.
2.1.11.4.3. EnableOpacSearchHistory
Default: Keep
Asks: ___ patron search history in the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't keep
  • Keep
2.1.11.4.4. OPACPrivacy
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ patrons to choose their own privacy settings for their reading history.

Importante

This requires opacreadinghistory set to 'Allow' and AnonymousPatron to be set to your anonymous patron's borrowernumber.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
2.1.11.4.5. opacreadinghistory
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to see what books they have checked out in the past.

Importante

Enabling this will make it so that patrons can view their circulation history in the OPAC unless you have OPACPrivacy set to 'Allow.'

Importante

This data is stored in the system regardless of your choice, unless your patrons have chosen to never have their reading history kept.
2.1.11.4.6. TrackClicks
Default: Don't track
Asks: ___ links that patrons click on.
Values:
  • Don't track
  • Track
  • Track anonymously
Descrição:
  • By setting this preference to one of the track options you will allow Koha to track every link clicked in Koha. This data will be stored in a database table so that you can run reports against that data. If you choose to 'Track' clicks then Koha will record both the link clicked and the logged in user who clicked the link. If you choose to 'Track anonymously' then the borrowernumber will not be recorded, but the rest of the data will.

    Nota

    Remember to update your local privacy policies and link to them from the OPAC to notify your users that you are tracking their information.

2.1.11.5. Self Registration

2.1.11.5.1. PatronSelfRegistration
Default: Don't allow
Asks: ___ library patrons to register an account via the OPAC.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • Setting this preference to 'Allow' will provide a link on the OPAC to register for a new account. Using the other Self Registration system preferences you can control how this preference will function.

Importante

Patrons registering via the OPAC will not need to be approved by a librarian. For this reason it is recommended that you set up a provisional patron category with no circulation rights. That way patrons will have to come in to the library to verify their identity before given circulation rights at the library. Once the patron confirms their identiy the library staff can change the category to one with permissions to check items out and place holds.
2.1.11.5.2. PatronSelfRegistrationAdditionalInstructions
Asks: Display the following additional instructions for patrons who self register via the OPAC ( HTML is allowed ):
Descrição:
  • This preference takes any HTML you'd like to display on the page the patron sees after successfully registering for their library card.
2.1.11.5.3. PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerMandatoryField
Default: surname|firstname
Asks: The following database columns must be filled in on the patron entry screen: ___
Descrição:
  • This preference allows you to define what fields patrons must fill in on their self regisration form. If any of the required fields are blank Koha will not let the patron register.

Importante

Separate columns with |

Nota

For help with field names, ask your system administrator or view the database structure associated with the borrowers table.

Nota

If you're going to require that patrons verify their accounts via email with the PatronSelfRegistrationVerifyByEmail preference the email field will automatically be marked as required.
2.1.11.5.4. PatronSelfRegistrationBorrowerUnwantedField
Asks: The following database columns will not appear on the patron entry screen: ___
Descrição:
  • Using this preference you can hide fields from the patron registraion and update form in the OPAC.

Importante

Separate columns with |

Nota

For help with field names, ask your system administrator or view the database structure associated with the borrowers table.
2.1.11.5.5. PatronSelfRegistrationDefaultCategory
Asks: Use the patron category code ___ as the default patron category for patrons registered via the OPAC.
Descrição:
  • Enter in the patron category code for the category that all new patrons registered via the OPAC will be put in to.

Importante

Patrons registering via the OPAC will not need to be approved by a librarian. For this reason it is recommended that you set up a provisional patron category with no circulation rights. That way patrons will have to come in to the library to verify their identity before given circulation rights at the library. Once the patron confirms their identiy the library staff can change the category to one with permissions to check items out and place holds.

Importante

If you leave this blank or enter in an invalid code your patrons will still be able to register but will not be given a username. There will be no errors on the page to explain this, so be sure to enter a valid patron category code.
2.1.11.5.6. PatronSelfRegistrationExpireTemporaryAccountsDelay
Default: 0
Asks: Delete patrons registered via the OPAC, but not yet verified after ___ days.
Descrição:
2.1.11.5.7. PatronSelfRegistrationVerifyByEmail
Default: Don't require
Asks: ___ that a self-registering patron verify his or herself via email.
Values:
  • Don't require
  • Require
Descrição:
  • If you require patrons to verify their accounts via email they will not be able to log in to the OPAC until they acknowledge the email sent by Koha. If you don't require this then patrons will be able to log in as soon as they fill in the registration form. You can set the PatronSelfRegistrationExpireTemporaryAccountsDelay preference to delete the un-verified self registrations after a certain number of days.

Nota

If you're going to require that patrons verify their accounts via email then the email field will automatically be marked as required.

2.1.11.6. Shelf Browser

2.1.11.6.1. OPACShelfBrowser
Default: Show
Asks: ___ a shelf browser on item details pages, allowing patrons to see what's near that item on the shelf.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This preference allows patrons to view what is located on the shelf near the item they looked up. The shelf browser option appears on the details page to the right of each items' call number. Clicking the 'Browse Shelf' link allows for a virtual shelf browsing experience via the OPAC and lets patrons see other books that may relate to their search and items that sit on the shelf near the item they are looking at.

Importante

This uses up a fairly large amount of resources on your server, and should be avoided if your collection has a large number of items.
2.1.11.6.2. ShelfBrowserUsesCcode
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ the item collection code when finding items for the shelf browser.
Values:
  • Don't use
  • Use
Descrição:
  • If your library uses collection codes then you might want the shelf browser to take into consideration what collection the books belong to when populating the virtual shelf browser.
2.1.11.6.3. ShelfBrowserUsesHomeBranch
Default: Use
Asks: ___ the item home branch when finding items for the shelf browser.
Values:
  • Don't use
  • Use
Descrição:
  • If you have a multiple branch system you may want to make sure that Koha takes into consideration what branch owns the books when populating the virtual shelf browser for accuracy.
2.1.11.6.4. ShelfBrowserUsesLocation
Default: Use
Asks: ___ the item location when finding items for the shelf browser.
Values:
  • Don't use
  • Use
Descrição:
  • If your library uses shelving locations then you might want the shelf browser to take into consideration what shelving location the books belong to when populating the virtual shelf browser.

2.1.12. Usuários

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Patrons

2.1.12.1. AddPatronLists

Default: specific categories
Asks: List ___ under the new patron menu.
Values:
  • general patron types
  • specific categories

2.1.12.2. AutoEmailOpacUser

Default: Don't send
Asks: ___ an email to newly created patrons with their account details.
Descrição:
  • AutoEmailOpacUser allows library users to be notified by email of their account details when a new account is opened at the email address specified in the AutoEmailPrimaryAddress preference. The email contains the username and password given to or chosen by the patron when signing up for their account and can be customized by editing the ACCTDETAILS notice.
Values:
  • Don't send
  • Enviar

2.1.12.3. AutoEmailPrimaryAddress

Default: alternate
Asks: Use ___ patron email address for sending out emails.
Values:
  • alternate
  • first valid
  • home
  • work
Descrição:
  • If you choose 'first valid' as the value for AutoEmailPrimaryAddress the system will check the email fields in this order: home, work, then alternate. Otherwise the system will use the email address you specify.

2.1.12.4. autoMemberNum

Default: Do
Asks: ___ default the card number field on the patron addition screen to the next available card number
Values:
  • Do
    • If the largest currently used card number is 26345000012941, then this field will default to 26345000012942 for the next patron
  • Don't
Descrição:
  • This preference determines if the patron's barcode is automatically calculated. This prevents the person setting up the library card account from having to assign a number to the new card. If set to 'Do' the system will calculate a new patron barcode by adding 1 to the maximum barcode already present in the database.

2.1.12.5. BorrowerMandatoryField

Default: surname|cardnumber|barcode
Asks: The following database columns must be filled in on the patron entry screen: ___
Descrição:
  • This preference enables the system administrator to choose which fields your library would like required for patron accounts. Enter field names separated by | (bar). This ensures that basic information is included in each patron record. If a patron leaves one of the required fields blank an error message will issue and the account will not be created.

Importante

Separate columns with |

Nota

For help with field names, ask your system administrator or view the database structure associated with the borrowers table.

2.1.12.6. borrowerRelationship

Default: father|mother
Asks: Guarantors can be the following of those they guarantee ___
Descrição:
  • This preference enables the system administrator to define valid relationships between a guarantor (usually a parent) & a guarantee (usually a child). Defining values for this field does not make the guarantor field required when adding a guarantee type patron. This preference creates a drop down list identifying the relationship of the guarantor to the guarantee. To disable the ability to add children types in Koha you can leave this field blank.

Importante

Input multiple choices separated by |

2.1.12.7. BorrowerRenewalPeriodBase

Default: current date
Asks: When renewing borrowers, base the new expiry date on ___
Values:
  • current date.
  • current membership expiry date.
Descrição:
  • This preference controls what the patron's new expiration date will be when you renew their card. Using the 'current date' will add the subscription period to today's date when calculating the new expiration date. Using 'current membership expiry date' will add the subscription period to the old expiration date for the patron when renewing their account.

2.1.12.8. BorrowersTitles

Default: Mr|Mrs|Miss|Ms
Asks: Borrowers can have the following titles ___
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the staff to choose the titles that can be assigned to patrons. The choices present as a drop down list when creating a patron record.

Importante

Input multiple choices separated by |

2.1.12.9. BorrowerUnwantedField

Asks: The following database columns will not appear on the patron entry screen: ___
Descrição:
  • This preference enables the system administrator to choose which fields your library doesn't need to see on the patron entry form. Enter field names separated by | (bar).

Importante

Separate columns with |

Nota

For help with field names, ask your system administrator or view the database structure associated with the borrowers table.

2.1.12.10. CardnumberLength

Asks: Card numbers for patrons must be ___ characters long.
Descrição:
  • The length can be a single number to specify an exact length, a range separated by a comma (i.e., 'Min,Max'), or a maximum with no minimum (i.e., ',Max'). If 'cardnumber' is included in the BorrowerMandatoryField list, the minimum length, if not specified here, defaults to one.

2.1.12.11. checkdigit

Default: Don't
Asks: ___ check and construct borrower card numbers in the Katipo style.
Values:
  • Do
  • Don't

Importante

This overrides autoMemberNum if on.

2.1.12.12. EnableBorrowerFiles

Default: Don't
Asks: ___ enable the ability to upload and attach arbitrary files to a borrower record.
Values:
  • Do
  • Don't
Descrição:
  • When enabled this will add a 'Files' tab to the left of the patron detail page where you can view and upload files to the patron record.

2.1.12.13. EnhancedMessagingPreferences

Default: Allow
Asks: ___ patrons to choose which notices they receive and when they receive them.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow

Importante

This only applies to certain kinds of notices, overdue notices will be sent based on the library's rules, not the patron's choice.
Descrição:
  • These messages are in addition to the overdue notices that the library sends. The difference between these notices and overdues is that the patron can opt-in and out of these. Setting this preference to 'Allow' will allow patrons to choose to receive any one of the following messages:
    • Item Checkout : A notice that lists all the of the items the patron has just checked out and/or renewed, this is an electronic form of the checkout receipt
    • Item Due : A notice on the day and item is due back at the library
    • Hold Filled : A notice when you have confirmed the hold is waiting for the patron
    • Item Checkin : A notice that lists all the of the items the patron has just checked in
    • Advanced Notice : A notice in advance of the patron's items being due (The patron can choose the number of days in advance)

2.1.12.14. ExtendedPatronAttributes

Default: Enable
Asks: ___ searching, editing and display of custom attributes on patrons.
Values:
  • Don't enable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • Patron attributes are library-defined custom fields that can be applied to patron records.

Nota

Use custom attributes for fields that the default patron record does not support such as driver's license number or student ID number.

2.1.12.15. intranetreadinghistory

Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff to access a patron's checkout history

Importante

If you have the OPACPrivacy preference set to 'Allow' and the patron has decided to not have their history kept staff will only see currently checked out items.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow

Importante

This data is stored in the system regardless of your choice.

2.1.12.16. MaxFine

Default: 9999
Asks: The late fine for all checkouts will only go up to ___ USD.
Descrição:
  • This preference controls the default cap on fines accrued by the patron. Leaving this preference blank means that there is no cap on the amount of fines a patron can accrue. If you'd like, single item caps can be specified in the circulation rules matrix.

2.1.12.17. minPasswordLength

Default: 3
Asks: Login passwords for staff and patrons must be at least ___ characters long.

Importante

This applies to both the staff login and the patron OPAC login.

2.1.12.18. NotifyBorrowerDeparture

Default: 30
Asks: Show a notice that a patron is about to expire ___ days beforehand.
Descrição:
  • When the patron attempts to check out materials, a warning will appear in the check out window of the Staff Client telling the librarian that the patrons account is about to expire.

Importante

This notice will appear on the patron's record in the staff client.

2.1.12.19. patronimages

Default: Allow
Asks: ___ images to be uploaded and shown for patrons on the staff client.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
Descrição:
  • If this preference is set to 'Allow' the staff will be able to upload images of patrons either one by one or in bulk. Patrons images will show on the detail page to the left of the patron information. They can also show in the OPAC if you set the OPACpatronimage preference or in the self check out module if you set the ShowPatronImageInWebBasedSelfCheck preference.

2.1.12.20. PatronsPerPage

Default: 20
Asks: By default, show ___ results per page in the staff client.
Descrição:
  • This preference will let you define how many patrons to show on patron search results pages.

2.1.12.21. SMSSendDriver

Asks: Use the SMS::Send:: ___ driver to send SMS messages.
Some examples of values are:
  • SMS::Send::Us::Ipipi
  • SMS::Send::US::TMobile
  • SMS::Send::US::Verizon

Importante

Only drivers available as Perl modules will work in this preference, so make sure a Perl module is available before choosing an SMS service.
Once a driver is entered in the preference an option will appear in the staff client and the OPAC on the patron messaging form to choose to receive messages as SMS

Importante

You must allow EnhancedMessagingPreferences for this to work.

2.1.12.22. StatisticsFields

Default: location|itype|ccode
Asks: Show the following fields from the items database table as columns on the statistics tab on the patron record: ___

Importante

Enter the values separated by bars (|)
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you set which fields will show on the patron record on the Statistics tab.

2.1.12.23. TalkingTechItivaPhoneNotification

Default: Disable
Asks: ___ patron phone notifications using Talking Tech i-tiva (overdues, predues and holds notices currently supported).
Values:
  • Disable
  • Enable
Descrição:

Importante

Requires that you have EnhancedMessagingPreferences set to Allow to use.

2.1.12.24. uppercasesurnames

Default: Don't
Asks: ___ store and display surnames (last names) in upper case.
Values:
  • Do
  • Don't

2.1.13. Pesquisa

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Searching

2.1.13.1. Features

2.1.13.1.1. EnableSearchHistory
Default: Don't keep
Asks: ___ patron search history in the staff client.
Values:
  • Don't keep
  • Keep
Descrição:
  • This preference controls whether the staff client keeps search history for logged in users. Search history will be accessible under the link to your account in the top right of the staff client.
2.1.13.1.2. IncludeSeeFromInSearches
Default: Don't include
Asks: ___ see from (non-preferred form) headings in bibliographic searches.
Values:
  • Don't include
  • Include
Descrição:
  • When this preference is set to include the search engine indexer will insert see from headings from authority records into bibliographic records when indexing, so that a search on an obsolete term will turn up relevant records. For example when you search for cookery (the old term) you get titles with the heading of cooking (the new term).

Importante

You will need to reindex your bibliographic database when changing this preference.
2.1.13.1.3. OpacGroupResults
Default: Don't use
Asks: ___ PazPar2 to group similar results on the OPAC.
Values:
  • Don't use
  • Use

Importante

This requires that PazPar2 is set up and running.
2.1.13.1.4. QueryAutoTruncate
Default: automatically
Asks: Perform wildcard searching (where, for example, Har would match Harry and harp) ___ (The * character would be used like so: Har* or *logging.)
Values:
  • automatically
  • only if * is added
Descrição:
  • This setting allows for searches to be automatically truncated or for additional characters to be added to the end of a search string. When set to "automatically" the search string automatically ends with a wildcard function. For example, a search for the word "invent" with auto truncation enabled will also retrieve results for inventor, invention, inventory, etc. If you don't want this to happen automatically you can still be perform wildcard searches manually by adding an asterisk (*). Typing "invent*" even with auto truncation disabled will retrieve the same inventor, invention, inventory results. Auto truncation bypasses the necessity to type long search strings in their entirety.
2.1.13.1.5. QueryFuzzy
Default: Try
Asks: ___ to match similarly spelled words in a search (for example, a search for flang would also match flange and fang)
Values:
  • Don't try
  • Try
Descrição:
  • This preference enables "fuzzy" searching, in which the search engine returns results that are similar to, but not exactly matching, the word or words entered by the user. This preference enables the search function to compensate for slightly misspelled names or phrases.

Importante

Requires that UseICU set to 'Not using'
2.1.13.1.6. QueryStemming
Default: Try
Asks: ___ to match words of the same base in a search
Values:
  • Don't try
  • Try
    • A search for enabling would also match enable and enabled
Descrição:
  • This preference enables word stemming. Stemming allows the search function to return multiple versions of the same word, as well as related terms (i.e., both fish and fishing would be returned).
2.1.13.1.7. QueryWeightFields
Default: Enable
Asks: ___ ranking of search results by relevance
Values:
  • Disable
  • Enable
2.1.13.1.8. TraceCompleteSubfields
Default: Force
Asks: ___ subject tracings in the OPAC and Staff Client to search only for complete-subfield matches.
Values:
  • Don't force
    • Searches for subject keywords (example: opac-search.pl?q=su:World%20Wide%20Web)
  • Force
    • Searches for complete subject fields (example: opac-search.pl?q=su,complete-subfield:World%20Wide%20Web)
Descrição:
  • When TraceCompleteSubfields is set to "force," clicking on links in non-authority controlled subject tracings will only find other records where the entire subfields match. Leaving it at "don't force" does a keyword search of the subject indexes.

Importante

This preference assumes that you're using XSLT stylesheets as set in the OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay preference.
2.1.13.1.9. TraceSubjectSubdivisions
Default: Include
Asks: ___ subdivisions for searches generated by clicking on subject tracings.
Values:
  • Don't include
    • Searches for subject keywords (example: opac-search.pl?q=su,complete-subfield:%22Web%20sites%22)
  • Include
    • Searches for complete subject fields (example: opac-search.pl?q=(su,complete-subfield:%22Web%20sites%22)%20and%20(su,complete-subfield:%22Design.%22))
Descrição:
  • When TraceSubjectSubdivisions is set to "Include," if you click on a subject with subdivisions (subfields other than 'a') they will be searched along with the subject heading (subfield 'a'). To have only the subject heading (subfield 'a') searched, set this preference to "Don't include."

Importante

This preference assumes that you're using XSLT stylesheets as set in the OPACXSLTDetailsDisplay preference.
2.1.13.1.10. UseICU
Default: Not using
Asks: ___ ICU Zebra indexing.
Values:
  • Not using
  • Using
Descrição:
  • ICU is a set of code libraries providing Unicode and Globalization support for software applications. What this means is ICU Zebra indexing is only necessary if you use non-roman characters in your cataloging. If using ICU Zebra indexing you will want to not use QueryFuzzy.

Importante

This setting will not affect Zebra indexing, it should only be used to tell Koha that you have activated ICU indexing if you have actually done so, since there is no way for Koha to figure this out on its own.

Importante

Talk to your system administrator when changing this preference to make sure that your system is set up properly for this to work.
2.1.13.1.11. UseQueryParser
Default: Do not try
Asks: ___ to use the QueryParser module for parsing queries.

Nota

Enabling this will have no impact if you do not have QueryParser installed, and everything will continue to work as usual.
Values:
  • Do not try
  • Try
Descrição:
  • This preference enables an experimental new query parser which opens the door for a more expressive and more-effective search syntax.

2.1.13.2. Results Display

2.1.13.2.1. defaultSortField & defaultSortOrder
defaultSortField Default: author
defaultSortOrder Default: ascending
Asks: By default, sort search results in the staff client by ___, ____
Descrição:
  • These preferences set the default sort field and sort order for searches on the staff side. Regardless of your choice, the other sort options are still available in the drop down list on the advanced search page.
defaultSortField Values:
  • autor
  • call number
  • date added
  • date of publication
  • relevance
  • title
  • total number of checkouts
defaultSortOrder Values:
  • ascending
  • descending
  • from A to Z
  • from Z to A
2.1.13.2.2. displayFacetCount
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ facet counts.
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you decide if you show how many times a facet is used in your search results in the OPAC and the staff client. The relevance of these numbers highly depends on the value of the maxRecordsForFacets preference. Showing these numbers can potentially effect the performance of your searching, so test your system with different values for this preference to see what works best.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
2.1.13.2.3. DisplayLibraryFacets
Default: holding library
Asks: Show facets for ___
Values:
  • both home and holding library
  • holding library
  • home library
Descrição:
  • This preferenc controls the libraries facet that displays on search results in the staff and opac. The value selected here will determin which library(s) show in the facets when a search is run.
2.1.13.2.4. FacetLabelTruncationLength
Default: 20
Asks: Truncate facets length to ___ characters, in OPAC/staff interface.
Descrição:
  • In the OPAC and the staff client your facets are cut off at 20 characters by default. Depending on your layout this may be too many or two few letters, this preference lets you decide what number is best for your library's design.
2.1.13.2.5. maxItemsInSearchResults
Default: 20
Asks: Show up to ___ items per biblio in the search results
Descrição:
  • This preference will let you set how many results display by default when a search is run on the Staff Client.
2.1.13.2.6. maxRecordsForFacets
Default: 20
Asks: Build facets based on ___ records from the search results.
Descrição:
  • By default Koha only bases facets on the first page of results (usually 20 results). This preference lets you tell Koha to based the facet descriptions and numbers on any number of search results returned. The higher this number the longer it will take for your search results to return, so test with various different values to find the best balance for your library.
2.1.13.2.7. numSearchResults
Default: 20
Asks: By default, show ___ results per page in the staff client.
2.1.13.2.8. OPACdefaultSortField & OPACdefaultSortOrder
OPACdefaultSortField Default: relevance
OPACdefaultSortOrder Default: ascending
Asks: By default, sort search results in the OPAC by ___, ___
Descrição:
  • These preferences set the default sort field and sort order for searches on the OPAC. Regardless of your choice, the other sort options are still available in the drop down list on the advanced search page.
OPACdefaultSortField Values:
  • autor
  • call number
  • date added
  • date of publication
  • relevance
  • title
  • total number of checkouts
OPACdefaultSortOrder Values:
  • ascending
  • descending
  • from A to Z
  • from Z to A
2.1.13.2.9. OPACItemsResultsDisplay
Default: Don't show
Asks: ___ an item's branch, location and call number in OPAC search results.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
Descrição:
  • This setting selects the information about an item that will display in the search results page of the OPAC. The results can display the status of an item and/or full details including branch, location, and call number. While the 'Show' option allows for more information to be displayed on the search results page, the information can be overwhelming for large collections with multiple branches.
2.1.13.2.10. OPACnumSearchResults
Default: 20
Asks: By default, show ___ results per page in the OPAC.

2.1.13.3. Search Form

2.1.13.3.1. AdvancedSearchLanguages
Asks: Limit the languages listed in the advanced search drop-down to the ___ ISO 639-2 language codes (separate values with | or ,).
Descrição:
  • This preference will allow you to decide what languages show in the pull down menu on the advanced search page in the OPAC and the staff client. If this preference is left blank, all languages will show. To limit the languages that are shown enter their ISO 639-2 language codes separated by comma ( , ) or bar ( | ). For example to limit listing to French and Italian, enter ita|fre.
2.1.13.3.2. AdvancedSearchTypes
Default: itemtype
Asks: Show tabs in OPAC and staff-side advanced search for limiting searches on the ___ fields (separate values with |).
Descrição:
  • On the advanced search page you can choose to allow filters on one or all of the following: Item types (itemtypes), Collection Codes (ccode) and Shelving Location (loc). If you would like to be able to limit searches on item type and shelving location for example you would enter itemtypes|loc in the preference input box. The order of these fields will determine the order of the tabs in the OPAC and staff client advanced search screens. Values within the search type are OR'ed together, while each different search type is AND'ed together in the query limits. The current stored values are supported without any required modification.Each set of advanced search fields are displayed in tabs in both the OPAC and staff client. The first value in the AdvancedSearchTypes syspref is the selected tab; if no values are present, "itemtypes" is used. For non-itemtype values, the value in AdvancedSearchTypes must match the Authorised Value name, and must be indexed with 'mc-' prefixing that name.
2.1.13.3.3. expandedSearchOption
Default: don't show
Asks: By default, ___ "More options" on the OPAC and staff advanced search pages.
Values:
  • don't show
  • show
2.1.13.3.4. IntranetNumbersPreferPhrase
Default: don't use
Asks: By default, ___ the operator "phr" in the callnumber and standard number staff client searches
Values:
  • don't use
  • use
Descrição:
  • When searching by call number and standard number (biblionumber) in Koha Staff Client you can choose to force the search to be a phrase search by setting this preference to 'use.' This will allow for more accurate results over doing a general keyword field search.
2.1.13.3.5. OPACNumbersPreferPhrase
Default: don't use
Asks: By default, ___ the operator "phr" in the callnumber and standard number OPAC searches
Values:
  • don't use
  • use
Descrição:
  • When searching by call number and standard number (biblionumber) in the Koha OPAC you can choose to force the search to be a phrase search by setting this preference to 'use.' This will allow for more accurate results over doing a general keyword field search.

2.1.14. Periódicos

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Serials

2.1.14.1. opacSerialDefaultTab

Default: Subscriptions tab
Asks: Show ___ as default tab for serials in OPAC.
Values:
  • Holdings tab
  • Serial Collection tab

    Importante

    Please note that the Serial Collection tab is currently available only for systems using the UNIMARC standard.
  • Subscriptions tab

2.1.14.2. OPACSerialIssueDisplayCount

Default: 3
Asks: Show the ___ previous issues of a serial on the OPAC.
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the administrator to select the number of recent issues for each serial which appear in the OPAC when the serial is accessed. This is just the default value, patrons can always click to see a full list of serials.

2.1.14.3. RenewSerialAddsSuggestion

Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ a suggestion for a biblio when its attached serial is renewed.
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't add
Descrição:
  • If set to "Add", this preference will automatically add a serial to the Acquisitions Purchase Suggestions menu when clicking the 'renew' option. If you don't use the Acquisitions module to manage serials purchases it's best to leave this set as 'Don't add.'

2.1.14.4. RoutingListAddReserves

Default: Place
Asks: ___ received serials on hold if they are on a routing list.
Values:
  • Place
  • Don't place

2.1.14.5. RoutingListNote

Asks: Include following note on all routing lists
Descrição:
  • Text entered in this box will appear below the routing list information.

2.1.14.6. RoutingSerials

Default: Don't add
Asks: ___ received serials to the routing list.
Descrição:
  • This preference determines if serials routing lists are enabled or disabled for the library. When set to "Add", serials routing is enabled and a serial can be directed through a list of people by identifying who should receive it next. The list of people can be established for each serial to be passed using the Serials module. This preference can be used to ensure each person who needs to see a serial when it arrives at the library will get it. Learn more in the routing list section of this manual.
Values:
  • Adicionar
  • Don't add

2.1.14.7. StaffSerialIssueDisplayCount

Default: 3
Asks: Show the ___ previous issues of a serial on the staff client.
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the administrator to select the number of recent issues for each serial which appear in the Staff Client when the serial is accessed. This is just the default value, staff members can always click to see a full list of serials.

2.1.14.8. SubscriptionDuplicateDroppedInput

Asks: List of fields which must not be rewritten when a subscription is duplicated (Separated by pipe |) ___
Descrição:
  • When duplicating a subscription sometimes you don't want all of the fields duplicated, using this preference you can list the fields that you don't want to be duplicated. These field names come from the subscription table in the Koha database. Learn what fields are in that table on the Koha DB Schema site.

2.1.14.9. SubscriptionHistory

Default: full history
Asks: When showing the subscription information for a bibliographic record, preselect ___ view of serial issues.
Values:
  • brief history
  • full history
Descrição:
  • This preference determines what information appears in the OPAC when the user clicks the More Details option. The 'brief' option displays a one-line summary of the volume and issue numbers of all issues of that serial held by the library. The 'full' option displays a more detailed breakdown of issues per year, including information such as the issue date and the status of each issue.

2.1.15. Staff Client

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Staff Client

2.1.15.1. Appearance

2.1.15.1.1. Display856uAsImage
Default: Neither details or results page
Asks: Display the URI in the 856u field as an image on: ___
Values:
  • Both results and details pages
    • Importante

      Not implemented yet
  • Detail page only
  • Neither details or results page
  • Results page only
    • Importante

      Not yet implemented
Descrição:
  • In addition to this option being set, the corresponding XSLT option must be turned on. Also, the corresponding 856q field must have a valid MIME image extension (e.g., "jpg") or MIME image type (i.e. starting with "image/"), or the generic indicator "img" entered in the field. When all of the requirements are met, an image file will be displayed instead of the standard link text. Clicking on the image will open it in the same way as clicking on the link text. When you click on the image it should open to full size, in the current window or in a new window depending on the value in the system pref OPACURLOpenInNewWindow.
2.1.15.1.2. DisplayIconsXSLT
Default: Show
Asks: ___ the format, audience, and material type icons in XSLT MARC21 results and detail pages in the staff client.

Importante

XSLTResultsDisplay and/or XSLTDetailsDisplay must be set to use an XSLT stylesheet (default or custom) for these icons to show.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir

Nota

See the XSLT Icon Guide for more information on these icons.
2.1.15.1.3. intranet_includes
Default: includes
Asks: Use include files from the ___ directory in the template directory, instead of includes/. (Leave blank to disable)
2.1.15.1.4. intranetcolorstylesheet
Asks: Include the additional CSS stylesheet ___ to override specified settings from the default stylesheet
Descrição:
  • This preference is used to set the background color and style of the Staff Client. The value is a .css file. The system administrator should determine which file is appropriate. Enter just a filename, a full local path or a complete URL starting with http:// (if the file lives on a remote server). Please note that if you just enter a filename, the file should be in the css subdirectory for each active theme and language within the Koha templates directory. A full local path is expected to start from your HTTP document root.

Importante

Leave this field blank to disable.
2.1.15.1.5. IntranetFavicon
Asks: Use the image at ___ for the Staff Client's favicon.

Importante

This should be a complete URL, starting with http://

Nota

Turn your logo into a favicon with the Favicon Generator.
Descrição:
  • The favicon is the little icon that appears next to the URL in the address bar in most browsers. The default value for this field (if left blank) is the small 'K' in the Koha logo.
2.1.15.1.6. IntranetmainUserblock
Asks: Show the following HTML in its own column on the main page of the staff client
2.1.15.1.7. IntranetNav
Asks: Show the following HTML in the More menu at the top of each page on the staff client (should be a list of links or blank)
2.1.15.1.8. IntranetSlipPrinterJS
Asks: Use the following JavaScript for printing slips.
Descrição:
2.1.15.1.9. intranetstylesheet
Asks: Use the CSS stylesheet ___ on all pages in the staff interface, instead of the default css (used when leaving this field blank).
Descrição:
  • The Intranetstylesheet preference is a layout and design feature for the intranet or staff client. This preference allows a library to customize the appearance of the Staff Client. Enter just a filename, a full local path or a complete URL starting with http:// (if the file lives on a remote server). Please note that if you just enter a filename, the file should be in the css subdirectory for each active theme and language within the Koha templates directory. A full local path is expected to start from your HTTP document root.
2.1.15.1.10. IntranetUserCSS
Asks: Include the following CSS on all pages in the staff client
2.1.15.1.11. intranetuserjs
Asks: Include the following JavaScript on all pages in the staff interface
Descrição:
  • This preference allows the administrator to enter JavaScript or JQuery that will be embedded across all pages of the Staff Client. Administrators may use this preference to customize some of the interactive sections of Koha, customizing the text for the login prompts, for example. Sample JQuery scripts used by Koha libraries can be found on the wiki: http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/JQuery_Library.
2.1.15.1.12. SlipCSS
Asks: Include the stylesheet at ___ on Issue and Reserve Slips.

Importante

This should be a complete URL, starting with http://
Descrição:
  • If you would like to style your receipts or slips with a consistent set of fonts and colors you can use this preference to point Koha to a stylesheet specifically for your slips.
2.1.15.1.13. StaffAuthorisedValueImages
Default: Show
Asks: ___ images for authorized values (such as lost statuses and locations) in search results.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
2.1.15.1.14. staffClientBaseURL
Asks: The staff client is located at http:// ___
2.1.15.1.15. template
Default: prog
Asks: Use the ___ theme on the staff interface.
Values:
  • prog

Importante

Do not include a trailing slash in the URL this will break links created using this URL. (example: www.google.com not www.google.com/)
2.1.15.1.16. XSLTDetailsDisplay
Default: default
Asks: Display details in the staff client using XSLT stylesheet at ___
Values:
  • leave empty to not use the XSLT stylesheet
    • In previous versions of Koha this was the setting that read 'normally'
  • enter "default" for the default one
  • put a path to define a XSLT file
    • ex: /path/to/koha/and/your/stylesheet.xsl
    • If in a multi-language system you can enter {langcode} in the path to tell Koha to look in the right language folder
      • ex: /home/koha/src/koha-tmpl/intranet-tmpl/prog/{langcode}/xslt/intranetDetail.xsl
      • ex. http://mykoha.org/{langcode}/stylesheet.xsl
  • put an URL for an external specific stylesheet
    • ex: http://mykoha.org/stylesheet.xsl
Descrição:
  • XSLT stylesheets allow for the customization of the details shows on the screen when viewing a bib record. This preference will allow you either use the default look that comes with Koha or design your own stylesheet.
2.1.15.1.17. XSLTResultsDisplay
Default: default
Asks: Display results in the staff client using XSLT stylesheet at ___
Values:
  • leave empty to not use the XSLT stylesheet
    • In previous versions of Koha this was the setting that read 'normally'
  • enter "default" for the default one
  • put a path to define a XSLT file
    • ex: /path/to/koha/and/your/stylesheet.xsl
    • If in a multi-language system you can enter {langcode} in the path to tell Koha to look in the right language folder
      • ex: /home/koha/src/koha-tmpl/intranet-tmpl/prog/{langcode}/xslt/intranetDetail.xsl
      • ex. http://mykoha.org/{langcode}/stylesheet.xsl
  • put an URL for an external specific stylesheet
    • ex: http://mykoha.org/stylesheet.xsl
Descrição:
  • XSLT stylesheets allow for the customization of the details shows on the screen when viewing the search results. This preference will allow you either use the default look that comes with Koha or design your own stylesheet.
2.1.15.1.18. yuipath
Default: included with Koha
Asks: Use the Yahoo UI libraries ___
Values:
  • from Yahoo's servers
    • With this option there is less demand on your servers, but if the Internet goes down there will be issues
  • included with Koha
    • With this option calls are made faster, and they will still work if the Internet goes down
Descrição:
  • The yuipath preference allows for the user to define a local path or web URL to the Yahoo User Interface Library (http://developer.yahoo.com/yui/2/). This library is a resource of developer tools including JavaScript and style sheets.

2.1.15.2. Opções

2.1.15.2.1. HidePatronName
Default: Show
Asks: ___ the names of patrons that have items checked out or on hold on detail pages or the "Place Hold" screen.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
2.1.15.2.2. intranetbookbag
Default: Show
Asks: ___ the cart option in the staff client.
Values:
  • Don't show
  • Exibir
2.1.15.2.3. StaffDetailItemSelection
Default: Enable
Asks: ___ item selection in record detail page.
Values:
  • Disable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • This preference lets you choose to show (or not show) checkboxes to the left of every item in the holdings tab on the detail display of a record in the staff client. Showing these checkboxes allows the staff members to select multiple items to edit or delete at once.
2.1.15.2.4. viewISBD
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff to view records in ISBD form on the staff client.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
2.1.15.2.5. viewLabeledMARC
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff to view records in labeled MARC form on the staff client.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow
2.1.15.2.6. viewMARC
Default: Allow
Asks: ___ staff to view records in plain MARC form on the staff client.
Values:
  • Permitir
  • Don't allow

2.1.16. Ferramentas

2.1.16.1. MaxItemsForBatch

Default: 1000
Asks: Process up to ___ items in a single modification or deletion batch.
Descrição:
  • In the batch item delete tool this will prevent the display of more than the items you entered in this preference, but you will be able to delete more than the number you enter here. In the batch item modification tool this preference will prevent the editing of more than the number entered here.

2.1.17. Web Services

Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Web Services

2.1.17.1. ILS-DI

2.1.17.1.1. ILS-DI
Default: Disable
Asks: ___ ILS-DI services for OPAC users
Values:
  • Disable
  • Enable
2.1.17.1.2. ILS-DI:AuthorizedIPs
Asks: ___ allowed IPs to use the ILS-DI services

2.1.17.2. OAI-PMH

2.1.17.2.1. OAI-PMH
Default: Disable
Asks: ___ Koha's OAI-PMH server.
Values:
  • Disable
  • Enable
Descrição:
  • For the Open Archives Initiative-Protocol for Metadata Harvesting (OAI-PMH) there are two groups of 'participants': Data Providers and Service Providers. Data Providers (open archives, repositories) provide free access to metadata, and may, but do not necessarily, offer free access to full texts or other resources. OAI-PMH provides an easy to implement, low barrier solution for Data Providers. Service Providers use the OAI interfaces of the Data Providers to harvest and store metadata. Note that this means that there are no live search requests to the Data Providers; rather, services are based on the harvested data via OAI-PMH. Koha at present can only act as a Data Provider. It can not harvest from other repositories. The biggest stumbling block to having Koha harvest from other repositories is that MARC is the only metadata format that Koha indexes natively. Visit http://www.oaforum.org/tutorial/english/page3.htm for diagrams of how OAI-PMH works.
Learn more about OAI-PMH at: http://www.openarchives.org/pmh/
2.1.17.2.2. OAI-PMH:archiveID
Default: KOHA-OAI-TEST
Asks: Identify records at this site with the prefix ___ :
2.1.17.2.3. OAI-PMH:AutoUpdateSets
Default: Disable
Asks: ___ automatic update of OAI-PMH sets when a bibliographic record is created or updated.
Values:
  • Disable
  • Enable
2.1.17.2.4. OAI-PMH:ConfFile
If this preference is left empty, Koha's OAI Server operates in normal mode, otherwise it operates in extended mode. In extended mode, it's possible to parameter other formats than marcxml or Dublin Core. OAI-PMH:ConfFile specify a YAML configuration file which list available metadata formats and XSL file used to create them from marcxml records.
For more information, see the sample conf file in the appendix.
2.1.17.2.5. OAI-PMH:MaxCount
Default: 50
Asks: Only return ___ records at a time in response to a ListRecords or ListIdentifiers query.
Descrição:
  • This is the maximum number of records that would be returned based on ListRecord or ListIdentifier queries from harvesters. ListRecords harvest the entire records while the ListIdentifier is an abbreviated form of ListRecords, retrieving only headers rather than records.

2.1.17.3. Relatando

2.1.17.3.1. SvcMaxReportRows
Default: 10
Asks: Only return ___ rows of a report requested via the reports web service.
Descrição:
  • This value will be used to limit the number of results returned by public reports.

2.2. Parâmetros básicos

Get there: More > Administration

Importante

Configure all 'parameters' in the order they appear.

2.2.1. Bibliotecas & Grupos

Quando configurar o Koha você provavelmente irá adicionar informação sobre cada biblioteca que utiliza o sistema. Estes dados serão utilizados em diversas áreas do Koha.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Basic Parameters > Libraries and Groups
Quando visitar esta página, você irá ver uma lista de bibliotecas e grupos que já foram adicionados ao sistema.

2.2.1.1. Adicionando uma biblioteca

Para adicionar uma nova biblioteca:
  • Click 'Nova Biblioteca'
  • The top of the form asks for some basics about the library
    • The library code should not contain any spaces and be 10 or fewer characters. This code will be used as a unique identifier in the database.
    • The name will be displayed on the OPAC wherever the library name displays to the public and should be a name that makes sense to your patrons.
    • If you have groups set up you can choose what group this library belongs to after entering in the code and name
  • Next you can enter basic contact info about the branch
    • The address and contact fields can be used to make notices custom for each library
    • The email address field is not required, but it should be filled for every library in your system
      • Importante

        Não esqueça de inserir um endereço de e-mail da biblioteca para garantir que os avisos sejam enviados a partir do endereço correto
    • If the URL field is populated then the library name will be linked in the holdings table on the OPAC
    • The OPAC Info box is for you to put information about the library that will appear in the OPAC when the branch name is moused over in the holdings table
    • IP Address does not have be filled in unless you plan on limiting access to your staff client to a specific IP Address
      • Importante

        An IP address is required if you have enabled AutoLocation
    • Finally, if you have any notes you can put them here. These will not show in the OPAC

Nota

Dos campos listados, apenas o 'Código da Biblioteca' e o 'Nome' são obrigatórios

2.2.1.2. Editando/Excluindo uma biblioteca

Você não será capaz de excluir uma biblioteca que possui usuários ou exemplares ligados a ela.
Cada biblioteca terá um link 'Editar' a sua direita. Clique neste link para editar detalhes associados a esta biblioteca em questão.

Importante

Você não será capaz de editar o 'Código da Biblioteca'

2.2.1.3. Adicionar grupo

To add a Search Domain or Library Property Group click the 'New Group' button at the top of the screen
Give the group a 'Category type; of 'searchdomain' and if you would like the group to show up in the library pull down at the top of the OPAC (with OpacAddMastheadLibraryPulldown set to 'Add') and on the advanced search page you can check the 'Show in search pulldown' box.
Of the fields on the group form, 'Category code', 'Name', and 'Category type' are the only required fields
2.2.1.3.1. Pesquisar grupos de domínios
A Busca por Grupos permite que você pesquise em um grupo de bibliotecas ao mesmo tempo ao invés de pesquisar só em um ou em todas.
To see Search Domain Groups in action visit the staff client advanced search page in your Koha system:
2.2.1.3.2. Propriedades dos grupos de bibliotecas
You can assign specific categories to your libraries by adding groups for them
Properties are then applied to libraries via the add or edit library form

2.2.2. Tipo de Material

O Koha permite que você organize seu acervo por tipo de material e código de coleção.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Basic Parameters > Item Types
Tipo de material refere-se a livros, cd, dvd, etc, mas pode ser usado de qualquer maneira que funcione na sua biblioteca.

2.2.2.1. Adicionando tipos de itens

Para adicionar um novo tipo de material, clique no botão 'Novo Tipo de Material' na parte superior da página de Tipos de Materiais.
  • No campo 'Tipo de Material' coloque um código curto para o seu tipo de material
  • A descrição é o texto que define o tipo de material
  • You can choose to have an image associated with your item type
    • Você pode escolher a partir de uma série de imagens
    • Você pode linkar a uma imagem remota
    • Ou você pode não ter nenhuma imagem associada a um tipo de material
    • Importante

      To have your item type images appear in the OPAC you need to set noItemTypeImages to 'Show'
      • Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Admin
  • For items that do not circulate, check the 'Not for loan' options
    • Exemplares marcados como 'Não circula' aparecerão no catálogo, mas não poderão ser emprestados para usuário
  • For items that you charge a rental fee for, enter the total fee you charge in the 'Rental charge' field
    • Importante

      Do not enter symbols in this field, only numbers and decimal points (ex. $5.00 should be entered as 5 or 5.00)
    • Isto será cobrado do usuário no empréstimo
  • If you would like a message or alert to appear when items of this type are checked in you can enter that in the 'Checkin message' box
    • The Checkin message type can be a Message or an Alert. The only difference between these two is the styling. By default a Message is blue
      and an Alert is yellow.
  • Some SIP devices need you to use a SIP-specific media type instead of Koha's item type (usually lockers and sorters need this media type), if you use a device like this you'll want to enter the SIP media type.
  • When finished, click 'Save Changes'
    • Nota

      All fields, with the exception of the 'Item Type' will be editable from the Item Types list
  • Seu novo tipo de material aparecerá na lista

2.2.2.2. Editando tipo de itens

Cada tipo de material tem um botão Editar. Para editar um item clique no botão 'Edtar'.

Importante

Você não será capaz de editar o código definido para o 'Tipo de Material', mas será capaz de editar a descrição para o material.

2.2.2.3. Excluindo tipos de material

Cada item tem um botão Excluir. Para excluir um item, clique no link 'Excluir'.

Importante

Você não será capaz de excluir tipos de materiais que estão sendo utilizados em exemplares cadastrados no sistema.

2.2.3. Valores autorizados

Authorized values can be used in several areas of Koha. One reason you would add an authorized value category would be to control the values that can be entered into MARC fields by catalogers.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Basic Parameters > Authorized Values

2.2.3.1. Valores existentes

Koha installs with pre-defined values that your library is likely to use, for instance 'Lost'.
  • Asort1
    • Used for acquisitions statistical purposes
  • Asort2
    • Used for acquisitions statistical purposes
  • BOR_NOTES
    • Values for custom patron messages that appear on the circulation screen and the OPAC. The value in the Description field should be the message text and is limited to 200 characters.
  • Bsort1
    • Values that can be entered to fill in the patron's sort 1 field
  • Bsort2
    • Values that can be entered to fill in the patron's sort 2 field
  • CART
  • CCODE
    • Collection codes (appears when cataloging and working with items)
  • DAMAGED
    • Descriptions for items marked as damaged (appears when cataloging and working with items)
  • DEPARTMENT
    • Departments are required by and will be used in the Course Reserves module
  • HINGS_AS
    • General Holdings: Acquisition Status Designator :: This data element specifies acquisition status for the unit at the time of the holdings report.
  • HINGS_C
    • General Holdings: Completeness Designator
  • HINGS_PF
    • Physical Form Designators
  • HINGS_RD
    • General Holdings: Retention Designator :: This data element specifies the retention policy for the unit at the time of the holdings report.
  • HINGS_UT
    • General Holdings: Type of Unit Designator
  • LOC
    • Shelving location (usually appears when adding or editing an item)
  • LOST
    • Descriptions for the items marked as lost (appears when adding or editing an item)
    • Importante

      Values given to lost statuses should be numeric and not alphabetical in order for statuses to appear properly
  • MANUAL_INV
    • Values for manual invoicing types
    • Importante

      The value set as the Authorized Value for the MANUAL_INV authorized value category will appear as the Description and the Authorized Value Description will be used as the amount. Enter monetary amounts in the description without currency symbols.
  • NOT_LOAN
    • Reasons why a title is not for loan
    • Importante

      Values given to lost statuses should be numeric and not alphabetical in order for statuses to appear properly
    • Nota

      Negative number values will still allow holds (use for on order statuses for example) where as positive numbers will not allow holds or checkouts
  • PROC
  • REPORT_GROUP
    • A way to sort and filter your reports, the default values in this category include the Koha modules (Accounts, Acquitisions, Catalog, Circulation, Patrons)
  • REPORT_SUBGROUP
    • Can be used to further sort and filter your reports. This category is empty by default. Values here need to include the authorized value code from REPORT_GROUP in the Description (OPAC) field to link the subgroup to the appropriate group.
  • RESTRICTED
    • Restricted status of an item
  • ROADTYPE
    • Road types to be used in patron addresses
  • SIP_MEDIA_TYPE
    • Used when creating or editing an item type to assign a SIP specific media type for devices like lockers and sorters.
  • SUGGEST
    • List of patron suggestion reject or accept reasons (appears when managing suggestions)
  • WITHDRAWN
    • Description of a withdrawn item (appears when adding or editing an item)
  • YES_NO
    • A generic authorized value field that can be used anywhere you need a simple yes/no pull down menu.

2.2.3.2. Add new Authorized Value Category

Além das categorias existentes que vêm por padrão no Koha, os funcionários podem adicionar suas próprias categorias de valores autorizados para controlar os dados que são inseridos no sistema. Para adicionar uma nova categoria:
  • Click 'New Category'
  • Limit your Category to 10 characters (something short to make it clear what the category is for)
    • Importante

      Category cannot have spaces or special characters other than underscores and hyphens in it.
  • When adding a new category you're asked to create at least one authorized value
    • Enter a code for your Authorized Value into the 'Authorized value' field
      • Importante

        Authorized value is limited to 80 characters and cannot have spaces or special characters other than underscores and hyphens in it.
    • Use o campo de descrição para o valor atual que será exibido. Se você quiser exibir algo diferente no OPAC, insira uma 'Descrição (OPAC)'
    • Caso você queria limitar esta categoria de valores autorizados a apenas algumas bibliotecas, você poderá selecionar quais delas no menu 'Limitação de bibliotecas'. Selecione 'Todas as bibliotecas' para a opção estar disponível a todas elas.
    • If you have StaffAuthorisedValueImages and/or AuthorisedValueImages set to show images for authorized values you can choose the image under 'Choose an icon'
  • Clique 'Salvar'
  • Sua nova categoria e valor aparecerão na lista de valores autorizados

2.2.3.3. Add new Authorized Value

Novos valores autorizados podem ser adicionados a qualquer categoria existente ou a uma nova categoria. Para adicionar um valor:
  • Click 'Novo valor autorizado para ...'
  • Enter a code for your Authorized Value into the 'Authorized value' field
    • Importante

      Authorized value is limited to 80 characters and cannot have spaces or special characters other than underscores and hyphens in it.
  • Use o campo de descrição para o valor atual que será exibido. Se você quiser exibir algo diferente no OPAC, insira uma 'Descrição (OPAC)'
  • Caso você queria limitar esta categoria de valores autorizados a apenas algumas bibliotecas, você poderá selecionar quais delas no menu 'Limitação de bibliotecas'. Selecione 'Todas as bibliotecas' para a opção estar disponível a todas elas.
  • If you have StaffAuthorisedValueImages and/or AuthorisedValueImages set to show images for authorized values you can choose the image under 'Choose an icon'
  • Clique 'Salvar'
  • O novo valor aparecerá na lista com os valores existentes.

2.3. Patrons & Circulation

Settings for controlling circulation and patron information.

2.3.1. Categorias de usuários

Categorias de usuários permitem que você organize seus usuários de acordo com suas funções, faixas etárias e tipos.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Patron Categories
Usuários são classificados dentro de uma das seis categorias principais:
  • Adulto
    • Tipo de usuário mais comum, em geral utilizado como o Usuário genérico.
  • Criança
    • Crianças podem ter um responsável ligado a elas.
  • Técnico
    • Librarians (and library workers) should be assigned the staff category so that you can set their permissions and give them access to the staff client.
  • Organizational
    • Organizações podem ser usuários também. Elas podem servir como responsáveis para usuários que são funcionários.
  • Profissional
    • Profissional = Um usuário vinculado a uma organização.
  • Estatístico
    • Este tipo de usuário é utilizado apenas para fins estatísticos, para uso interno dos exemplares.

2.3.1.1. Adicionar categoria de usuário

Para adicionar uma nova categria de usuário, clique em 'Nova Categoria' na parte superior da página
  • The 'Category Code' is an identifier for your new code.
    • Importante

      The category code is limited to 10 characters (numbers and letters)
    • Importante

      This field is required in order to save your patron category. If left blank you will be presented with an error.
  • Digite uma versão de texto da categoria no campo 'Descrição'.
    • Importante

      This field is required in order to save your patron category. If left blank you will be presented with an error.
  • Enrollment period (in months) should be filled in if you have a limited enrollment period for your patrons (eg. Student cards expire after 9 months or until a specific date)
    • Importante

      You cannot enter both a month limit and a date until. Choose to enter either one or the other.
    • Importante

      This field is required in order to save your patron category. If left blank you will be presented with an error.
  • Some patron categories can have a minimum age (in years) requirement associated with them, enter this age in the 'Age required'
    • Importante

      This value will only be checked if BorrowerMandatoryField defines the dateofbirth as a required field on the patron record
  • Patron categories can also have a maximum age (in years) associated with them (such as children), enter this age in the 'Upperage limit'
    • Importante

      This value will only be checked if BorrowerMandatoryField defines the dateofbirth as a required field on the patron record
  • If you charge a membership fee for your patrons (such as those who live in another region) you can enter that in the 'Enrollment fee' field.
    • Importante

      Only enter numbers and decimals in this field
  • Se você deseja receber avisos de atraso, define 'Aviso de Atraso' para 'Sim'
  • You can decide on a patron category basis if lost items are shown in the staff client by making a choice from the 'Lost items in staff client' pull down
    • Importante

      Note that this is only applicable in the staff client, so changing this value on patron categories who do not have access to the staff client won't make any difference
  • If you charge patrons for placing holds on items, enter the fee amount in the 'Hold fee' field.
    • Importante

      Only enter numbers and decimals in this field
  • No campo 'Tipo de Categoria' escolha um dos seis principais tipos de pais
    • Importante

      This field is required in order to save your patron category. If left blank you will be presented with an error.
  • A limitação por biblioteca permite que você restrinja uma categoria de usuário a apenas algumas bibliotecas na sua rede de bibliotecas. Selecione 'Todas as bibliotecas' se você quiser que todas utilizem esta categoria.
  • You can decide if this patron category is blocked from performing actions in the OPAC if their card is expired using the next option. By default it will follow the rule set in the BlockExpiredPatronOpacActions preference
  • Finally you can assign advanced messaging preferences by default to a patron category
    • Importante

      Requires that you have EnhancedMessagingPreferences enabled
    • These defaults will be applied to new patrons that are added to the system. They will not edit the preferences of the existing patrons. Also, these can be changed for individual patrons, this setting is just a default to make it easier to set up messages for an entire category.
      • Nota

        After setting the default for the patron category you can force those changes to all existing patrons by running the borrowers-force-messaging-defaults script found in the misc/maintenance folder. Ask your system administrator for assistance with this script.

2.3.2. Circulation and Fine Rules

Estas regras definem como seus exemplares são circulados, como/quando multas são calculadas e como são geridas as reservas.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Circulation and fines rules
As regras são aplicadas do mais específico para o menos específico, utilizando-se o primeiro encontrado na seguinte ordem:
  • mesma biblioteca, mesmo tipo de usuário, mesmo tipo de material
  • mesma biblioteca, mesmo tipo de usuário, todos os tipos de materiais
  • mesma biblioteca, todos os tipos de usuários, mesmo tipo de material
  • mesma biblioteca. todos os tipos de usuários, todos os tipos de materiais
  • padrão (todas as bibliotecas), mesmo tipo de usuário, mesmo tipo de item
  • padrão (todas as bibliotecas), mesmo tipo de usuário, todos os tipos de itens
  • padrão (todas as bibliotecas), todos os tipos de usuários, mesmo tipo de item
  • padrão (todas as bibliotecas), todos os tipos de usuários, todos os tipos de itens
The CircControl and HomeOrHoldingBranch also come in to play when figuring out which circulation rule to follow.
  • If CircControl is set to "the library you are logged in at" circ rules will be selected based on the library you are logged in at
  • If CircControl is set to "the library the patron is from" circ rules will be selected based on the patron's library
  • If CircControl is set to "the library the item is from" circ rules will be selected based on the item's library where HomeOrHoldingBranch chooses if item's home library is used or holding library is used.
  • If IndependentBranches is set to 'Prevent' then the value of HomeOrHoldingBranch is used in figuring out if the item can be checked out. If the item's home library does not match the logged in library, the item cannot be checked out unless you are a superlibrarian.

Nota

If you are a single library system choose your branch name before creating rules (sometimes having only rules for the 'all libraries' option can cause issues with holds)

Importante

At the very least you will need to set a default circulation rule. This rule should be set for all item types, all libraries and all patron categories. That will catch all instances that do not match a specific rule. When checking out if you do not have a rule for all libraries, all item types and all patron types then you may see patrons getting blocked from placing holds. You will also want a rule for your specific library set for all item types and all patron types to avoid this holds issue. Koha needs to know what rule to fall back on.

2.3.2.1. Regras de circulação padrão

Using the issuing rules matrix you can define rules that depend on patron/item type combos. To set your rules, choose a library from the pull down (or 'all libraries' if you want to apply these rules to all branches):
No quadro você pode selecionar qualquer combinação de categoria de usuário e tipo de material aos quais as regras se aplicam
  • Primeiro escolha qual categoria de usuário que você quer que esta regra seja aplicada. Se você optar por 'Todos' será aplicado em todas as categorias
  • Choose the 'Item type' you would like this rule to apply to. If you leave this to 'All' it will apply to all item types
  • Limit the number of items a patron can have checked out at the same time by entering a number in the 'Current checkouts allowed' field
  • Define the period of time an item can be checked out to a patron by entering the number of units (days or hours) in the 'Loan period' box.
  • Choose which unit of time, Days or Hours, that the loan period and fines will be calculated in in the 'Unit' column
  • Você pode definir uma data fixa para categorias específicas de usuários e tipos de materiais. A data fixa ignorará as atuais regras de circulação e será aplicada em todos os materiais que for designada, antes ou depois da data especificada.
  • 'Fine amount' should have the amount you would like to charge for overdue items
    • Importante

      Enter only numbers and decimal points (no currency symbols).
  • Enter the 'Fine charging interval' in the unit you set (ex. charge fines every 1 day, or every 2 hours)
  • The 'Fine grace period' is the period of time an item can be overdue before you start charging fines.
    • Importante

      This can only be set for the Day unit, not in Hours
  • The 'Overdue fines cap' is the maximum fine for this patron and item combination
    • Importante

      If this field is left blank then Koha will not put a limit on the fines this item will accrue. A maximum fine amount can be set using the MaxFine system preference.
  • If your library 'fines' patrons by suspending their account you can enter the number of days their fine should be suspended in the 'Suspension in days' field
    • Importante

      This can only be set for the Day unit, not in Hours
  • Next decide if the patron can renew this item type and if so, enter how many times they can renew it in the 'Renewals allowed' box
  • If you're allowing renewals you can control how long the renewal loan period will be (in the units you have chosen) in the 'Renewal period' box
  • If you're allowing renewals you can control how soon before the due date patrons can renew their materials with the 'No renewals before' box.
    • Exemplares podem ser renovados a qualquer tempo se este valor for deixado em branco. De outra forma, exemplares só poderão ser renovados caso tenham data de devolução superior a inserida na caixa (seja em dias ou horas).
  • If the patron can place holds on this item type, enter the total numbers of items (of this type) that can be put on hold in the 'Holds allowed' field
  • Finally, if you charge a rental fee for the item type and want to give a specific patron type a discount on that fee, enter the percentage discount (without the % symbol) in the 'Rental Discount' field
When finished, click 'Add' to save your changes. To modify a rule, simply click the 'Edit' link to the right of the fule and edit the values that appear filled in at the bottom of the form.
If you would like to delete your rule, click the 'Delete' link to the right of the rule.
Para economizar tempo, pode clonar regras de uma biblioteca para outra, escolhendo a opção clona acima da tabela de regras.
Depois de escolher você será presenteado com uma mensagem de confirmação.

2.3.2.2. Política padrão para empréstimos ou reservas

You can set a default maximum number of checkouts and hold policy that will be used if none is defined below for a particular item type or category. This is the fall back rule for defaults.
From this menu you can set a default to apply to all item types and patrons in the library if no other option is set in the forms below.
  • Em 'Total de empréstimos permitidos', digite o número total de itens que os usuários podem ter em seu puder ao mesmo tempo
  • Control where patrons can place holds from using the 'Hold Policy' menu
    • De qualquer biblioteca: Usuários de qualquer biblioteca podem reservar exemplares. (padrão se nada estiver definido)
    • Da biblioteca de origem: Apenas usuários da biblioteca de origem do exemplar podem podem fazer reservas.
    • Reservas não permitidas: Nenhum usuário pode reservar este livro.
  • Control where the item returns to once it is checked in
    • Item retorna a origem
    • Item returns to issuing branch
    • Itens extraviados
      • Quando um item for extraviado ele permanece onde foi emprestado e não voltar nunca 'origem'
  • Assim que a sua política é definida, você pode desativar-la clicando no link "Desativar" à direita da regra

2.3.2.3. Empréstimos por usuário

Para esta biblioteca, você pode especificar o número máximo de empréstimos que um usuário de uma categoria pode efetuar, independentemente do tipo de material.

Nota

If the total amount loanable for a given patron category is left blank, no limit applies, except possibly for a limit you define for a specific item type.
For example, if you have a rule in the matrix that says Board patrons are allowed 10 books and 5 DVDs but you want to make it so that Board patrons only have a total of 12 things checked out at once. If you enter 12 here and the patron has 10 books out already they will only be allowed 2 DVDs to equal the 12 total they're allowed.

2.3.2.4. Políticas de reserva

For this library, you can edit hold and return policies for a given item type, regardless of the patron's category.
As várias políticas têm os seguintes efeitos:
  • De qualquer biblioteca: Usuários de qualquer biblioteca podem reservar exemplares. (padrão se nada estiver definido)
  • Da biblioteca de origem: Apenas usuários da biblioteca de origem do exemplar podem podem fazer reservas.
  • Reservas não permitidas: Nenhum usuário pode reservar este livro.

Importante

Note that if the system preference AllowHoldPolicyOverride set to 'allow', these policies can be overridden by your circulation staff.

Importante

These policies are based on the patron's home branch, not the branch that the reserving staff member is from.
As várias políticas de devolução têm os seguintes efeitos:
  • Item returns home: The item will prompt the librarian to transfer the item to its home library
    • Importante

      If the AutomaticItemReturn preference is set to automatically transfer the items home, then a prompt will not appear
  • Item returns to issuing branch: The item will prompt the librarian to transfer the item back to the library where it was checked out
    • Importante

      If the AutomaticItemReturn preference is set to automatically transfer the items home, then a prompt will not appear
  • Item floats: The item will not be transferred from the branch it was checked in at, instead it will remain there until transferred manually or checked in at another branch
For example you might allow holds at your libraries but not what New items or DVDs to be placed on hold by other branches so you can set the 'Hold policy' to 'From home library' so that those items can only be placed on hold if the items' owning library and the patron's home library are the same. You can also block holds completely on specific item types from this form. This is also how you can set up floating item types and types that remain with their home library.

2.3.3. Tipos de atributos de usuários

Patron attributes can be used to define custom fields to associate with your patron records. In order to enable the use of custom fields you need to set the ExtendedPatronAttributes system preference.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Patron attribute types
Um uso comum para este campo seria para a idenficação do estudante ou para o número da carteira de motorista.

2.3.3.1. Adicionando atributos de usuários

Para adicionar um novo Tipo de Atributo de Usuário, clique em 'Novo Tipo de Atributo de Usuário' na parte superior da página
  • In the 'Patron attribute type code', enter a short code to identify this field
    • Importante

      This field is limited to 10 characters (numbers and letters only)
    • Importante

      This setting cannot be changed after an attribute is defined
  • No campo 'Descrição' digite uma descrição mais longa (texto) sobre o que este campo poderá conter
  • Check the box next to 'Repeatable' to let a patron record have multiple values of this attribute.
    • Importante

      This setting cannot be changed after an attribute is defined
  • If 'Unique identifier' is checked, the attribute will be a unique identifier which means, if a value is given to a patron record, the same value cannot be given to a different record.
    • Unique attibutes can be used as match points on the patron import tool
    • Importante

      This setting cannot be changed after an attribute is defined
  • Verifique 'Permitir senha' para tornar possível a associação entre a senha e seu atributo.
  • Verifique 'Exibir no OPAC' para exibir este atributo na tela de detalhes do usuário no OPAC.
  • Marque 'Pesquisável' para tornar este atributo pesquisável na busca de usuários na interface do funcionário.
  • Marque 'Exibir no empréstimo' para tornar este atributo visível no resumo do usuário a esquera da página de empréstimo e em outras páginas do usuário
  • Authorized value category; if one is selected, the patron record input page will only allow values to be chosen from the authorized value list.
    • You will first need to add an authorized value list for it to appear in this menu
    • Importante

      an authorized value list is not enforced during batch patron import.
  • Caso você queria que este atributo esteja disponível apenas para algumas bibliotecas, você poderá selecionar quais delas na lista de 'Limitação de bibliotecas'. Selecione 'Todas as bibliotecas' para a opção estar disponível a todas elas.
    • Importante

      Note that items with locations already set on them will not be altered. The branch limitation only limits the choosing of an authorized value based on the home branch of the current staff login. All authorized values for item records (LOC, LOST, CCODE, etc) will show in the OPAC for all patrons.
  • Se você quiser somente exibir este atributo em usuários de um único tipo escolha na 'Categoria' no menu
  • If you have a lot of attributes it might be handy to group them so that you can easily find them for editing. If you create an Authorized Value for PA_CLASS it will show in the 'Class' pull down and you can then change your attributes page to have sections of attributes
  • Clique Salvar para salvar seu novo atributo
Quando seu atributo é adicionado, ele aparecerá na lista de atributos e no formulário de Adicionar/Editar usuários
Se você configurar classes para atributos de organização eles irão aparecer desta maneira no formulário de inclusão/edição de usuários

2.3.3.2. Editando/Excluindo atributos de usuários

Cada atributo de usuário tem um link editar e excluir ao lado da lista de atributos.
Alguns campos no atributo não serão editáveis após criados:
  • Código de tipo de atributo de usuário
  • Repetítivel
  • Identificador único
Você não será capaz de excluir um atributo se ele não estiver em uso.

2.3.4. Limites de transferência entre bibliotecas

Limitar a transferência de exemplares entre bibliotecas com base na biblioteca que envia, biblioteca que recebe e o código da coleção do material.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Library Transfer Limits
These rules only go into effect if the preference UseBranchTransferLimits is set to 'enforce'.
Antes de começar, você precisa selecionar a biblioteca para a qual você está definindo os limites de transferência.
Transfer limits are set based on the collections codes you have applied via the Authorized Value administration area.
Collection codes will appear as tabs above the checkboxes:
Check the boxes for the libraries that you accept checkins from for the item type you have selected at the top (in the example below - FIC)
In the above example, Centerville library will allow patrons to return items from all libraries except Liberty and Franklin to their branch.

2.3.5. Matriz de custo de transporte

The Transport cost matrix lets a library system define relative costs to transport books to one another. In order for the system to use this matrix you must first set the UseTransportCostMatrix preference to 'Use'.

Importante

The Transport cost matrix takes precedence in controlling where holds are filled from, if the matrix is not used then Koha checks the StaticHoldsQueueWeight.
Custos são valores decimais entre algum valor máximo arbitrário (ex. 1 ou 100) e 0 que é o menor (ou nenhum) custo. Por exemplo, você pode simplesmente utilizar a distância entre cada biblioteca em quilometros como seu 'custo', se isto refletir diretamente no custo de transferência. Às vezes as agências de correio podem ser uma medida mais apropriada. Bibliotecas que compartilham uma agência dos correios poderiam ter um custo 1, agências de correio adjacentes teriam um custo 2 etc.
Para adicionar custos com transporte, clique na célula que você deseja alterar, tire a seleção da caixa 'Desativar' e insira seu 'custo'
Após informar o custo, pressione 'Enter' e clique em 'Salvar' no final da matriz para salvar suas alterações.

2.3.6. Alertas de circulação de itens

As bibliotecas podem decidir se querem que os usuários sejam informados automaticamente sobre a circulação de materiais (devoluções e empréstimos).
  • Get there: More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Item Circulation Alerts
Estas preferências são configuradas com base no tipo de usuários e materiais.

Importante

These preference can be overridden by changes in the individual patron's messaging preferences.
Para configurar alertas de circulação:
  • Choose your library from the pull down at the top of the screen
    • Para configurar preferências para todas as bibliotecas, deixa o menu configurado para 'Padrão'
  • By default all item types and all patrons are notified of check ins and check outs. To change this, click on the item/patron type combo that you would like to stop notices for.
    • In the above example, Juveniles and Kids will not receive check out notices.

2.3.7. Cidades

Para padronizar uma entrada de usuário você pode definir uma lista com as cidades da região, o que permite que novos usuários tenham suas informações de endereço adicionadas sem que o funcionário tenha que digitá-las.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Patrons & Circulation > Cities and Towns

2.3.7.1. Adicionando uma cidade

To add a new city, click the 'New City' button at the top of the page and enter the city name, state, zip/postal code and country.
One you click Submit, your city will be saved and will be listed on the Cities and Towns page
Cidades podem ser editadas ou excluidas em qualquer momento.

2.3.7.2. Visualizando Cidades no Formulário de Entrada de Usuários

Se você definiu cidades locais utilizando a opção Nova Cidade, quando você adicionar ou editar um registro de usuário, você verá uma lista que tornará a escolha da cidade mais fácil.
Isto irá permitir a inserção de cidades no registro de usuário sem o risco de erros de localização.

2.4. Catalog Administration

Set these controls before you start cataloging on your Koha system.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Catalog

2.4.1. Planilhas bibliográficas MARC

Pense nas planilhas como modelos para criar novos registros bibliográficos. O Koha vem com algumas planilha pré-definidas que podem ser editadas ou excluídas e os funcionários podem criar suas próprias planilha para conteúdos específicos de suas bibliotecas.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Catalog > MARC Bibliographic Frameworks

Importante

Nunca exclua ou edite a Framework Padrão pois causará problemas com seus registros no catálogo - sempre crie um novo template baseado na Planilha Padrão, ou edite outras planilhas.
Depois de clicar em 'Estrutura MARC' à direita de cada planilha você pode definir quantos campos quer visualizar na tela utilizando as opções de paginação no topo da tabela.

2.4.1.1. Adicionar Novo Framework

Para adicionar uma nova planilha
  • Click 'New Framework'
    • Digite um código de 4 ou menos caracteres
    • Use o campo de descrição para inserir uma definição mais detalhada da sua planilha
  • Clique 'Enviar'
  • Once your Framework is added click 'MARC structure' to the right of it on the list of Frameworks
    • Você poderá escolher uma planilha para se basear para construir uma nova planilha, o que é mais fácil do que começar uma planilha do zero
  • Once your Framework appears on the screen you can edit or delete each field by following the instructions for editing subfields

2.4.1.2. Editar Frameworks existentes

Clicking 'Edit' to the right of a Framework will only allow you to edit the Description for the Framework:
To make edits to the fields associated with the Framework you must first click 'MARC Structure' and then follow the instructions for editing subfields

2.4.1.3. Add subfields to Frameworks

Para adicionar um campo a planilha, clique em 'Nova Tag' na parte superior da tela de definição de planilha
Isto irá exibir um formulário em branco para entrar com os dados do campo MARC
Digite a informação sobre sua nova tag:
  • A 'Tag' é o número do campo MARC
  • O 'Texto para Staff' é o texto que será exibido na interface administrativa no módulo de catalogação
  • O 'Texto para OPAC' é o texto que irá aparecer no OPAC quando for visualizada a versão MARC do registro
  • Se este campo pode ser repetitível, marque a caixa 'Repetitível'
  • Se este campo é obrigatório, marque a caixa 'Obrigatório'
  • Se você quiser que este campo tenha uma lista de seleção com as possíveis respostas, escolha uma lista de 'Valores Autorizados' que você deseja utilizar
Quando terminar, clique em 'Salvar Alterações' e você verá seu novo campo
To the right of the new field is a link to 'Subfields,' you will need to add subfields before this tag will appear in your MARC editor. The process of entering the settings for the new subfield is the same as those found in the editing subfields in frameworks section of this manual.

2.4.1.4. Edit Framework Subfields

Frameworks são compostas por campos e subcampos MARC. Para editar a maioria das planilhas, você precisa alterar os campos e subcampos. Clicando em 'Editar', ao lado de cada subcampo permite que você faça alterações no texto associado a cada campo
  • Each field has a tag (which is the MARC tag) that is uneditable
    • The 'Label for lib' is what will show in the staff client if you have advancedMARCeditor set to display labels
    • O 'Texto para OPAC' é o que será exibido na visualização MARC no OPAC
    • Se você registrar algum campo como 'Repetitivo' o campo terá um sinal de mais (+) que permitirá adicionar mais de uma informação no mesmo campo
    • Se você registrar algum campo como 'Obrigatório' o registro não será salvo ao menos que você coloque algum valor nele
    • 'Authorized value' is where you define an authorized value that your catalogers can choose from a pull down to fill this field in
To edit the subfields associated with the tag, click 'Subfields' to the right of the tag on the 'MARC Structure' listing
  • Na lista de subcampos você pode clicar em 'Deletar' ao lado de cada subcampo para deletá-lo
  • Para editar os subcampos clique em 'Editar Subcampos'
  • For each subfield you can set the following Basic constraint values
    • Text for librarian
      • que aparecem antes do subcampo na interface administrativa
    • Text for OPAC
      • que aparecem antes do campo no OPAC.
        • Se ficar em branco, o texto para funcionário será usado no lugar
    • Repetítivel
      • o campo que possui um sinal de + (mais) é repetitivo
    • Obrigatório
      • o registro não poderá ser salvo enquanto esta tag não estiver preenchida
    • Managed in tab
      • defina a aba na qual o subcampo é exibido. Todos os subcampos de um determinado campo devem estar na mesma bada ou ignorados. Ignorado quer dizer que o campo não é utilizado.
  • For each subfield you can set the following Advanced constraint values
    • Default value
      • define o que você quer que apareça por padrão no campo. Este valor é editável, mas você pode ganhar tempo se utilizar muitas vezes a mesma informação.
    • Visibility
      • allows you to select from where this subfield is visible/hidden, simply check the boxes where you would like the field to show and uncheck the boxes where you would like it hidden.
    • Is a URL
      • if checked, it means that the subfield is a URL and can be clicked
    • Link
      • If you enter a field/subfield here (200b), a link appears after the subfield in the MARC Detail view. This view is present only in the staff client, not the OPAC. If the librarian clicks on the link, a search is done on the database for the field/subfield with the same value. This can be used for 2 main topics :
        • em um campo como autor (200f no UNIMARC, coloque 200f aqui, você poderá ver todos os registros bibliográficos do mesmo autor.
        • em um campo que é um link (4xx) para chegar a outro registro bibliográfico. Por exemplo, coloque 011a em 464$x irá levar aos periódicos com este ISSN.
      • Atenção

        This value should not change after data has been added to your catalog. If you need to change this value you must ask your system administrator to run misc/batchRebuildBiblioTables.pl.
    • Koha link
      • O Koha aceita diferentes formatos MARC. Assim, ele não reconhece o significado de 245$a ou de 200$f (título em MARC21 e UNIMARC respectivamente). Assim, você pode mapear os subcampos MARC de acordo com a informação contida. O Koha mantém a consistência dessas informações, registrando o elo entre o subcampo e seu significado. Quando o usuário faz uma busca por título, este mapeamento é que permite que ele encontre a informação no campo correto (245 no caso de MARC21 e 200 para UNIMARC).
  • For each subfield you can set the following Other option values
    • Valores autorizados
      • means the value cannot by typed by the librarian, but must be chosen from a pull down generated by the authorized value list
      • No exemplo acima, o campo 504a exibirá apenas os valores autorizados para MARC504 na catalogação
    • Thesaurus
      • significa que o valor não é um texto livre, é preciso pesquisá-lo no catálogo de autoridades/tesaurus da categoria
    • Plugin
      • significa que o valor é calculado ou gerenciado por um plugin. Plugins podem fazer quase tudo com as informações.
      • Por exemplo, em UNIMARC há plugins para cada campo 1xx que são codificados. O plugin é uma enorme ajuda para o catalogador. Há também dois plugins (unimarc_plugin_210c e unimarc_plugin_225a que podem "magicamente" encontrar a editora pelo ISBN e a lista de coleções para a editora)
  • Para salvar suas alterações simplesmente clique em 'Salvar Alterações' na parte superior da tela

2.4.1.5. Import/Export Frameworks

Next to each framework is a link to either import or export the framework.
2.4.1.5.1. Export Framework
To export a framework simply click the 'Export' link to the right of framework title.
When you click 'Export' you will be prompted to choose what format to export the file in.
A framework exported this way can be imported into any other Koha installation using the import framework option.
2.4.1.5.2. Import Framework
An easy way to create a new framework is to import one created for your or another Koha installation. This framework would need to be exported from the other system using the instructions above to be available for import here.
To import a framework you first need to create a new framework. Once you have that framework, click 'Import' to the right of the new framework.
You will be prompted to find a file on your computer to import into the framework.
You will be asked to confirm your actions before the file is imported.
As your file is uploaded you will see an image that will confirm that the system is working.
Once your import is complete you will be brought to the framework edit tool where you can make any changes you need to the framework you imported.

2.4.2. Mapeamento Koha para MARC

Enquanto o Koha armazena todo o registro MARC, ele também armazena outros campos que permitem um acesso mais fácil às informações da base de dados. O mapeamento Koha para MARC é utilizado para dizer ao Koha onde encontrar estes valores no registro MARC. Em muitos casos você não precisará alterar os valores padrão configurados na instalação, mas é importante saber que a ferramenta está disponível e que você pode utilizá-la a qualquer momento.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Catalog > Koha to MARC Mapping
A página de Mapeamentos MARC do Koha oferece a opção de escolher uma das três tabelas para definir valores.
Depois de escolher a tabela que deseja visualizar, clique 'OK'. Para editar qualquer mapeamento, clique no 'Koha Arquivado' ou 'Editar'.
Escolha qual campo MARC você quer mapear para este campo do Koha e clique em 'OK'. Se você quiser limpar todos os mapeamento, clique em 'Retirar mapeamento'.

Importante

At this time you can map only 1 MARC field to 1 Koha field. This means that you won't be able to map both the 100a and the 700a to the author field, you need to choose one or the other.

2.4.3. Keywords to MARC Mapping

Esta ferramenta permitirá mapear os campos MARC para um conjunto de palavras-chave predefinidas.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Catalog > Keywords to MARC Mapping

Importante

This tool only effects sites that are not using the XSLT Stylesheets.
Neste momento a única palavra-chave em uso é 'subtítulo.'
Usando esta ferrament você pode definir quais campos MARC aparecem na tela de detalhes do registro bibliográfico utilizando palavras-chave. O exemplo a seguir utiliza o campo de subtítulo.
Using the Framework pull down menu, choose the Framework you would like to apply this rule to. For example, the subtitle for books can be found in the 245$b field.
No entanto os subtítulos de DVD aparecem em 245$p
Usando esta ferramenta você pode dizer ao Koha para imprimir o campo certo como o subtítulo ao ver o registro bibliográfico no OPAC.
esta ferramenta pode ser usada para reunir parte do registro. Se você quer que o número da série apareça no título na página de resultados de pesquisa você só tem que mapear o campo 490$v para 'subtitle' com o 245$b.

Nota

Chain together the fields you want to show after the item title in the order in which you want them to appear.
Futuros desenvolvimentos vão incluir campos atribuídos para palavras-chave adcionais.

2.4.4. Teste do modelo Bibliográfico MARC

Checks the MARC structure.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Catalog > MARC Bibliographic Framework Test
Se você alterar sua planilha bibliográfica MARC, é recomendável executar esta ferramenta para buscar por erros em sua definição.

2.4.5. Tipos de autoridade

Authority Types are basically MARC Frameworks for Authority records and because of that they follow the same editing rules found in the MARC Bibliographic Frameworks section of this manual. Koha comes with many of the necessary Authority frameworks already installed. To learn how to add and edit Authority Types, simply review the MARC Bibliographic Frameworks section of this manual.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Catalog > Authority Types

2.4.6. Fontes de classificação

Savitra Sirohi

Nucsoft OSS Labs

Editado por

Nicole C. Engard

Fixed typos, changed content where necessary and added new screenshots. 
2010
Source of classification or shelving scheme is an Authorized Values category that is mapped to field 952$2 and 942$2 in Koha's MARC Bibliographic frameworks and stored in the items.cn_source field in the database.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Catalog > Classification sources
Valores usados frequentemente neste campo são:
  • cdd - Classificação Decimal de Dewey
  • lcc - Classificação da Library of Congress
Se você optar por instalar fontes de classificação durante a instalação do Koha, você poderá ver outros valores também:
  • ANSCR (gravações de áudio)
  • Classificação SuDOC
  • Classificação Decimal Universal
  • Outra/Classificação genérica

2.4.6.1. Adicionando/Editando fontes de classificação

Você pode adicionar a sua própria fonte de aquisição utilizando o botão 'Nova Fonte de Classificação'. Para alterar a fonte, vôcê pode clicar em 'Editar'.
Quando estiver criando ou editando:
  • Você precisará inserir um código e uma descrição
  • Clique na caixa de seleção 'Fonte em uso?' se você deseja que o valor apareça numa lista para esta categoria.
  • Select the appropriate filing rule from the drop down list.

2.4.6.2. Classificação das regras de alfabetação

Regras de preencimento determinam a ordem em que cada item terá nas estantes.
Os valores pré-configurados no Koha são:
  • Dewey
  • LCC
  • Genérico
Filing rules are mapped to Classification sources. You can setup new filing rules by using the New Filing Rule button. To edit use the Edit link.
Quando estiver criando ou editando:
  • Digite um código e uma descrição
  • Defina uma rotina de preenchimento apropriada - Dewey, genérica ou LCC

2.4.7. Regras de concordância

Joy Nelson

ByWater Solutions

Editado por

Nicole C. Engard

Changed/edited content where necessary. 
2013
Regras de correspondência de registros são utilizadas no momento da importação de dados no Koha.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Catalog > Record Matching Rules
The rules that you set up here will be referenced with you Stage MARC Records for Import.
It is important to understand the difference between Match Points and Match Checks before adding new matching rules to Koha.
Match Points are the criteria that you enter that must be met in order for an incoming record to match an existing MARC record in your catalog. You can have multiple match points on an import rule each with its own score. An incoming record will be compared against your existing records (‘one record at a time’) and given a score for each match point. When the total score of the matchpoints matches or exceeds the threshold given for the matching rule, Koha assumes a good match and imports/overlays according your specifications in the import process. An area to watch out for here is the sum of the match points. Doublecheck that the matches you want will add up to a successful match.
Example:
Threshold of 1000
Match Point on 020$a 1000
Match Point on 022$a 1000
Match Point on 245$a 500
Match Point on 100$a 100
In the example above, a match on either the 020$a or the 022$a will result in a successful match. A match on 245$a title and 100$a author (and not on 020$a or 022$a) will only add up to 600 and not be a match. And a match on 020$a and 245$a will result in 1500 and while this is a successful match, the extra 500 point for the 245$a title match are superfluous. The incoming record successfully matched on the 020$a without the need for the 245$a match. However, if you assigned a score of 500 to the 100$a Match Point, a match on 245$a title and 100$a author will be considered a successful match (total of 1000) even if the 020$a is not a match.
Match Checks are not commonly used in import rules. However, they can serve a couple of purposes in matching records. First, match checks can be used as the matching criteria instead of the match points if your indexes are stale and out of date. The match checks go right for the data instead of relying on the data in the indexes. (If you fear your indexes are out of date, a rebuild of your indexes would be a great idea and solve that situation!) The other use for a Match Check is as a “double check” or “veto” of your matching rule. For example, if you have a matching rule as below:
Threshold of 1000
Match Point on 020$a 1000
Match Check on 245$a
Koha will first look at the 020$a tag/subfield to see if the incoming record matches an existing record. If it does, it will then move on to the Match Check and look directly at the 245$a value in the incoming data and compare it to the 245$a in the existing ‘matched’ record in your catalog. If the 245$a matches, Koha continues on as if a match was successful. If the 245$a does not match, then Koha concludes that the two records are not a match after all. The Match Checks can be a really useful tool in confirming true matches.
When looking to create matching rules for your authority records the following indexes will be of use:

Tabela 2.1. Authority Indexes

Index name Matches Marc Tag
LC-cardnumber 010$a
Personal-name 100$a
Corporate-name-heading 110$a
Meeting-name 111$a
Title-uniform 130$a
Chronological-term 148$a
Subject-topical 150$a
Name-geographic 151$a
Term-genre-form 155$a

2.4.7.1. Adding Matching Rules

To create a new matching rule :
  • Click 'New Record Matching Rule'
    • Escolha um nome único e coloque-o no campo 'Código da regra de correspondência'
    • 'Descrição' pode ser qualquer coisa que deixará claro pra você qual regra você estará selecionando
    • 'Match threshold' is the total number of 'points' a biblio must earn to be considered a 'match'
    • 'Record type' is the type of import this rule will be used for - either authority or bibliographic
    • Ponto de Correspondência são configurados para determinar quais campos utilizar na correspondência
    • 'Índice de Busca' pode ser encontrado no arquivo de propriedades.ccl no seu sitema que indica ao indexador zebra qual dado deve ser buscado nos dados MARC".
    • 'Pontuação' - O número de 'pontos' que vale uma correspondência neste campo. Se a soma for maior que o valor necessário para considerar semelhante o registro importado substituirá o existente
    • Digite a tag MARC que quer verificar a coincidência no campo 'Tag'
    • Digite o tag do subcampo MARC que quer verificar a coincidência do campo 'Subcampos'
    • 'Offset' - Para uso com os campos de controle, 001-009
    • 'Comprimento' - Para uso em campos de controle, 001-009
    • O Koha tem apenas uma 'Regra de Normalização' que remove caracteres que estão a mais (como vírgulas e ponto e vírgula). O valor que você digitar neste campo é irrelevante para o processo de normalização.
    • 'Checagem de correspondências exigidas' - ??

2.4.7.2. Sample Bibliographic Record Matching Rule: Control Number

  • Limite para correspondências: 100
  • Record type: Bibliographic
    • Nota

      If you'd like a rule to match on the 001 in authority records you will need the repeat all of these values and change just the record type to 'Authority record'
  • Pontos de correspondência (apenas o único):
  • Pesquisar índice: Número de controle
  • Pontuação: 101
  • Tag: 001
    • Nota

      este campo é para o número de controle da organização, usando, ou distribuindo o registro
  • Subcampos: a
  • Deslocamento: 0
  • Comprimento: 0
  • Regra de normalização: número de controle
  • Correspondência requerida: nenhuma (remova o branco)

2.4.8. OAI Sets Configuration

Nesta página você pode criar, editar e excluir conjuntos OAI-PMH

2.4.8.1. Criar um conjunto

To create a set:
  • Clique no link 'Adicionar um novo conjunto'
  • Preencha os campos obrigatórios 'setSpec' e 'setName'
  • Depois, você pode adicionar descrições para este conjunto. Para fazer isso, clique em 'Adicionar descrição' e preencha a caixa de texto recém-criado. Você pode adicionar quantas descrições desejar.
  • Clique no botão 'Salvar'

2.4.8.2. Modify/Delete a set

Para editar um conjunto, apenas clique no link 'Editar' na mesma linha do conjunto que queira editar. O formulário similar a criação do conjunto irá aparece e permitira editar o setSpec e SetName e descrições.
Para excluir um conjunto, clique no link 'Excluir' na mesma linha do conjunto que quer excluir.

2.4.8.3. Define mapeamentos

Aqui você pode definir como um conjunto é construido (quais registros irão pertencer a este conjunto) através da definição de mapeamentos. Mapeamentos são listas de condições no conteudo do registro. Um registro somente precisa coincidir uma condição para pertencer a este conjunto.
  • Fill the fields 'Field', 'Subfield' and 'Value'. For example if you want to include in this set all records that have a 999$9 equal to 'XXX'. Fill 'Field' with 999, 'Subfield' with 9 and 'Value' with XXX.
  • Se você quer adicionar outra condição, clique no botão 'OR' e repita o passo 1.
  • Clique em 'Salvar'
To delete a condition, just leave at least one of 'Field', 'Subfield' or 'Value' empty and click on 'Save'.

Nota

Actually, a condition is true if value in the corresponding subfield is strictly equal to what is defined if 'Value'. A record having 999$9 = 'XXX YYY' will not belong to a set where condition is 999$9 = 'XXX'.
E é case sensitivo: um registro tem 999$9 = 'xxx' não será equivalente a um conjunto que tem a condição 999$9 ='XXX'.

2.4.8.4. Criar conjuntos

Uma vez configurado todos os conjuntos, você construiu os conjuntos. Será finalizado usando o script misc/migration_tools/build_oai_sets.pl.

2.5. Aquisições

O módulo de Aquisições do Koha fornece uma forma para os técnicos registrarem encomendas a fornecedores e gerir os orçamentos.
Before using the Acquisitions Module, you will want to make sure that you have completed all of the set up.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Acquisitions

2.5.1. Moedas e taxas de câmbio

Se você fez pedidos a partir de diferentes países, você pode definir as unidades monetárias, assim o módulo de aquisições calculará adequadamente os totais.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Acquisitions > Currencies and Exchange Rates

Nota

This data is not automatically updated, so be sure to keep it up to date so that your accounting is kept correct.
O código ISO inserido será utilizado quando houver importação de arquivos MARC através das ferramentas de importação de registros. A ferramenta tentará encontrar e utilizar o preço na moeda corrente.
A unidade monetária ativa é a principal unidade utilizada na sua biblioteca. Sua unidade monetária ativa terá uma seleção na coluna 'Ativa'. Se você não possui uma unidade monetária ativa você verá uma mensagem de erro pedindo que você defina uma delas como 'Ativa'.

2.5.2. Orçamentos

Budgets are used for tracking accounting values related to acquisitions. For example you could create a Budget for the current year (ex. 2012) and then break that into Funds for different areas of the library (ex. Books, Audio, etc).
  • Get there: More > Administration > Acquisitions > Budgets
Na tela principal de administração do orçamento, você verá duas abas: uma para orçamentos ativos, outra para os inativos.

2.5.2.1. Adicionar um orçamento

Orçamentos podem tanto ser criados do zero como a partir do orçamento do ano anterior.
To duplicate a budget from a previous year, click on the link for the budget name from the list of budgets
On the screen listing the budget breakdown click the Edit button at the top and choose to Duplicate budget
Você será levado a um formulário no qual é preciso inserir a nova data de início e término e salvar o orçamento.
Esta ação não apenas irá duplicar seu orçamento, mas todos os demais fundos associados a ele, de maneira que você poderá reutilizar orçamentos e fundos de um ano para outro.
Caso você não tenha utilizado o Koha para aquisições antes, então vpcê precisará começar com um novo orçamento. Para adicionar um novo orçamento clique no botão 'Novo Orçamento'.
  • Escolher o período de tempo do orçamento, sendo um ano acadêmico, ou fiscal, ou um semestre, etc.
  • A Descrição deve ser algo que ajude a identificar o orçamento durante a pedido
  • Na caixa de montante não use qualquer símbolo, apenas insira o montante do orçamento com números e decimais.
  • Tornar um orçamento 'Ativo' torna-o usável quando se realiza encomendas no módulo de aquisições, mesmo que a encomenda seja colocada depois do termino do orçamento, permitindo guardar encomendas antigas.
  • Bloquear um orçamento significa que os Fundos não podem ser modificados pelo técnicos
Assim que terminar a edição, pode carregar no botão 'Guardar alterações'. Será mostrada a lista os orçamentos existentes.

2.5.3. Fundos

  • Get there: More > Administration > Acquisitions > Funds

2.5.3.1. Adicionar um fundo

A fund is added to a budget.

Importante

A budget must be defined before a fund can be created.
To add a new fund click the New button and then choose which Budget you would like to add the fund to.
In the form that appears you want to enter the basics about your fund.
The three first fields are required, the rest are optional
  • Fund Code is a unique identifier for your fund
  • The Fund Name should be something that librarians will understand
  • Amount should be entered with only numbers and decimals, no other characters
  • Warning at (%) or Warning at (amount) can be filled in to make Koha warn you before you spend a certain percentage or amount of your budget. This will prevent you from overspending.
  • You can choose to assign this fund to a librarian. Doing so will make it so that only that librarian can make changes to the Fund
  • Choose which library will be using this fund
  • You can restrict who can order from this fund by choosing either the 'owner', 'owner and users' or 'owner, users and library' from the 'Restrict access to' menu
    • Importante

      Without an owner, the access restriction will be ignored, be sure to enter an owner as well as choose a restriction
  • Notes are simply for any descriptive notes you might want to add so that librarians know when to use this fund
  • Planning categories are used for statistical purposes. To learn more about planning categories, check out the Planning Category FAQ.
Quando completo, clique no botão para submeter e será mostrada a lista de todos os fundo para o orçamento.
To the right of each fund you will find the 'Edit,' 'Delete,' and 'Add Child Fund' options.
A child fund simply a sub-fund of the fund listed. An example would be to have a fund for 'Fiction' and under that have a fund for 'New Releases' and a fund for 'Science Fiction.' It is an optional way to further organize your finances.
Funds with children will show with a small arrow to the left. Clicking that will show you the children funds.

2.5.3.2. Planeamento do orçamento

Na tela de controle dos fundos clique no botão de 'Planejamento' e escolha como deseja gastar o orçamento.
If you choose 'Plan by MONTHS' you will see the budgeted amount broken down by months:
To hide some of the columns you can click the 'hide' link to the right (or below as in the screenshot above) the dates. To add more columns you can click the 'Show a column' link found below the 'Fund Remaining' heading.
A partir daqui você pode planejar o seu orçamento inserindo manualmente os valores ou clicando no botão de auto-preenchimento. Se você optar por preencher automaticamente o formulário, o sistema tentará dividir o montante da melhor maneira possível (pode ser necessário alguns ajustes para dividir os valores de forma mais acurada).
Uma vez que as alterações sejam feitas, clique no botão 'Salvar'. Se você gostaria de exportar os seus dados como um arquivo CSV, pode fazer isso inserindo o nome do arquivo no campo 'Exportar para um arquivo chamado' e clicando no botão 'Exportar'.

2.6. Parâmetros adicionais

  • Get there: More > Administration > Additional Parameters

2.6.1. Servidores Z39.50

Z39.50 é um protocolo cliente-servidor para buscar e recuperar informações de bases de dados remotas. Em síntese, trata-se de uma ferramenta para copiar registros de catalogação. Utilizando o Koha você pode conectar-se a qualquer servidor Z39.50 público ou para o qual você tenha acesso para copiar registros bibliográficos e/ou de autoridades desta fonte.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Additional Parameters > Z39.50 Servers
O Koha vem por padrão com uma lista de servidores Z39.50, mas você pode adicionar, editar ou deletar itens da lista
To find additional targets you use IndexData's IRSpy: http://irspy.indexdata.com or the Library of Congress's List of Targets http://www.loc.gov/z3950/

2.6.1.1. Adicionar um Servidor Z39.50

  • From the main Z39.50 page, click 'New Z39.50 Server'
    • O 'Servidor Z39.50' pode ser preenchido com um nome que irá ajuda-lo e identificar sua fonte (como o nome da biblioteca, por exemplo).
    • 'Hostname' é o endereço do servidor Z39.50..
    • 'Porta' indica ao Koha de qual porta ele deve aguardar a chegada de resultados da busca no servidor..
    • 'Usuário' e 'Senha' são requeridos apenas por servidores protegidos por senha.
    • Clique na caixa 'Selecionado' se você desejar que este servidor esteja sempre selecionado, por padrão.
    • 'Rank' lets you enter where in the list you'd like this target to appear.
      • Caso permaneça em branco, os servidores ficarão em ordem alfabética.
    • 'Syntaxe' é a estrutura MARC que você utiliza.
    • 'Encoding' mostra ao sistema como ler caracteres especiais.
    • 'Timeout' pode ser útil para servidores que demoram demais. Você pode definir um tempo máximo de espera, assim o sistema não fica eternamente esperando por resultados.
    • 'Tipo de registro' permite definir se o registro é bibliográfico ou de autoridade

2.6.1.2. Servidores Z39.50 sugeridos (Registros bibliográficos)

Koha libraries with open Z39.50 targets can share and find connection information on the Koha wiki: http://wiki.koha-community.org/wiki/Koha_Open_Z39.50_Sources. You can also find open Z39.50 targets by visiting IRSpy: http://irspy.indexdata.com.
Os servidores a seguir foram utilizados com sucesso por outras bibliotecas que utilizam o Koha (nas Américas):
  • ACCESS PENNSYLVANIA 205.247.101.11:210 INNOPAC
  • CUYAHOGA COUNTY PUBLIC webcat.cuyahoga.lib.oh.us:210 INNOPAC
  • GREATER SUDBURY PUBLIC 216.223.90.51:210 INNOPAC
  • HALIFAX PUBLIC catalogue.halifaxpubliclibraries.ca:210 horizon
  • HALTON HILLS PUBLIC cat.hhpl.on.ca:210 halton_hills
  • LIBRARY OF CONGRESS lx2.loc.gov: 210 LCDB
  • LONDON PUBLIC LIBRARY catalogue.londonpubliclibrary.ca:210 INNOPAC
  • MANITOBA PUBLIC library.gov.mb.ca:210 horizon
  • MILTON PL cat.mpl.on.ca:210 horizon
  • NATIONAL LIBRARY OF WALES cat.llgc.org.uk:210 default
  • NHUPAC 199.192.6.130:211 nh_nhupac
  • OCEAN STATE LIBRARIES (RI) catalog.oslri.net:210 INNOPAC
  • OHIOLINK olc1.ohiolink.edu:210 INNOPAC
  • PUBCAT prod890.dol.state.vt.us:2300 unicorn
  • SAN JOAQUIN VALLEY PUBLIC LIBRARY SYSTEM (CA) hip1.sjvls.org:210 ZSERVER
  • SEATTLE PUBLIC LIBRARY ZSERVER.SPL.ORG:210 HORIZON
  • TORONTO PUBLIC symphony.torontopubliclibrary.ca:2200 unicorn
  • TRI-UNI 129.97.129.194:7090 voyager
  • VANCOUVER PUBLIC LIBRARY z3950.vpl.ca:210 Horizon

2.6.1.3. Servidores Z39.50 sugeridos (Autoridades)

Os servidores a seguir foram utilizados com sucesso por outras bibliotecas que utilizam o Koha (nas Américas):
  • LIBRARIESAUSTRALIA AUTHORITIES z3950-test.librariesaustralia.nla.gov.au:210 Usuário: ANLEZ / Senha: z39.50
  • LIBRARY OF CONGRESS NAME AUTHORITIES lx2.loc.gov:210 NAF
  • LIBRARY OF CONGRESS SUBJECT AUTHORITIES lx2.loc.gov:210 SAF

2.6.2. Você quis dizer

Get there: More > Administration > Additional Parameters > Did you mean?
Koha can offer 'Did you mean?' options on searches based on values in your authorities.

Importante

Did you mean? only works in the OPAC at this time. The Intranet options are here for future development.
Usando esta página você pode controlar quais opções o Koha dá aos usuários no resultado de busca.
Habilitando a barra 'Você quis dizer`nos resultados de pesquisa você precisa marcar quais plugins você deseja usar. Os dois plugins que você pode escolher são:
  • O plugin ExplodedTerms sugere que o usuário tente buscar por termos gerais/específicos/relacionados para uma determinada pesquisa (ex. um usuário pesquisando por "New York (Estado)" pode clicar no link por termos específicos e se ele se interessar por "New York (Cidade)"). Isto só é relevante para bibliotecas com dados de autoridade de hierarquia consolidados.
  • O plugin AuthorityFile busca no arquivo de autoridades e sugere aos usuários os principais registros bibliográficos relacionados as 5 principais autoridades
Se você deseja que um plugin tenha prioridade sobre outro, você precisa simplesmente o arrastar sobre ele.
If you choose both plugins you will see several options at the top of your search results
If you choose just the AuthorityFile you'll see just authorities.

Capítulo 3. Ferramentas

Ferramentas no Koha realizam todos os tipos de ações. Na maioria dos casos os itens listados sob Ferramentas no Koha são referenciados em 'Relatórios' em outros sistemas de gerenciamento de bibliotecas.
  • Get there: More > Tools

3.1. Usuários e circulação

3.1.1. Listas de usuários

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Patron lists
Patron lists are a way to store a group of patrons for easy modification via the batch patron modification tool or reporting.
Para criar uma nova lista de usuários, clique no botão 'Nova lista de usuários'
Insira um nome para a lista e salve.
To add patrons to the list click the 'Add patrons' button to the right of the list name.
Insira o nome do usuário ou número de carteirinha na caixa de pesquisa e clique no resultado para adicionar o usuário.
Quando você tiver adicionado todos os usuários que desejar, clique em 'Atualizar' para salvá-los na lista.

3.1.2. Comentários

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Comments
All comments added by patrons via the OPAC to bibliographic records require moderation by the librarians. If there are comments awaiting moderation they will be listed on the main staff dashboard under the Tools label:
Todos os comentários adicionados pelos usuários via OPAC dependem de moderação de funcionários para serem visualizados. Para moderar os comentários, simplesmente clique em 'Aprovar' ou 'Excluir' no lado direito dos comentários que estão aguardando moderação.
Se não existir comentário para moderação, você verá uma mensagem dizendo isto
Você também pode rever e desaprovar comentários que aprovados no passado, escolhendo a aba 'Comentários aprovados'

3.1.3. Patron Import

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Import Patrons
A ferramenta de importação de usuários pode ser usada em qualquer momento para adicionar usuários em lote. É usada com maior frequência em universidades e escolas quando tem um novo lote de usuários registrados.

3.1.3.1. Criando Arquivo de Usuários

Sua instalação do Koha vem com um arquivo CSV em branco que você pode suar como template para seus registros de usuários. Se você deseja criar um arquivo, tenha certeza que seu arquivo tem os campos sequintes nesta ordem do cabeçalho:
borrowernumber, cardnumber, surname, firstname, title, othernames, initials, streetnumber, streettype, address, address2, city, zipcode, country, email, phone, mobile, fax, emailpro, phonepro, B_streetnumber, B_streettype, B_address, B_address2, B_city, B_zipcode, B_country, B_email, B_phone, dateofbirth, branchcode, categorycode, dateenrolled, dateexpiry, gonenoaddress, lost, debarred, contactname, contactfirstname, contacttitle, guarantorid, borrowernotes, relationship, ethnicity, ethnotes, sex, password, flags, userid, opacnote, contactnote, sort1, sort2, altcontactfirstname, altcontactsurname, altcontactaddress1, altcontactaddress2, altcontactaddress3, altcontactzipcode, altcontactcountry, altcontactphone, smsalertnumber, patron_attributes

Importante

The borrowernumber column should not be left blank. If you do not have data for that column you should delete that column before importing your patrons.

Importante

The 'password' should be stored in plaintext, and will be converted to a Bcrypt hash.
Se as passwords já se encontram encriptadas, fale com o administrador do sistema sobre as opções existentes

Importante

Date formats should match your system preference, and must be zero-padded, e.g. '01/02/2008'.

Importante

The fields 'branchcode', 'categorycode' and all fields you have defined in the BorrowerMandatoryField preference are required and must match valid entries in your database.

Nota

If loading patron attributes, the 'patron_attributes' field should contain a comma-separated list of attribute types and values.
  • The attribute type code and a colon should precede each value.
    • For example: INSTID:12345,LANG:fr or STARTDATE:January 1 2010,TRACK:Day
    • If an input record has more than one attribute, the fields should either be entered as an unquoted string (previous examples), or with each field wrapped in separate double quotes and delimited by a comma:
      • "STARTDATE:January 1, 2010","TRACK:Day"
      • A sintaxe será exigida se ela possuir uma vírgula, como uma string de data.

3.1.3.2. Importando usuários

Quando você tiver feito todas as edições, você pode clicar em 'Salvar' no topo do editor.
  • Escolha seu arquivo CSV e peça verificação de correspondência por 'Número de carteirinha' para evitar que sejam adicionadas carteirinhas duplicadas no sistema
  • Next you can choose default values to apply to all patrons you are importing
    • ex. If you're importing patrons specific to one branch you can use the field on the Import form to apply the branch code to all those you are importing.
  • Finally you need to decide on what data you want to replace if there are duplicates.
    • Um registro correspondente é encontrado utilizando o campo que você escolheu como critério de correspondência para evitar duplicação
    • Se você incluiu atributos de usuários no seu arquivo você pode decidir se deseja adicionar seus valores aos valores existentes ou apagar os valores existentes e manter somente os seus.

3.1.4. Mensagens & Comprovantes

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Notices & Slips
Todos os avisos e recibos (ou comprovantes) gerados pelo Koha podem ser personalizados utilizando a Ferramenta Avisos & Comprovantes. O sistema vem com vários modelos predefinidos que aparecerão quando você entrar pela primeira vez nesta ferramenta.
Cada aviso pode ser editado, mas só alguns podem ser excluídos, isso é para evitar erros do sistema de uma mensagem deve tentar enviar sem um modelo. Cada aviso prévio e de deslizamento podem ser editadas em uma base por biblioteca, por padrão, você verá os avisos para todas as bibliotecas.
If you have a style you'd like applied to all slips you can point the SlipCSS preference to a stylesheet. The same is true for notices, using the NoticeCSS preference to define a stylesheet.
You will also want to review the Notices & Slips Field Guide for more information on formatting these notices.

3.1.4.1. Adding Notices & Slips

Para adicionar um novo aviso
  • Click 'Adicionar notificação'
  • Escolha para qual biblioteca será este recibo
  • Escolha o módulo ao qual este aviso está relacionado
  • The Code is limited to 20 characters
    • Importante

      When working with the overdue notices you want each notice at each branch to have a unique code. Think about using the branch code in front of the notice code for each branch.
  • Use the name field to expand on your Code
    • Nota

      With overdue notices, be sure to put your branch name in the description as well so that it will be visible when setting up your triggers.
  • Next you can customize the notice for every possible delivery method
    • Todo aviso deve ter um modelo de e-mail configurado
    • Next, the Feed template is not yet enabled and will do nothing at this time.
    • If you're using the TalkingTechItivaPhoneNotification service you can set up a Phone notification
    • Caso você deseje imprimir este aviso, você poderá configurar um template para impressão a seguir
    • If you have enabled SMS notices with the SMSSendDriver preference you can set the text for your SMS notices next
  • Each notice offers you the same options
    • Se você quiser elaborar os avisos ou etiquetas em formato HTML, verifique se a opção 'Mensagem HTML' está selecionada, senão o conteúdo será gerado como texto plano
    • Assunto da Mensagem é o que aparecerá na linha de assunto do e-mail
    • In the message body feel free to type whatever message you feel is best, use the fields on the left hand side to enter individualized data from the from database.
      • Nota

        Review the Notices & Slip Field Guide for info on what fields can be used here.
      • Importante

        Overdue notices can use <<items.content>> tags by themselves, or use <item></item> to span all of the tags. Learn more about the Overdue Notice Markup
        • Em avisos de atraso, utilize <<items.content>> para imprimir os dados relacionadas a todos os exemplares em atraso.
        • The other option, only for overdue notices, is to use the <item></item> tags to span the line so that it will print out multiple lines One example for the <item></item> tag option is:
          <item>"<<biblio.title>>" by <<biblio.author>>, <<items.itemcallnumber>>, Barcode: <<items.barcode>> , Checkout date: <<issues.issuedate>>, Due date: <<issues.date_due>> Fine: <<items.fine>> Due date: <<issues.date_due>> </item>
      • Importante

        Only the overdue notices take advantage of the <item></item> tags, all other notices referencing items need to use <<items.content>>
      • Nota

        To add today's date you can use the <<today>> syntax
      • Nota

        If you don't want to print the patron's full name on your slips or notice you can enter data in the Other name or Initials field for each patron and use that value instead.
3.1.4.1.1. Marcação do Aviso de Atraso
When creating your overdue notices there are two tags in addition to the various database fields that you can use in your notices. You will also want to review the Notices & Slips Field Guide for information on formatting item information in these notices.

Importante

These new tags only work on the overdue notices, not other circulation related notices at this time.
Estas tags são <item> e </item> que envolvem todos os campos de biblio, biblioitem e tabelas de exemplares.
Um exemplo de utilização dessas tags no template de aviso poderia ser:
   The following item(s) is/are currently overdue:

   <item>"<<biblio.title>>" by <<biblio.author>>, <<items.itemcallnumber>>, Barcode: <<items.barcode>> Fine: <<items.fine>></item>
O que, assumindo que dois exemplares estão atrasados, resultará em um aviso como:
   The following item(s) is/are currently overdue:

   "A Short History of Western Civilization" by Harrison, John B, 909.09821 H2451, Barcode: 08030003 Fine: 3.50
   "History of Western Civilization" by Hayes, Carlton Joseph Huntley, 909.09821 H3261 v.1, Barcode: 08030004 Fine: 3.50

3.1.4.2. Avisos e recibos existentes & Slips

Among the default notices are notices for several common actions within Koha. All of these notices can be customized by altering their text via the Notices & Slips tool and their style using the NoticeCSS preference to define a stylesheet. You will also want to review the Notices & Slips Field Guide for information on formatting item information in these notices. Here are some of what those notices do:
  • ACCTDETAILS
    • Sent to patrons when their account is set up if the AutoEmailOPACUser preference is set to 'Send'
  • ACQCLAIM (Acquisition Claim)
    • Utilizado na parte de reclamações do módulo de aquisição
    • Get there: More > Acquisitions > Late issues
  • CHECKIN
    • Este aviso é enviado para todos os exemplares devolvidos
    • This notice is used if two criteria are met:
      1. The EnhancedMessagingPreferences is set to 'Allow'
      2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
        • Get there: OPAC > Login > my messaging
        • Get there: Staff Client > Patron Record > Notices
  • CHECKOUT
    • Notícias na tela de circulação irão aparecer abaixo dos exemplares que forem emprestados
    • This notice is used if two criteria are met:
      1. The EnhancedMessagingPreferences is set to 'Allow'
      2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
        • Get there: OPAC > Login > my messaging
        • Get there: Staff Client > Patron Record > Notices
  • DUE
    • Este aviso é enviado para um exemplar em atraso
    • This notice is used if two criteria are met:
      1. The EnhancedMessagingPreferences is set to 'Allow'
      2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
        • Get there: OPAC > Login > my messaging
        • Get there: Staff Client > Patron Record > Notices
  • DUEDGST
    • Este aviso é utilizado para alertar usuários sobre exemplares em atraso
    • This notice is used if two criteria are met:
      1. The EnhancedMessagingPreferences is set to 'Allow'
      2. The patron has requested to receive this notice as a digest
        • Get there: OPAC > Login > my messaging
        • Get there: Staff Client > Patron Record > Notices
  • HOLD (Hold Available for Pickup)
    • This notice is used if two criteria are met:
      1. The EnhancedMessagingPreferences is set to 'Allow'
      2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
        • Get there: OPAC > Login > my messaging
        • Get there: Staff Client > Patron Record > Notices
    • Quando este aviso faz alusão à tabela de bibliotecas, ele está se referindo às informações sobre a biblioteca de retirada.
  • HOLDPLACED (a notice to the library staff that a hold has been placed)
    • This notice requires the emailLibrarianWhenHoldIsPlaced system preference to be set to 'Enable'
    • Quando este aviso faz alusão à tabela de bibliotecas, ele está se referindo às informações sobre a biblioteca de retirada.
  • ODUE (Overdue Notice)
  • PREDUE
    • Este aviso é utilizado para enviar avisos de atraso para os usuários
    • This notice is used if two criteria are met:
      1. The EnhancedMessagingPreferences is set to 'Allow'
      2. The patron has requested to receive this notice
        • Get there: OPAC > Login > my messaging
        • Get there: Staff Client > Patron Record > Notices
  • PREDUEDGST
    • Este aviso é enviado para todos os exemplares em atraso
    • This notice is used if two criteria are met:
      1. The EnhancedMessagingPreferences is set to 'Allow'
      2. The patron has requested to receive this notice as a digest
        • Get there: OPAC > Login > my messaging
        • Get there: Staff Client > Patron Record > Notices
  • RENEWAL
    • Este aviso é enviado para todos os exemplares renovados
    • This notice is used if three criteria are met:
      1. The EnhancedMessagingPreferences is set to 'Allow'
      2. The RenewalSendNotice preference is set to 'Send'
      3. The patron has requested to receive the checkout notice
        • Get there: OPAC > Login > my messaging
        • Get there: Staff Client > Patron Record > Notices
  • RLIST (Routing List)
    • Used in the serials module to notify patrons/staff of new issues of a serial
    • Você tem a opção de selecionar o aviso de 'Routing List' quando cria uma nova assinatura (escolha a partir do menu 'Notificação de usuário).
    • Nota

      Notice also that if you'd like to notify patrons of new serial issues, you can click on 'define a notice' which will take you to the 'Notices' tool
  • SHARE_ACCEPT
    • Utilizado para notificar um usuário quando outro usuário tiver aceitado sua lista compartilhada.
    • Requires that you set OpacAllowSharingPrivateLists to 'Allow'
  • SHARE_INVITE
    • Utilizado para notificar um usuário de que outro usuário deseja compartilhar uma lista com ele.
    • Requires that you set OpacAllowSharingPrivateLists to 'Allow'
There are also a set of predefined slips (or receipts) listed on this page. All of these slips can be customized by altering their text via the Notices & Slips tool and their style using the SlipCSS preference to define a stylesheet. Here is what those slips are used for:
  • ISSUEQSLIP
    • Usado para imprimir um recibo rápido na circulação
    • O recibo rápido apenas inclui itens que foram emprestados hoje
  • ISSUESLIP
    • Usado para imprimir um recibo completo na circulação
    • Notícias na tela de circulação irão aparecer abaixo dos items que forem emprestados
  • RESERVESLIP
    • Usado para imprimir um recibo de reserva
    • O recibo de reserva é gerado quando uma reserva é confirmada
  • TRANSFERSLIP
    • Usado para imprimir um recibo de transferência
    • O comprovante de transferência é impresso quando você confirmar uma transferência de uma biblioteca para outra na sua rede

3.1.5. Disparar mensagens de atraso

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Overdue Notice/Status Triggers
In order to send the overdue notices that you defined using the Notices tool, you need to first set the triggers to have these messages.

Importante

In order to have overdue notices sent to your patrons, you need to set that patron category to require overdue notices.
A ferramenta de avisos de atrasos dá ao funcionário a possibilidade de enviar três avisos a cada tipo de usuário sobre os materiais que os mesmos possuem em atraso
  • Delay is the number of days after an issue is due before an action is triggered.
    • Importante

      If you want Koha to trigger an action (send a letter or restrict member), a delay value is required.
  • Para enviar avisos adicionais, clique nos separadores de 'Terceiro' e 'Segundo' aviso
  • If you would like to prevent a patron from checking items out because of their overdue items, check the 'Restrict' box, this will put a notice on the patron's record at checkout informing the librarian that the patron cannot check out due to overdue items.
    • If you choose to restrict a patron in this way you can also have Koha automatically remove that restriction with the AutoRemoveOverduesRestrictions preference.
  • Next you can choose the delivery method for the overdue notice. You can choose from Email, Phone (if you are using the iTiva Talking Tech service), Print and SMS (if you have set your SMSSendDriver).
    • Nota

      The Feed option is not yet a feature in Koha, it is there for future development.

3.1.6. Criador de cartões de usuários

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Patron Card Creator
O módulo de Carteirinhas permite usar esquemas e modelos personalizados para imprimir uma variedade ilimitada de carteirinhas incluindo código de barras. Aqui estão algumas das funcionalidades deste módulo:
  • Personalizar esquemas dos cartões
  • Design de rótulos de modelos personalizados para carteirinhas de usuários
  • Construir e gerir lotes de carteirinhas de usuário
  • Exportação de lotes únicos ou múltiplos
  • Exportar uma ou várias carteirinhas de usuários a partir de um lote
  • Exportar dados do cartão para PDF, tornando as carteirinhas imprimíveis diretamente na impressora
At the top of each screen within the Patron Card Creator, you will see a toolbar allowing quick access to relevant functions. The menu to the left of each screen also allows easy access to the different sections of the Patron Card Creator. The bread crumb trail near the top of each screen will give specific indication as to where you are within the Patron Card Creator module and allow quick navigation to previously traversed sections. And finally, you can find more detailed information on each section of the Patron Card Creator by clicking the online help link at the upper left-hand corner of every page.

3.1.6.1. Templates

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Templates
Um modelo é a etiqueta / cartão usado. Pode ser Avery 5160 para etiquetas de endereço, Gaylord 47-284 para etiquetas Avery coluna ou 28371 para suas carteirinhas, só para dar alguns exemplos. Esses rótulos incluem todas as informações que precisa para a criação, esta informação pode constar na embalagem, e se não for ele pode ser encontrado no site do fornecedor.
3.1.6.1.1. Adicionar Template
Para adicionar um novo modelo, clique no botão 'Modelos' na parte superior da página e escolha 'Novo Modelo'
Usando o formulário que aparece pode definir o modelo para a sua folha de etiquetas ou cartões.
  • ID do Modelo vai ser automaticamente gerado após guardar o modelo, sendo um simples identificar único no sistema
  • Código de modelo deve ser algo que ajude na identificação do modelo na lista.
  • Pode usar Descrição do Modelo para adicionar informação adicionar sobre o modelo
  • O menu Unidades é usado para definir a escala de medição que vai ser usada no modelo. Deve ser provavelmente a mesma unidade de medição usada na descrição do modelo dado pelo fornecedor.
  • As medições podem ser encontradas na embalagem do produto do fornecedor ou no Web site.
  • A profile is a set of "adjustments" applied to a given template just prior to printing which compensates for anomalies unique and peculiar to a given printer (to which the profile is assigned).
    • Antes de escolher um perfil Alguns tentam imprimir cartões amostra de modo que você pode facilmente definir um perfil que é direito para sua combinação de impressora / modelo.
    • After finding any anomalies in the printed document, create a profile and assign it to the template.
Depois de salvar, os modelos aparecerem na página de gestão dos modelos.

3.1.6.2. Perfis

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Profiles
A profile is a set of "adjustments" applied to a given template just prior to printing which compensates for anomalies unique and peculiar to a given printer (to which the profile is assigned). This means if you set a template up and then print a sample set of data and find that the items are not all aligned the same on each card, you need to set up a profile for each printer to make up for the differences in printing styles, such as the shifting of text to the left, right, top or bottom.
Se os cartões estão a imprimir da forma desejada, não precisa de um perfil.
3.1.6.2.1. Adicionar um perfil
Para adicionar um novo perfil, você quer clicar no botão 'Perfis' na parte superior da página e escolha 'Novo Perfil'
Usando o formulário que aparece pode criar um perfil para corrigir qualquer problema com seu modelo.
  • O Nome da impressora e o tipo de papel não têm necessariamente de ter a mesma impressora, apenas são referências para lembrar qual a impressora do perfil. Pode usar o número de modelo de impressora no nome ou chamar-lhe 'a impressora local'
  • Template will be filled in once you have chosen which template to apply the profile to on the template edit form
  • O menu Unidades é usado para definir a escala de medição que vai ser usada no perfil.
  • Offset describes what happens when the entire image is off center either vertically or horizontally and creep describes a condition where the distance between the labels changes across the page or up and down the page
    • Para estes valores, os números negativos movem o erro acima e à esquerda e os números positivos movem o erro abaixo e à direita
    • Exemplo: o texto está a 0,55 mm da margem esquerda da primeira etiqueta, 0,57mm da margem esquerda da segunda etiqueta e 0,61mm da margem esquerda da terceira etiqueta. Isto significa que o deslocamento horizantal deve ser ajustado para 0,6mm.
Depois de salvar, os perfis aparecerem na página de gestão dos perfis.
Após guardar o seu novo perfil, pode voltar a lista de modelos e editar o modelo para que use o perfil criado.

3.1.6.3. Layouts

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Layouts
Um esquema define o texto e as imagens que vai ser impressas no cartão e onde devem aparecer.
3.1.6.3.1. Adicionar um layout
Para adicionar um novo esquema, clique no botão 'Esquemas' na parte superior da página e escolha 'Novo Esquema'
Usando o formulário que aparece pode criar um perfil para corrigir qualquer problema com seu modelo.
  • O nome do esquema é para seu próprio benefício, por isso, chame-lhe algo que seja fácil de identificar posteriormente
  • The Units pull down is used to define what measurement scale you're going to be using for your layout.
  • Next note if this layout is for the front or the back of the patron card
    • Você vai precisar de um esquema para a frente e o verso da carteirinha se deseja ter uma carteirinha com 2 lados
  • Possui a opção de adicionar 3 linhas de texto a sua carteirinha. O texto pode ser estático à sua escolha e/ou campos do registro de usuário. Se deseja usar a segunda opção, é preciso colocar os nomes dos campos da seguinte forma - <firstname>
  • Para cada linha de texto, é possível escolher a fonte, o tamanho e a localização do texto no cartão usando as coordenadas X e Y
  • A fim de mostrar o código de barras e o número da carteirinha é necessário verificar a opção 'Imprimir Número da carteirinha como código de barras'. Isto irá transformar o número da carteirinha em um código de barras.
  • Finally you can choose up to two images to print on the card.
    • One can be the patron image which you can resize to meet your needs.
    • The other image can be something like a library logo or symbol that you uploaded using the 'Manage Images' module of the Patron Card Creator Tool.
Depois de salvar, os esquemas aparecerem na página de gestão dos esquemas.

3.1.6.4. Lotes

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Batches
Um lote é um grupo de usuários para os quais se deseja criar carteirinhas.
3.1.6.4.1. Adicionar um Lote
Para adicionar um novo lote, você precisa clicar no botão 'Lotes' na parte superior da página e escolher 'Novo Lote'

3.1.6.5. Gerenciar Imagens

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patron Card Creator > Manage Images
Images uploaded using this tool will appear on the menu when creating patron card layouts. You are limited in how many images you can upload (not counting patron images) by the ImageLimit system preference.

Importante

Imagens precisam ter menos que 500k.

Nota

Imagens carregadas com esta ferramenta devem ter no mínimo 300 dpi, a resolução necessária para uma impressão adequada.
No centro da tela há um formulário simples de upload, procure o arquivo em seu computador e dê-lhe um nome para reconhecê-lo mais tarde.
Quando o arquivo for carregado, surgirá uma mensagem de confirmação.
E a imagem será listada com as demais no lado direito da página.
Para excluir uma ou mais imagens, clique na caixa de seleção à direita de cada imagem que você deseja apagar e clique no botão 'Excluir'.

3.1.7. Usuários (tornar anônimo ou excluir)

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Patrons (anonymize, bulk-delete)
Esta ferramenta permite tornar anônimo o histórico de circulação ou excluir registros de usuário em massa. Isso significa que o sistema mantém uma ligação entre os empréstimos antigos e seus exemplares, mas corta a ligação com o usuário.

Importante

Patrons with outstanding fines or items checked out are not saved. They are not completely removed from the system (they are only moved to the delete_borrowers table), but this tool does not provide as many checks as one may desire.

Importante

Before using this tool it is recommended that you backup your database. Changes made here are permanent.

Importante

The anonymization will fail quietly if AnonymousPatron preference does not contain a valid value.
Para excluir ou tornar anônimos os usuários
  • Marque a caixa "Verificar" sobre a tarefa que você gostaria de completar (Apagar ou Anonymize)
  • Digite uma antes da qual você pretende ajustar os dados
  • Ao excluir usuários, você também pode selecioná-los a partir de uma data de vencimento específica ou categoria
  • Click 'Seguinte'
  • Uma confirmação aparecerá perguntando se você está ciente do que está fazendo
  • Clicando em 'Finalizar' para com que todos os dados sejam excluídos ou anonimizados

3.1.8. Edição de usuários em lote

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Batch patron modification
With this tool you can make edits to a batch of patron records. Simply load in a file of cardnumbers (one per line), choose from a list of patrons or scan patron card numbers in to the box provided.
Uma vez que subiu um arquivo ou códigos de barras escaneados clique 'Continuar'. Será apresentado uma lista com usuários e as alterações que você fez.
A esquerda de cada caixa de texto existe uma caixa de marcação. Clicando na caixa de marcação irá limpar os valores deste campo.

Importante

If the field is mandatory you will not be able to clear the value in it.
Se você tem mais de um atributo de usuário você pode alterá-los usando o sinal (+) a direita da caixa de texto. Ele permitirá você adicionar outro valor de atributo.
Quando você tiver feito todas as alterações, você pode clicar em 'Salvar' e o Koha irá apresentá-lo com as alterações feitas nos registros de usuários.

3.1.9. Tag Moderation

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Tags
Depending on your tagging system preferences, librarians may need to approve tags before they are published on the OPAC. This is done via the Tag Moderation Tool. If there are tags awaiting moderation they will be listed on the main staff dashboard under the module labels:
Para moderar as tags visite a ferramentas de Tags. Quando visitar pela primeira vez a ferramenta, será apresentado para você uma lista com tags que estão aguardando aprovação por um bibliotecário
  • Para ver todos os títulos ligados a esta tag, clique na palavra
    • From this list of titles you can remove a tag without outright rejecting it from being used in the future by clicking the 'Remove tag' button to the right of the title.
  • Para aprovar uma tag, você pode clicar no botão 'Aprovar' com o termo, ou marcar todos os termos que você deseja aprovar e clique em 'Aceitar' abaixo da tabela.
  • Para rejeitar uma tag, você pode clicar no botão 'Rejeitar' com o termo, ou verifique todos os termos que você deseja rejeitar e clique em 'Rejeitar' abaixo da tabela.
Assim que um etiqueta for aprovada ou rejeitada será movida para a lista apropriada. Um sumário de todas as etiquetas aparecerá à direita do ecrã.
Even though a tag is approved or rejected, it can still be moved to another list. When viewing approved tags each tag has the option to reject:
To check terms against the approved and rejected lists (and possibly against the dictionary you have assigned for tag moderation) simply enter the term into the search box on the bottom right of the screen to see the status of the term
Finally you can find tags by using the filters on the left.

3.1.10. Upload Patron Images

  • Get there: More > Tools > Patrons and Circulation > Upload Patron Images
Patron images can be uploaded in bulk if you are allowing patron images to be attached to patron records. These images can also be used when creating patron cards.
  • Crie um arquivo txt e o nomeie como "DATALINK.TXT" ou "IDLINK.TXT"
  • On each line in the text file enter the patron's card number followed by comma (or tab) and then the image file name
    • Assegure-se que o seu arquivo TXT é um arquivo de texto plano e não RTF.
  • Zipar e enviar o arquivo de texto e os arquivos de imagens
  • Vá para a Ferramenta de Upload de Imagens de Usuário
  • Para uma só imagem, selecione o arquivo da imagem e digite o número da carteirinha do usuário
  • Para mais de um arquivo de imagem, escolha upload de arquivo .zip
  • Depois de escolher você receberá uma mensagem de confirmação

Importante

There is a limit of 100K on the size of the picture uploaded and it is recommended that the image be 200x300 pixels, but smaller images will work as well.

3.1.11. Rotating Collections

Cindy Murdock Ames

Meadville Public Library | CCFLS

Editado por

Nicole C. Engard

2014
  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Rotating Collections
Rotating Collections is a tool for managing collections of materials that frequently get shifted from library to library. It adds the ability to store not only an item's home library and current location but also information about where it is supposed to be transferred to next to ensure that all items in the collection are sent to the correct library. When an item in a rotating collection is checked in, library staff is notified that the item is part of a rotating collection and which branch it should be sent to if it is not at the correct one.

Importante

The AutomaticItemReturn system preference must be set to "Don't automatically transfer items to their home library when they are returned" for Rotating Collections to function properly.
  • To create a new rotating collection, click the "New Collection" button, fill in the Title and Description, and click Submit. Once submitted you'll see "Collection Name added successfully"; click "Return to rotating collections home" to return to the main Rotating Collections management page (or click Rotating Collections in the sidebar).
  • To add items to a collection, click "Add or remove items" next to the collection's name in the list of collections. Under "Add or remove items" scan or type in the barcode of the item you wish to add to the collection, and hit Enter or click Submit if necessary.
  • To remove an item from a collection, either click Remove next to the item's barcode in the list of items within the collection or check the "Remove item from collection" box next to the Barcode text box under "Add or remove items, and scan or type in the barcode, clicking Submit or hitting Enter if necessary. Note: The "Remove item from collection" checkbox will remain checked as long as you are on the "Add or remove items" page, unless you uncheck it, to facilitate quickly removing a number of items at a time by scanning their barcodes.

3.1.11.1. Transfer a Rotating Collection

Transferring a collection will:
  • Change the current location of the items in that collection to the library it is to be transferred to
  • Initiate a transfer from its original current location/holding library to the current location/holding library it is to be rotated to. When a library receives a collection they will need to check in the items to complete the transfer.
You can transfer a collection in one of two ways:
  • From the main Rotating Collections page, click on Transfer next to the title of the collection you wish to transfer; choose the library you wish to transfer the collection to and click "Transfer collection".
  • Or, from the "add or remove items" page for a collection, you can click the Transfer button, choose the library you wish to transfer the collection to and click "Transfer Collection".

Importante

In order to complete the transfer process, the library receiving the rotating collection should check in all items from the collection as they receive them. This will clear the transfer so that the items are no longer shown as being "in transit".
If an item in a rotating collection is checked in at a library other than the one it is supposed to be transferred to, a notification will appear notifying library staff that the item is part of a rotating collection, also letting them know where the item needs to be sent.

3.2. Catálogo

3.2.1. Modificação de itens em lote

  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Batch item modification
Esta ferramenta irá permitir que você modifique um lote de registros de exemplares do Koha.
From the tool you can choose to upload a file of barcodes or item ids, or you can scan items one by one into the box below the upload tool. You can also decide the items edited should be populated with the default values you have defined in your default framework.
Once you have your file uploaded or the barcodes listed you can click 'Continue.'
Será apresentado um resumo de itens que você deseja modificar. Você poderá deselecionar os itens que não deseja modificar antes de efetuar as alterações no formulário a seguir. Você pode também ocultar colunas que não deseja visualizar para prevenir selecionar na esquerda para a direta para ver o formulário completo.

Nota

To uncheck all items thar are currently checked out you can click the 'Clear on loan' link at the top of the form.
Usando o formulário de edição você poderá escolher quais campos você fará a edição. Através da marcação nas caixas de escolha a direita de cada campo você pode limpar o valor em cada registro que estiver modificando.
Quando você tiver feito todas as alterações você pode apresentá-las com os resultados de busca.

Nota

You can also edit items on one bib record in a batch by going to the bib record and clicking Edit > Edit items in batch

3.2.2. Exclusão de itens em lote

  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Batch item deletion
Esta ferramenta permitirá que você exclua um lote de registros de exemplares do Koha.
A partir da ferramenta pode escolher carregar um arquivo com código de barras ou IDs dos documentos, ou então pode ler os itens um a um, na caixa debaixo da ferramenta de carregamento.
Uma vez que subiu um arquivo ou códigos de barras escaneados clique 'Continuar'.
You will be presented with a confirmation screen. From here you can uncheck the items you don't want to delete and decide if Koha should delete the bib record if the last item is being deleted before clicking 'Delete selected items.' If you'd like you can delete the bibliogrphic record if you're deleting the last item by clicking the checkbox next to 'Delete records if no items remain'.
Se seu arquivo (ou lista de códigos de barra escaneados) tiver mais do que 1000 códigos de barras, o Koha não conseguirá te apresentar uma lista dos itens. Você ainda conseguirá excluí-los, mas não será possível escolher quais itens especificamente deletar ou deletar o registro bibliográfico do item.
Se os itens estiverem emprestados será apresentado um erro após clicar em 'Excluir itens selecionados' e os itens não serão excluidos.
Se os itens pode ser excluídos, os mesmos serão excluídos e será presenteado com a confirma da operação.

3.2.3. Export Data (MARC & Authorities)

  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Export Data
O Koha traz uma ferramenta que permite exportar em massa os registro bibliográficos e/ou empréstimos. Pode ser usada para enviar os seus registros para outras bibliotecas, organizações ou serviços, ou apenas para cópias de segurança.

3.2.3.1. Exportar registros bibliográficos

É necessário selecionar os dados que está exportando no topo da tela. Se você está exportando registros bibliográficos com ou sem reservas você precisa clicar na aba 'Exportar registros bibliográficos'.
  • Fill in the form in order to limit your export to a specific range (all fields are optional)
    • Choose to limit your export by any one or more of the following options
      • Limitar a um intervalo de números de registro
      • Limitar a um tipo de documento
        • Importante

          This limit will use the type you have defined in the item-level_itypes preference. If you have the item-level_itypes preference set to 'specific item' and you have no items attached to a bib record it will not be exported. To get all bib records of a specific type you will need your item-level_itypes preference set to 'biblio record'.
      • Limitar a uma biblioteca
      • Limitar a um conjunto de cotas
      • Limitar a um intervalo de data de aquisição
    • Next choose what to skip when exporting
      • Por padrão todos os exemplares serão exportados excepto se assinalar a caixa 'Não exportar os exemplares'
      • Para limitar a exportação somente para itens da biblioteca que você está autenticado (se você deixar o campo 'Biblioteca' definido para 'todas ') ou para a biblioteca que você selecionou marque a opção 'Remover itens não-local'
      • Pode também escolher quais os campo que não deseja exportar. Pode ser útil que está a partilhar dados, removendo todos os dados locais antes de enviar os dados para outras bibliotecas
    • Finally choose the file type and file name
      • Escolher para exportar os dados em MARC ou MARCXML
      • Selecionar o nome para guardar o arquivo
    • Clicar em 'Exportar registros bibliográficos'

3.2.3.2. Exportar registros de autoridade

Escolha no topo da tela quais dados você irá exportar. Se você quiser exportar os registros de autoridade, você precisa clicar na aba 'Exportar registros de autoridade'.
  • Preencha o formulário para limitar a exportação a um limite específico ou tipo de registro de autoridade (todos os campos são opcionais)
  • Next choose fields that you would like to exclude from the export separated by a space (no commas)
    • Se você quer excluir todos os subcampos do 200 por exemplo, digite 200
    • Se você quer excluir um subcampo específico digite no campo o valor: 100a irá excluir somente o subcampo a do 100
  • Finally choose the file type and file name
    • Escolher para exportar os dados em MARC ou MARCXML
    • Selecionar o nome para guardar o arquivo
  • Clicar em 'Exportar registros de autoridade'

3.2.4. Inventário

  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Inventory/Stocktaking
A ferramenta de inventário do Koha pode ser usada de duas forma. A primeira é mostrado um lista de prateleiras onde os itens podem ser marcados ou carregando arquivos de texto obtidos de um scanner portátil.
Se não possui a capacidade para usar o scanner de código de barras na sua biblioteca, a primeira opção disponível é gerar uma lista de prateleira baseadas no critério que desejar.
Escolha qual biblioteca, localização, faixa de cota, o estado de item e quando o item foi visto pela última vez para gerar uma lista de prateleira, que você pode imprimir para uso durante a caminhada em torno da biblioteca verificando a sua coleção
Alternativamente, você pode exportar a lista para um arquivo CSV. Basta marcar a caixa ao lado de "Exportar para csv 'para gerar esse arquivo.
Assim que tiver encontrado os itens na prateleira, pode retornar à lista e selecionar os itens que encontrar para que o sistema atualize a data de último acesso para hoje.
Se você tiver um scanner portátil (ou um portátil e um scanner USB), você pode percorrer a biblioteca com o scanner na mão e digitalização de códigos de barras como você se deparar com eles. Uma vez terminado, você pode então fazer o upload do arquivo de texto gerado pelo scanner para Koha
Choose the text file and the date you want to mark all items as seen and then scroll to the very bottom and click 'Submit.'

3.2.5. Gerador de etiquetas

  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Label Creator
O módulo das Etiquetas permite usar esquemas e modelos por si desenhados para imprimir uma variedade ilimitada de etiquetas incluindo código de barras. Aqui estão algumas das funcionalidades deste módulo:
  • Personalizar esquemas das etiquetas
  • Design de rótulos de modelos personalizados para etiquetas impressas
  • Construir e gerir lotes de etiquetas
  • Exportação de lotes únicos ou múltiplos
  • Exportar etiquetas únicas ou múltiplas a partir de um lote
  • Exportação de dados da etiqueta em um dos três formatos:
    • PDF - Etiquetas legíveis por qualquer leitor de PDF padrão, tornando imprimíveis numa impressora
    • CSV - Exportar dados da etiqueta após escolha do esquema aplicado permitindo assim às etiquetas serem importadas noutras aplicações
    • XML - Incluido como alternativa de formato exportado
At the top of each screen within the Label Creator, you will see a toolbar allowing quick access to relevant functions. The menu to the left of each screen also allows easy access to the different sections of the Label Creator. The bread crumb trail near the top of each screen will give specific indication as to where you are within the Label Creator module and allow quick navigation to previously traversed sections. And finally, you can find more detailed information on each section of the Label Creator by clicking the online help link at the upper left-hand corner of every page.

3.2.5.1. Templates

  • Get there: More > Tools > Label Creator > Templates
Um template é baseado na etiqueta/stock que você utiliza. Pode ser Avery 5160 para etiquetas de endereço, Gaylord 47-284 para etiquetas de lombada ou Avery 28371 para carteirinhas, por exemplo. Estas etiquetas em geral são acompanhadas de informações para configuração no Koha (largura, altura, etc.). Esta informação em geral está na embalagem, mas também pode ser obtida no site do fabricante.
3.2.5.1.1. Adicionar Template
To add a new template, you want to click on the 'New template' button at the top of the Label Creator.
Usando o formulário que aparece pode definir o modelo para a sua folha de etiquetas ou cartões.
  • ID do Modelo vai ser automaticamente gerado após guardar o modelo, sendo um simples identificar único no sistema
  • Código de modelo deve ser algo que ajude na identificação do modelo na lista.
  • Pode usar Descrição do Modelo para adicionar informação adicionar sobre o modelo
  • O menu Unidades é usado para definir a escala de medição que vai ser usada no modelo. Deve ser provavelmente a mesma unidade de medição usada na descrição do modelo dado pelo fornecedor.
  • The measurements, number of columns and number of rows can be found on the vendor product packaging or website.
    • Importante

      If you do not supply a left text margin in the template, a 3/16" (13.5 point) left text margin will apply by default.
  • A profile is a set of "adjustments" applied to a given template just prior to printing which compensates for anomalies unique and peculiar to a given printer (to which the profile is assigned).
    • Antes de selecionar um perfil, tente imprimir algumas etiquetas de exemplo. Assim você pode facilmente definir um perfil adequado para sua impressora/template.
    • After finding any anomalies in the printed document, create a profile and assign it to the template.
Depois de salvar, os modelos aparecerem na página de gestão dos modelos.

3.2.5.2. Perfis

  • Get there: More > Tools > Label Creator > Profiles
A profile is a set of "adjustments" applied to a given template just prior to printing which compensates for anomalies unique and peculiar to a given printer (to which the profile is assigned). This means if you set a template up and then print a sample set of data and find that the items are not all aligned the same on each label, you need to set up a profile for each printer to make up for the differences in printing styles, such as the shifting of text to the left, right, top or bottom.
Se suas etiquetas estiverem sendo impressas como você deseja, não é necessário um perfil.
3.2.5.2.1. Adicionar um perfil
To add a new profile, you want to click on the 'New profile' button at the top of the Label Creator tool.
Usando o formulário que aparece pode criar um perfil para corrigir qualquer problema com seu modelo.
  • O Nome da impressora e o tipo de papel não têm necessariamente de ter a mesma impressora, apenas são referências para lembrar qual a impressora do perfil. Pode usar o número de modelo de impressora no nome ou chamar-lhe 'a impressora local'
  • Template will be filled in once you have chosen which template to apply the profile to on the template edit form
  • O menu Unidades é usado para definir a escala de medição que vai ser usada no perfil.
  • Offset describes what happens when the entire image is off center either vertically or horizontally and creep describes a condition where the distance between the labels changes across the page or up and down the page
    • Para estes valores, os números negativos movem o erro acima e à esquerda e os números positivos movem o erro abaixo e à direita
    • Exemplo: o texto está a 0,55 mm da margem esquerda da primeira etiqueta, 0,57mm da margem esquerda da segunda etiqueta e 0,61mm da margem esquerda da terceira etiqueta. Isto significa que o deslocamento horizantal deve ser ajustado para 0,6mm.
Depois de salvar, os perfis aparecerem na página de gestão dos perfis.
Após guardar o seu novo perfil, pode voltar a lista de modelos e editar o modelo para que use o perfil criado.

3.2.5.3. Layouts

  • Get there: More > Tools > Label Creator > Layouts
Um layout é usado para definir quais campos aparecerão em suas etiquetas.
3.2.5.3.1. Adicionar um layout
To add a new layout, you want to click on the 'New layout' button at the top of the Label Creator tool.
Usando o formulário que aparece pode criar um perfil para corrigir qualquer problema com seu modelo.
  • The name of your layout can be anything you'd like to help you identify it later.
  • If this is a barcode label you'll want to choose the encoding (Code 39 is the most common)
  • The layout type can be any combination of bibliographic information and/or barcode. For example a spine label would just be Biblio whereas a label for your circulation staff to use to checkout the book would probably be Biblio/Barcode.
  • The Bibliographic Data to Print includes any of the data fields that may be mapped to your MARC frameworks. You can choose from the preset list of fields or you can click on 'List Fields' and enter your own data. In 'List Fields', you can specify MARC subfields as a 4-character tag-subfield string: (ie. 254a for the title field), You can also enclose a whitespace-separated list of fields to concatenate on one line in double quotes. (ie. "099a 099b" or "itemcallnumber barcode"). The fields available are from the database tables list below. Finally you could add in static text strings in single-quote (ie. 'Some static text here.')
    • You can use the schema viewer (http://schema.koha-community.org) with the following tables to find field names to use:
      • Currently all fields in the following tables are used: items, biblioitems, biblio, branches
  • Choose if the label maker should print out the guidelines around each label
  • Choose if you'd like Koha to try to split your call numbers (usually used on Spine Labels)
  • Finally choose your text settings such as alignment, font type and size.
Depois de salvar, os esquemas aparecerem na página de gestão dos esquemas.

3.2.5.4. Lotes

  • Get there: More > Tools > Label Creator > Batches
Lotes são compostos pelos códigos de barras que você deseja imprimir. Utilizando esta ferramenta, você pode buscar pelos exemplares para os quais você deseja imprimir etiquetas.
3.2.5.4.1. Adicionar um Lote
Batches can be created in one of two ways. The first is to click the 'Create Label Batch' link on the 'Staged MARC Management' page:
A outra é escolher por criar um novo lote a partir da ferramenta de criação de etiquetas
You will be brought to an empty batch with an 'Add item(s)' button at the top of the page and a box to scan barcodes in to.
You can either scan barcodes in to the box provided and click the 'Add item(s)' button or you can click the 'Add item(s)' button with the barcodes box empty. Clicking 'Add item(s)' with nothing in the barcodes box will open a search window for you to find the items you want to add to the batch.
Nos resultados da busca, clique na caixa de seleção ao lado dos exemplares que você deseja adicionar ao lote e clique em 'Adicionar selecionados'. Você também pode adicionar os exemplares um a um clicando no link 'Adicionar' ao lado de cada exemplar.
Quando você adicionar todos os exemplares, clique em 'OK'. A página seguinte exibirá os exemplares que você selecionou.
Para imprimir suas etiquetas, clique em 'Exportar Lote'. Para imprimir apenas algumas etiquetas, clique em 'Exportar Exemplar'. De todo modo, você será levado a uma tela de confirmação onde é possível escolher o modelo da etiqueta.
Você terá três opções de download: PDF, Excel e CSV.
Depois de salvar seu arquivop, simplesmente imprima nas etiques em branco que você tem na biblioteca.

3.2.6. Criar Etiqueta Rápida

  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Quick Spine Label Creator

Nota

This tool does not use the label layouts or templates, it simply prints a spine label in the first spot on the label sheet.
  • Define the fields you want to print on the spine label in the SpineLabelFormat system preference
  • Format your label printing by editing spinelabel.css found in koha-tmpl/intranet-tmpl/prog/en/css/
Para usar essa ferramenta basta o código de barras para o livro que você gostaria de imprimir a etiqueta de lombada.

3.2.7. Templates MARC de transformação

Modificação de Templates MARC fornece ao usuário do Koha a capacidade de alterar registros MARC automaticamente enquanto carrega registros para importação.
This tool is useful for altering MARC records from various venders/sources work with your MARC framework. The system essentially allows one to create a basic script using actions to Copy, Move, Add, Update and Delete fields.
Comece adicionando um novo template (um template pode ser composto por uma ou mais ações). Insira um nome para ele e clique em 'Criar template'.
Em seguida você poderá incluir ações no template preenchendo a caixa Ação. Por exemplo, caso você esteja carregando uma lista de arquivos do seu fornecedor de e-books, você pode desejar adicionar o tipo de material EBOOK no campo 942 $c.
  • Selecione 'Adicionar/Atualizar'
  • Insira o campo 952 e o subcampo c
  • Insira o valor de 'EBOOK' (ou o código para ebook que você tenha definido)
  • Insira uma descrição, assim você poderá identificar melhor esta ação posteriormente
  • Click 'Nova categoria'
Each action can also have an optional condition to check the value or existance of another field. For example you might want to add the call number to the item record if it's not already there.
  • Selecione 'Copiar'
  • Decide if you want to copy the first occurance or all occurances of the field
  • Insira o campo 090 (ou qualquer outro campo de número de chamada) e o subcampo a para copiá-lo
  • Insira o campo 952 e o subcampo o para copiá-lo para
  • Selecione 'se'
  • Insira o campo 952 e o subcampo o
  • Selecione "não existente"
  • Insira uma descrição, assim você poderá identificar melhor esta ação posteriormente
  • Click 'Nova categoria'
O Copiar & Mover também suporta expressões regulares, as quais podem ser usadas para modificar automaticamente os valores de um campo durante o copiar/mover. Um exemplo seria retirar o caracter '$' do campo 020$c.
  • Selecione 'Copiar'
  • Decide if you want to copy the first occurance or all occurances of the field
  • Insira o campo 020 e o subcampo c para copiá-lo para
  • Insira o campo 020 e o subcampo c para copiá-lo para
  • Check the 'RegEx' box and enter your regular expression (in this case s/\$// )
  • Selecione 'se'
  • Insira o campo 020 e o subcampo c
  • Selecione "encontrados"
  • Check the 'RegEx' box and enter your regular expression (in this case m/^\$/ )
  • Insira uma descrição, assim você poderá identificar melhor esta ação posteriormente
  • Click 'Nova categoria'

Nota

O valor para uma atualização pode incluir variáveis que mudam cada vez que o template é usado. Atualmente, o sistema suporta duas variáveis: _BRANCHCODE_ que é substituída pelo código da biblioteca que está utilizando o template; e _CURRENTDATE_, que é substituída pela data atual no formato ISO (AAAA-MM-DD).
You could also use regular expressions to add your library's proxy URL in front of links in your MARC record.
  • Selecione 'Copiar'
  • Decide if you want to copy the first occurance or all occurances of the field
  • Enter the field 856 and subfield u to copy
  • Enter the 856 field and u subfield to copy to
  • Check the 'RegEx' box and enter your regular expression (in this case s/^/PROXY_URL/ )
  • Insira uma descrição, assim você poderá identificar melhor esta ação posteriormente
  • Click 'Nova categoria'
Quando suas ações forem salvas, você poderá vê-las no topo da tela. Ações podem ser movidas para cima ou para baixo utilizando as setas ao lado delas.
Dependendo de suas ações, o pedido pode ser muito importante. Por exemplo, se você quiser excluir um campo antes de copiá-lo para outro campo.
Para adicionar outro template você pode começar do zero ou clicar em 'Duplicar template atual' para criar uma cópia de um template pré-existente e começar a partir dele.
Once your template is saved you will be able to pick it when using the Stage MARC Records for Import tool.

3.2.8. Stage MARC Records for Import

  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Stage MARC records for import
Esta ferramenta pode ser usada para importar tanto registros bibliográficos quanto de autoridades que estejam salvos no formato MARC. Importar registros para o Koha envolve duas etapas. A primeira é a fase de carregamento dos registros para importação.
  • Primeiro encontra o arquivo MARC no seu computador
  • Next you will be presented with options for record matching and item imports
    • Enter 'Comments about this file' to identify your upload when going to the 'Manage Staged MARC Records' tool
    • Indique ao Koha que tipo de arquivo é este (bibliográfico ou de autoridade)
    • Escolha o tipo de codificação dos caracteres
    • Choose if you would like to use a MARC Modification Template to alter the data you're about to import
    • Choose whether or not you want to look for matching records
      • You can set up record matching rules through the administration area
        • When using the ISBN matching rule Koha will find only exact matches. If you find that the ISBN match is not working to your satisfaction you can change the AggressiveMatchOnISBN preference to 'Do' and then run your import again.
    • Em seguida, escolha o que fazer com os registros correspondentes no caso de serem encontrados
    • Por fim, escolha o que fazer com os registros que são únicos
    • Em seguida, você pode escolher importar ou não os dados do exemplar encontrado nos registros MARC (caso o arquivo que você esteja carregando seja um arquivo bibliográfico)
      • From here you can choose to always add items regardless of matching status, add them only if a matching bib was found, add items only if there was no matching bib record, replace items if a matching bib was found (The match will look at the itemnumbers and barcodes to match on for items. Itemnumbers take precendence over barcodes), or Ignore items and not add them.
  • Clicar 'Preparar para importar'
  • Será presenteado com uma confirmação da importação MARC
  • To complete the process continue to the Managed Staged MARC Records Tool

3.2.9. Staged MARC Record Management

  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Staged MARC Record Management
Once you have staged your records for import you can complete the import using this tool.
  • From the list of staged records, click on the file name that you want to finish importing
    • Você vai notar que os registros que já foram importados terão esta informação em 'Status'
  • Um resumo de sua importação aparecerá junto com a opção de mudar as regras de correspondência
  • Below the summary is the option to import the batch of bib records using a specific framework
    • Escolher uma planilha diferente de 'padrão' não é necessário, mas pode ser útil para executar relatórios e ter o nível correto do registro bibliográfico selecionado na importação.
  • Below the framework selection there will be a list of the records that will be imported
    • Rever o sumário antes de completar a importação para ter a certeza que a regra de concordância funcionou e que os regisrtos aparecem como esperado
  • Clicar em 'Importar para o catálogo' para completar a importação
  • Assim que a importação estiver completa, um link para os novos registros aparecerá à direita de cada título que foi importado
  • Você também pode desfazer sua importação clicando no botão 'Desfazer importação para catálogo'
Records imported using this tool remain in the 'reservoir' until they are cleaned. These items will appear when searching the catalog from the Cataloging tool:
Para limpar os itens do 'reservatório':
  • Visite o tela principal da ferramenta Tratamento de Registros MARC
  • Para limpar um lote, clique no botão 'Limpar' à direita
  • You will be presented with a confirmation message
    • Aceite a exclusão, os registros serão retirados do reservatório e status será alterado para 'limpo'

3.2.10. Upload Local Cover Image

  • Get there: More > Tools > Catalog > Upload Local Cover Image
This tool will allow you to upload cover images for the materials in your catalog. To access this tool, staff will need the upload_local_cover_images permission. In order for images to show in the staff client and/or OPAC you will need to set your LocalCoverImages and/or OPACLocalCoverImages preferences to 'Display.' Images can be uploaded in batches or one by one.

Nota

Koha does not have a maximum file size limit for this tool, but Apache may limit the maximum size of uploads (talk to your sys admin).

Nota

When you want to upload multiple images onto a bib record, they will display left to right (then top to bottom, depending on screen real estate) in order of uploading, and the one on the left (the first one uploaded) will be the one used as a thumbnail cover in search results and on the detail page. There is no way to reorder cover images uploaded in this way, so be sure to upload them in the order you'd like them to appear.
Se estiver enviando uma única imagem:
  • Visite a ferramenta e clique no botão 'Navegar' para visualizar a imagem na sua máquina.
  • Clique 'Upload de arquivo'
  • Escolhar 'Arquivo de imagem' na seção 'Tipo de arquivo'
  • Digite o biblionumber para o registro que estiver anexando a imagem. Não é o mesmo número ro código de barras, este é um número gerado pelo Koha.
    • Find the biblionumber by looking at the end of the URL in the address bar when on the detail page
    • or by clicking on the MARC tab on the detail page in the staff client
  • Se você quiser substituir qualquer uma das imagens de capa que você já tiver carregado, clique em 'Substituir capas existentes', na seção 'Opções'
  • Clique 'Processar imagens'
  • Será exibido um sumário do upload e um link para o registro que você adicionou imagem para
Se quiser enviar várias imagens de uma vez, você deve usar um arquivo ZIP com as imagens.
  • Inclua no arquivo ZIP todas as imagens que estiver fazendo o upload
  • Also include a text file (*.TXT) named either datalink.txt or idlink.txt listing the biblionumber followed by the image name for each image one per line
    • ex. 4091,image4091.jpg
  • Procurar em seu computador o arquivo *.zip
  • Clique 'Upload de arquivo'
  • Escolha 'Arquivo Zip' na seção 'Tipo de arquivo'
  • Se você quiser substituir qualquer uma das imagens de capa que você já tiver carregado, clique em 'Substituir capas existentes', na seção 'Opções'
  • Clique 'Processar imagens'
  • Será apresentada com um sumário do upload

Importante

The source image is used to generate a 140 x 200 px thumbnail image and a 600 x 800 px full-size image. The original sized image uploaded will not be stored by Koha
Você será capaz de ver suas imagens de capa no cliente pessoal na página de detalhes sob o separador 'Imagem' na tabela de participações no fundo
No OPAC as imagens de capa aparecerão também nas imagens da aba, assim como próximas ao título e nos resultados de busca.
If you would like to remove a cover image you can click 'Delete image' below the image if you have the upload_local_cover_images permission.

3.3. Additional Tools

3.3.1. Calendário

  • Get there: More > Tools > Additional Tools > Calendar
É possível definir o fecho da biblioteca e os feriados usados no cálculo das datas de devolução. Pode usar o Calendário ativando a respectiva preferência de sistema:
  • Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Circulation > useDaysMode
    • Selecionar o método de cálculo das datas de devolução - incluir ou não os dias que a biblioteca está fechada no cálculo.
  • Get there: More > Administration > Global System Preferences > Circulation > finescalendar
    • Isto irá verificar o calendário de férias antes da cobrança de multa

3.3.1.1. Adicionar Eventos

Before adding events, choose the library you would like to apply the closings to. When adding events you will be asked if you would like to apply the event to one branch or all branches. To add events, simply
  • Clicar na data do calendário que deseja aplicar o fecho da biblioteca
  • In the form that appears above the calendar, enter the closing information (for more info on each option click the question mark [?] to the right of the option)
    • A biblioteca vai ser preenchida automaticamente baseada na biblioteca escolhida na lista no topo da página
    • A informação do dia também vai ser automaticamente preenchida de acordo com a data clicada no calendário
    • Na descrição insira a razão da biblioteca estar fechada
    • Next you can choose if this event is a one time event or if it is repeatable.
      • Se é um feriado de um dia, escolha 'Feriado apenas neste dia'
      • Se este é um fechamento semanal (como um dia de final de semana), então você pode escolher 'Feriado repetido todo mesmo dia da semana'
      • Se é um fechamento de feriado anual, escolha 'Feriado repetido na mesma data anualmente'
      • Se a biblioteca permanecerá fechada durante alguns dias seguidos no ano (como nas férias escolares) escolha 'Feriados repetitivos anualmente em sequência" e coloque uma "Data de término' na parte superior
      • Se a biblioteca permanecerá fechada durante alguns dias seguidos no ano (como nas férias escolares) escolha 'Feriados repetitivos anualmente em sequência" e coloque uma "Data de término' na parte superior
    • Finally decide if this event should be applied to all libraries or just the one you have originally selected
      • If you'd rather enter all the holidays and then copy them all to another branch all at once you can use the copy menu below the calendar
  • Depois de salvar, você verá o evento listado no resumo à direita do calendário

3.3.1.2. Modificar Eventos

Para editar eventos
  • Clicar no evento do calendário que deseja alterar (executar carregando na data do calendário, e não no evento listado no sumário)
  • From this form you can make edits to the holiday or delete the holiday completely.
    • All actions require that you click 'Save' before the change will be made.
  • Clicking on repeatable events will offer slightly different options
    • No formulário abaixo pode verificar que existe uma opção para gerar uma excepção para o feriado repetido. Ao escolher essa opção, permite transformar a data em não fechada mesmo que a biblioteca esteja fechada nessa data.
      • All actions require that you click 'Save' before the change will be made.

3.3.1.3. Ajuda Adicional

Quando adicionar ou editar eventos, pode obter ajuda adicional clicando no sinal mais em azul próximo das várias opções do formulário

3.3.2. CSV Profiles

  • Get there: More > Tools > Additional Tools > CSV Profiles
Perfis CSV são criado para definir como a sua lista ou sacola são exportados.

3.3.2.1. Adicionar Perfis CSV

Para adicionar um perfil CSV
  • Click 'CSV Profiles' from the Tools menu
  • The 'Profile type' determines what type of fields you plan to use (MARC or SQL) to define your profile
    • If tyou choose MARC then you will need to enter MARC fields
    • If tyou choose SQL then you will need to enter SQL database fields
    • O 'Nome de perfil' vai aparecer na lista de exportação quando escolher a opção 'Donwload' na sua sacola ou lista
    • A "Descrição de perfil' é para seu próprio benefício, mas irá também aparecer no OPAC quando usuaŕios baixarem conteúdo, então tenha certeza que está claro para os usuários também
    • O 'Separador CSV' é o caracter usado para separar valores e grupos de valores

      Nota

      O opção mais comum aqui é a virgula porque a maioria das aplicações de tabela abrem arquivos separando por virgulas.
    • The 'Field separator' is the character used to separate duplicate fields
      • Exemplo: Você pode ter mais de um campo 650 e este caractere é que irá aparecer entre cada campo na coluna
    • The 'Subfield separator' is the character used to separate duplicate subfields
      • Exemplo: Você pode ter múltiplos subcampos $a em um campo
    • O campo 'Codificação' permite que você defina a codificação usada para salvar o arquivo
    • Finally format your CSV file using the 'Profile MARC' or 'Profile SQL' field
      • Define which fields or subfields you want to export, separated by pipes. Example : 200|210$a|301 for MARC and biblio.title|biblio.author for SQL
      • Nota

        Dica: Pode também usar os seus próprios cabeçalhos (em vez dos do Koha) usando um prefixo no campo número com um cabeçalho, seguido do sinal igual. Exemplo: Nome pessoal=100|Título=245$a|300
    Quando você digitar em qualquer campo alguma informação em seu perfil, clique em 'Enviar' e te será apresentado uma tela de confirmação que seu perfil foi salvo.

3.3.2.2. Editar Perfis CSV

Quando você tiver criado pelo menos um perfil CSV, uma opção para 'Modificar Perfil CSV' aparecerá abaixo do formulário para Adicionar.
  • Selecionar o perfil que deseja editar e alterar os campos necessários.
  • Depois de enviar suas alterações lhe será apresentado uma mensagem de confirmação no topo da tela
  • Para excluir um perfil, marque a opção 'Apagar perfil selecionado' antes de clicar em 'Enviar consulta'

3.3.2.3. Usando Perfis CSV

Os seus perfis CSV vão aparecer no menu da lista de exportação ou do cesto debaixo de botão de 'Download'

3.3.3. Log Viewer

  • Get there: More > Tools > Additional Tools > Log Viewer
Actions within the Koha system are tracked in log files. Your system preferences can be changed to prevent the logging of different actions. These logs can be viewed using the Log Viewer Tool.
Escolher diferentes combinações do menu fará com quem seja produzido log para este pedido.
Você notará que os nomes reais não aparecem no logo, somente números de identificação. Você precisa usar os números de identificação quando pesquisar no logs também.

3.3.4. Notícias

  • Get there: More > Tools > Additional Tools > News
O módulo notícias do Koha permite que os bibliotecários publiquem notícias no OPAC e na interface administrativa.
Para adicionar notícias tanto no OPAC, Posto de processamento técnico ou um comprovante de empréstimo:
  • Click 'New Entry'
    • Debaixo de 'Mostrar Localização' escolha se deseja colocar as notícias no OPAC ou na interface administrativa.
    • Choose the library this news item will show for
    • Escolher um título para a entrada
    • Usando os campos da data de publicação e expiração pode controlar o tempo que o item aparece
    • 'Aparecer na posição' permite decidir qual a ordem que as notícias aparecem
    • A caixa 'Notícias' permite a utlização de código HTML para formatar suas notícias
  • Após verificar os registros importados, clique em 'Concluir a importação'
  • News in the OPAC will appear above the OpacMainUserBlock
  • Notícias no interface dos técnicos aparece à esquerda do ecrã
  • Notícias na tela de circulação irão aparecer abaixo dos items que forem emprestados

3.3.5. Task Scheduler

  • Get there: More > Tools > Additional Tools > Task Scheduler
A calendarização de tarefas é uma forma de calendarizar relatórios sempre que desejar.
Para agendar uma tarefa, visite a Calendarização de Tarefas e preencha o formulário
  • Hora Atual do Servidor exibe o horário em seu servidor (Agende seus relatórios a serem executados de acordo com este horário - não seu horário local)
  • A hora deve ser inserida como hh:mm (2 dígitos para as horas, 2 dígitos para os minutos)
  • Data deve ser escolhida usando o calendário de pop-up
  • Escolhe da lista os relatório que pretende agendar
  • Escolher se deseja receber o texto ou um link para os resultados
  • No campo de Email insira o email da pessoa para a qual deseja enviar o relatório
Abaixo do agendador de tarefas existe uma lista com os relatórios agendados
Você pode também calendarizar relatórios diretamente da lista de relatórios guardados usando o link respectivo

3.3.5.1. Solução de problemas

Calendarização de tarefas não funciona se o usuário onde o servidor web é executado não tem a permissão para usá-lo. Para descobrir se o usuário tem as permissões necessárias, verifique o arquivo /etc/at.allow para ver quais usuários. Se você não tem esse arquivo, verifique /etc/at.deny. Se o arquivo at.deny estiver em branco, qualquer usuário pode utilizá-lo. Fale com o seu administrador do sistema sobre como adicionar o usuário no lugar certo para fazer funcionar o calendarização de tarefas.

3.3.6. Quote of the Day (QOTD) Editor

  • Get there: More > Tools > Additional Tools > Edit quotes for QOTD feature
This tool will allow you to add and edit quotes to show on the OPAC if you're using the Quote of the Day (QOTD) feature.
To turn this feature on set the QuoteOfTheDay preference to 'Enable and add at least one quote via the Quote of the Day Editor. Once these steps are complete you will see your quotes above the OpacMainUserBlock in the OPAC:

3.3.6.1. Add a Quote

To add a quote:
  • Clique em 'Adicionar citação' na barra de ferramentas e uma citação em branco será adicionada no final da lista atual de citações.
    • Importante

      Both the 'Source' and the 'Text' fields must be filled in in order to save the new quote.
  • When finished filling in both fields, press the <Enter> key on your keyboard to save the new quote.
  • The list will update and the new quote should now be visible in the list.

Nota

You may cancel the addition of a new quote any time prior to saving it simply by pressing the <Esc> key on your keyboard.

3.3.6.2. Edit/Delete a Quote

Uma vez que as citações subirem para a tabela de edição, você pode editar a fonte e o texto da citação.
  • Edite os campos 'Fonte' ou 'Texto' clicando no campo desejado.
  • When you are finished editing a field, press the <Enter> key on your keyboard to save the changes.
A lista será atualizada, as edições salvas, e visíveis.
If you'd like you can also delete quote(s).
  • Selecione citação(ões) que você deseja excluir clicando no id da citação correspondente.
  • Once quote selection is finished, simply click the 'Delete quote(s)' button.
  • Será mostrada uma mensagem de confirmação da exclusão.
  • Após confirmar a exclusão, a lista será atualizada e a citação não irá mais ser exibida.

3.3.6.3. Importar citações

If you'd like you can import a batch of quotes as a CSV file. Your file must contain two columns in the form: "source","text" with no header row.

Nota

Será mostrada uma mensagem de confirmação para o carregamento de arquivos maiores que 512KB.
  • To start the import process click the 'Import quotes' button at the top of the screen
  • Once on the import quotes screen you can browse your computer for the file you would like to import
  • Após selecionar o arquivo CSV, clique no botão 'Abrir' e o arquivo será enviado para uma tabela temporária de edição.
  • From the listing you can edit either the 'Source' or 'Text' fields by clicking on the desired field. When you are finished editing a field, press the <Enter> key on your keyboard to save the changes.
  • You can also delete quotes from this listing before completing the import.
    • Selecione citação(ões) que você deseja excluir clicando no id da citação correspondente.
    • Quando terminar a seleção, clique na chave 'Excluir citações'.
    • Será mostrada uma mensagem de confirmação da exclusão.
    • Após confirmar a exclusão, a lista será atualizada e a citação não irá mais ser exibida.
  • Once you are satisfied with the quotes, click the 'Save quotes' button in the toolbar at the top and the quotes will be saved.

Capítulo 4. Usuários

Before importing and/or adding patrons be sure to set up your patron categories.

4.1. Add a new patron

Usuários são adicionados no módulo 'Usuários'.
  • Get there: Patrons
Once there you can add a new patron.
  • Click 'New patron'
  • The fields that appear on the patron add form can be controlled by editing the BorrowerUnwantedField system preference.
  • First enter the identifying information regarding your patron
    • Required fields are defined in the BorrowerMandatoryField system preference
    • Salutation is populated by the BorrowersTitles system preference
    • Nota

      If you'd like to prevent full names from printing on slips and you're not using the Initials or Other name fields for anything else, you can use them for shortened versions of the name to then be printed on the slip.
      For example:
      Firstname: Nicole C.
      Surname: Engard
      Initials: NCE
      Then on the slip you can have it print the <<borrowers.initials>> instead of the full name (NCE).
      Or you could do something like this:
      Firstname: Nicole
      Surname: Engard
      Initials: E
      Then on the slip you can have it print the <<borrowers.initials>>, <<borrowers.firstname>> instead of the full name (E, Nicole).
  • Next enter the contact information
    • Para informação de contato, note que o telefone e o e-mail principal são os únicos que aparecem nos avisos e recibos impressos durante a circulação. O e-mail principal também é o que aparece nos avisos de atrasos e outras mensagens.
  • If this patron is a child, you will be asked to attach the child patron to an adult patron
    • Clique 'Alterar para usuário' para pesquisar em seu sistema um usuário existente
    • Se o Responsável não estiver no sistema, você pode digitar o nome nos campos disponíveis
    • The relationships are set using the borrowerRelationship system preference
  • If this patron is a professional, you will be asked to attach the patron to an organizational patron
    • Clique 'Alterar para usuário para pesquisar em seu sistema um usuário existente
  • Each patron can have an alternate contact
    • Um contato adicional pode ser um dos pais ou responsável. Em casos acadêmicos, pode ser utilizado para armazenar o endereço domicilar dos usuários (nos casos de estudantes que vivem na universidade).
  • The library management section includes values that are used within the library
    • The card number field is automatically calculated if you have the autoMemberNum system preference set that way
      • Nota

        Para cada novo sistema instalado esta prefereência inicia em 1 e incrementa 1 a cada vez. Para conseguir que comece a partir de seus códigos de barras, digite o último código de barras e salve o usuário. Depois, o sistema irá incrementar automaticamente mais 1.
    • Se você acidentalmente escolher uma categoria errada de usuário no início, você pode consertar isso aqui
    • Ordem 1 e 2 são usadas para propósitos estatísticos em sua biblioteca
  • Next, the Library Setup section includes additional library settings
    • A data de inscrição será preenchida automaticamente com a data de hoje
    • If your patron cards expire (based on your patron category settings) the Expiry date will automatically be calculated
    • A Nota do OPAC é uma nota para o usuário - ela aparecerá no registro do usuário no OPAC
    • O Aviso de Circulação destina exclusivamente a sua biblioteca e aparecerá quando o funcionário realizar um empréstimo para um usuário
    • O Login e Senha do OPAC são utilizados pelo usuário para acessar sua conta no OPAC. Eles também são utilizados por funcionários para lhes dar acesso à interface administrativa
      • Staff will only be able to use this log in info to log in to the staff client if they have the necessary permissions.
  • If you have set additional patron attributes up, these will appear next
  • Finally, if you have EnhancedMessagingPreferences set to 'allow,' you can choose the messaging preferences for this patron.
    • These notices are:
      • Advanced notice : A notice in advance of the patron's items being due (The patron can choose the number of days in advance)
      • Item checkout : A notice that lists all the of the items the patron has just checked out and/or renewed, this is an electronic form of the checkout receipt
      • Hold filled : A notice when you have confirmed the hold is waiting for the patron
      • Item due : A notice on the day and item is due back at the library
      • Item check-in : A notice that lists all the of the items the patron has just checked in
    • Patrons can choose to receive their notices as a digest by checking the 'Digest only?' box along with the delivery method. A digest is a combination of all the messages of that type (so all items due in 3 days in one email) in to one email instead of multiple emails for each alert.
    • Importante

      These preferences will override any you set via the patron categories
    • Importante

      These preference can be altered by the patron via the OPAC
  • Quando terminar, clique em 'Salvar'
Se o sistema suspeitar que o usuário pode estar duplicado, ele irá alertá-lo.

Nota

A duplicate patron is detected if first and last names match and there is no date of birth populated or if first name, last name and date of birth fields are all populated. If two patrons have matching names, but one has a date of birth and the other does not they will not match as duplicates.
If you have set a minimum or upper age limit on the patron category and are requiring that the birth date be filled in, Koha will warn you if the patron you're adding is too old or young for the patron category you have selected:

4.2. Adicionar um Funcionário

All staff members must be entered into Koha as patrons of the 'Staff' type. Follow the steps in Add a Patron to add a staff member. To give the staff member permissions to access the staff client, follow the steps in Patron Permissions

Importante

Lembre-se de guardar seu nome de usuário e senha pois ele será utilizado para entrar na interface de usuário.

4.3. Add a Statistical Patron

One way to track use of in house items is to "check out" the materials to a statistical patron. The "check out" process doesn's check the book out, but instead tracks an in house use of the item. To use this method for tracking in house use you first will need a patron category set up for your Statistical patron.
Next, you will need to create a new patron of the statistical type
Next, follow the steps put forth in the 'Add a new Patron' section of this manual. Since this patron is not a real person, simply fill in the required fields, the correct library and nothing else.
To learn about other methods of tracking in house use visit the Tracking inhouse use section of this manual.

4.4. Duplicar um usuário

Algumas vezes, quando você está adicionando os membros de uma nova família ao seu sistema você pode não querer digitar as mesmas informações de contato várias vezes. O Koha permite que você duplique o registro de usuário e altere apenas os campos necessários.
  • Abra o usuário que você deseja utilizar como base (o usuário a partid do qual você pretende duplicar as informações)
  • Clique em 'Duplicar' no início do seu registro
  • All of the fields with the exception of first name, card number, username and password have been duplicated. Fill in the missing pieces and click 'Save'
    • Nota

      Clicking in a field that is already populated with data will clear that field of all information (making it easier for you to type in something different)
  • Você será direcionado ao seu novo usuário

4.5. Add Patron Images

If you would like you can add patron images to help identify patrons. To enable this feature you must first set the patronimages preference to 'Allow'.
If the preference is set to 'Allow' you will see a placeholder image under the patron's name and box to upload a patron image below the basic contact information.
In the 'Upload Patron Image' box click 'Browse' to find the image on your computer and 'Upload' to load the image on to the patron record.

Importante

There is a limit of 100K on the size of the picture uploaded and it is recommended that the image be 200x300 pixels, but smaller images will work as well.

4.6. Editando Usuários

Usuários no Koha podem ser editados utilizando um dos vários botões disponíveis.
  • Para editar o registro de usuário por inteiro, clique no botão 'Editar' na parte superior do registro de usuário.
  • As senhas de usuários não são recuperáveis. Os asteriscos exibidos ao lado do campo de senha na tela de cadastro do usuário estarão sempre lá, mesmo que uma senha não tenha sido definida. Caso um usuário tenha esquecido sua senha, a única opção é resetar sua senha. Para mudar a senha do usuário, clique no botão 'Alterar senha'
    • Koha não pode exibir senhas existentes. Deixe em branco para manter a senha sem alterações.
    • Este formulário pode gerar automaticamente uma senha aleatória, se você clicar no link "Clique para preencher com uma sugestão gerada aleatoriamente. Senhas serão exibidos como texto."
  • Para editar uma sessão específica no registro de usuário (por exemplo informações de uso da biblioteca) clique no link 'Editar'
  • A patron image can be added by browsing for the image on your machine from the 'Manage Patron Image' section
    • This form will not appear if you have the patronimages system preference to not allow patron images
    • To add patron images in bulk, use the Upload Patron Images Tool
  • Patrons can also be blocked from checking items out by setting Patron Flags
    • Se você deseja que os funcionários confirmem o endereço dos usuários no momento dos empréstimos, você pode clicar em 'Não possui endereço'
    • Se o usuário informar que perdeu sua carteirinha, você pode defini-la como 'Perdida' para evitar que outra pessoa utilize a carteirinha para empréstimos
    • If you would like to bar a patron from the library you can add a manual restriction
    • Se você entrar numa data e/ou nota relacionada à restrição, você também a verá na mensagem restrita
  • Children patrons do not become adults automatically in Koha unless you have Juvenile to Adult cron job running. To upgrade a child patron to and adult patron category manually go to the 'More' menu and choose 'Update Child to Adult Patron'
    • Em seguida, será apresentado com uma janela pop-up pedindo que uma de suas categorias pais adultos esta criança deve ser atualizado para

4.7. Managing Patron Self Edits

If you are allowing patrons to edit their accounts via the OPAC with the OPACPatronDetails preference then you will need to approve all changes via the staff client before they're applied. If there are patron edits awaiting action they will appear on the staff client dashboard below the modules list (along with other items awaiting action).
Quando clicar em 'Usuários solicitando alterações' você será levado a uma lista de usuários que solicitaram alterações.
A partir daí, você pode 'Aprovar' e aplicar as alterações ao registro do usuário, 'Excluir' e remover as alterações ou 'Ignorar' e manter as alterações pendentes para posterior revisão.

4.8. Patron Permissions

As Permissões de Usuário são utilizadas para definir os direitos dos membros na interface administrativa.

Importante

In order for a staff member to log into the staff interface they must have (at the very least) 'catalogue' permissions which allow them to view the staff interface.

4.8.1. Configurando Permissões de Usuários

To set patron permissions, you must first have a patron of the 'Staff' type open
  • No registro de usuário, clique em Mais e escolha Alterar permissões para alterar as permissões do usuário
  • Será apresentado uma lista das preferẽncias, cada uma pode ser expandida clicando no sinal + (mais) a esquerda do título da seção.

4.8.2. Permissões de Usuário Definidas

  • superlibrarian
    • Access to all librarian functions
      • Nota

        With this selected there is no need to choose any other permissions
  • circulate
    • Verificar itens entregues e emprestados
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)
  • catálogo
    • Required for staff login. Staff access, allows viewing the catalogue in staff client
      • Importante

        Must be given to all staff members to allow them to login to the staff client
  • parameters
    • Manage Koha system systems (Administration panel)
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)
  • borrowers
    • Adicionar ou modificar usuários
  • permissions
    • Alterar permissões de usuário
  • reserveforothers
    • Fazer e alterar reservas de usuários
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)
  • borrow
    • Emprestar livros
  • editcatalogue
    • Edit Catalog (Modify bibliographic/hodings data)
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)
  • updatecharges
    • Gerenciar taxas e multas dos usuários
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)
  • acquisition
    • Gerenciamento da sugestão/aquisição
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)
  • management
    • Set library management paraments (deprecated)
      • Importante

        This permission level no longer controls anything.
  • tools
    • Utilize todas as ferramentas
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)
  • editauthorities
    • Editar autoridades
  • serials
    • Gerenciar assinaturas de periódicos
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)
  • reports
    • Acesso ao módulo de relatórios
    • Relatórios obtidos na página de Circulação não são controlados por esta permissão
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)
  • staffaccess
    • Todos os funcionários podem modificar as permissões de outro funcionario
    • Importante

      Requires the borrowers permission above
  • plugins
    • Koha plugins
    • This section can be expanded (Learn more)

4.8.2.1. Permissões granulares na Circulação

Se o funcionário tiver permissão de 'circulação' ele poderá realizar todas estas ações. Se você quiser utilizar um controle mais específico, utilize uma das opções a seguir:
  • circulate_remaining_permissions
    • Permissões de circulação restantes
    • All circulation rights except those covered by permissions listed below
  • force_checkout
    • Force checkout if a limitation exists
    • With this permission a librarian will be allowed to override a check out restriction in the following cases:
      • age restriction
      • the item is issued to another patron
      • the item is not for loan
      • the patron has overdue items
      • the item is lost
      • the item is a high demand item
      • the item is on hold
  • manage_restrictions
    • Manage restrictions for accounts
    • Grants permission to the staff member to lift a restriction that might be on the patron's record
  • overdues_report
    • Executar relatório de exemplares em atraso
    • A permissão de gerar relatórios de atraso encontrados em Circulação
  • override_renewals
    • Forçar renovação de itens bloqueados
    • Requer que um funcionário também tenha circulate_remaining_permissions

4.8.2.2. Permissões de parâmetros granulares

Se o funcionário tiver permissão de 'parâmetros' ele poderá realizar todas estas ações. Se você quiser utilizar um controle mais específico, utilize uma das opções a seguir:
  • manage_circ_rules
  • parameters_remaining_permissions
    • Permissões de parâmetros do sistema restantes
    • A habilidade de acessar todas as áreas de Administração (exceto Circulação e Regras para Multas)

4.8.2.3. Permissões granulares na Reserva

Se o funcionário tiver permissão de 'reservar para outros' ele poderá realizar todas estas ações. Se você quiser utilizar um controle mais específico, utilize uma das opções a seguir:
  • modify_holds_priority
    • Alterar prioridade de reservas
    • Permitir que funcionários alterem as prioridades de reserva (movendo os usuários para cima e para baixo na fila)
  • place_holds
    • Reservar para os usuários

4.8.2.4. Permissões granulares na Catalogação

Se o funcionário tiver permissão de 'editar catálogo' ele poderá realizar todas estas ações. Se você quiser utilizar um controle mais específico, utilize uma das opções a seguir:
  • edit_catalogue
    • Editar catálogo (Alterar dados bibliográficos/reservas)
    • Ability to access all cataloging functions via the Cataloging page
  • edit_items
  • fast_cataloging

4.8.2.5. Granular Fines and Charges Permissions

If a staff member has 'updatecharges' permission they have the ability to perform all of these actions. If you would like to control fines and charges permissions on a more granular level choose from these options:
  • remaining_permissions
    • Remaining permissions for managing fines and fees other than the ability to write off charges
  • Cancelar
    • Write off fines and fees

4.8.2.6. Permissões granulares de Aquisições

Se o funcionário tiver permissão de 'aquisição' ele poderá realizar todas estas ações. Se você quiser utilizar um controle mais específico, utilize uma das opções a seguir:
  • budget_add_del
    • Adicionar e excluir orçamentos (não modificar)
  • budget_manage
    • Gerenciar orçamentos
  • budget_manage_all
    • Gerenciar todos os orçamentos
    budget_modify
    • Alterar orçamento (não cria linhas, mas permite modificar as existentes)
  • contracts_manage
    • Gerenciar contratos
  • group_manage
    • Gerenciar pedidos e grupos de pedidos
  • order_manage
    • Gerenciar pedidos
  • order_manage_all
    • Gerenciar pedidos e grupos de pedidos, independente de suas restrições
  • order_receive
    • Gerenciar pedidos
  • period_manage
    • Gerenciar períodos
  • planning_manage
    • Gerenciar planejamento orçamentário
  • vendors_manage
    • Gerenciar fornecedores

4.8.2.7. Permissões granulares em Periódicos

Se o funcionário tiver permissão de 'periódicos' ele poderá realizar todas estas ações. Se você quiser utilizar um controle mais específico, utilize uma das opções a seguir:
  • check_expiration
  • claim_serials
  • create_subscription
  • delete_subscription
    • Excluir uma assinatura existente
  • edit_subscription
    • Editar uma assinatura existente
    • Esta permissão não inclui a capacidade de excluir ou criar uma assinatura
  • receive_serials
    • Receber periódico
    • Receber periódicos nas assinaturas existentes
  • renew_subscription
    • Renovar uma assinatura
  • routing
  • superserials

4.8.2.8. Permissões granulares em Ferramentas

Se o funcionário tiver permissão de 'ferramentas' ele poderá realizar todas estas ações. Se você quiser utilizar um controle mais específico, utilize uma das opções a seguir:
  • batch_upload_patron_images
    • Faz o upload de imagens de usuários em lote ou um de cada vez
    • Access to the Image Upload Tool
  • delete_anonymize_patrons
    • Excluir antigos usuários e anonimizar o histórico de circulação/leitura (exclui o histórico de leituras do usuário)
    • Access to the Anonymize Patron Tool
  • edit_calendar
  • edit_news
    • Redação de mensagens para OPAC e Técnicos
    • Access to the News Tool
  • edit_notice_status_triggers
  • edit_notices
  • export_catalog
    • Exportar registros bibliográficos, de exemplares e de autoridades
    • Access to the Export Data Tool
  • import_patrons
  • inventory
  • items_batchdel
  • items_batchmod
  • label_creator
  • manage_csv_profiles
  • manage_staged_marc
  • moderate_comments
  • moderate_tags
    • Moderar tags de usuários
    • Access to the Tags Tool
  • schedule_tasks
  • stage_marc_import
  • upload_local_cover_images
    • Carregar capas (local)
    • Access to the Upload Local Cover Image Tool as well as permission to add and delete local cover images from the bib detail page
  • view_system_logs

4.8.2.9. Permissões granulares nos Relatórios

Se o funcionário tiver permissão de 'relatórios' ele poderá realizar todas estas ações. Se você quiser utilizar um controle mais específico, utilize uma das opções a seguir:
  • create_reports
    • Criar relatório SQL
    • A possibilidade de criar e editar, mas não executar relatórios SQL
  • execute_reports
    • Execute SQL Reports
    • A possibilidade de executar, mas não criar ou editar relatórios SQL

4.8.2.10. Granular Plugins Permissions

If the staff member has 'plugins' permissions they have the ability to perform all of these actions. If you would like to control reports permissions on a more granular level choose from these options:
  • configure
    • Configure plugins
    • The ability to run the 'configure' section of a plugin if it has one
  • manage
    • Manage plugins
    • The ability to install or uninstall plugins
  • report
    • Use report plugins
    • The ability to use report plugins
  • tool
    • Use tool plugins
    • The ability to use tool plugins

4.9. Patron Information

Quando visualizar o registro de usuário, você terá a opção de visualizar a informação de uma das diversas abas no lado esquerdo do registro.
  • Get there: Patrons > Browse or search for patron > Click patron name

4.9.1. Empréstimo

For instruction on checking items out, view the Checking Out section of this manual.

4.9.2. Detalhes

All patron information will appear on the Details tab. This includes all the contact information, notes, custom patron attributes, messaging preferences, etc entered when adding the patron.
In the case of patrons who are marked as 'Child' or 'Professional' and their Guarantors additional information will appear on their record.
  • Uma criança irá listar seus Responsáveis
  • No registro do 'Responsável', todas as crianças e/ou profissionais serão listados

4.9.2.1. Circulation Summary

Abaixo das informações de usuário na tela de detalhes há uma tabela que exibe os exemplares que foram emprestados, que estão em atraso ou reservados.
Se eles tem família, o funcionário poderá acessar quais materiais os outros membros da família emprestaram.
The Restrictions tab will show for all patrons. If the patron has no restrictions you will see that on the tab.
If the patron has restrictions on their account the tab will show the number and the description.
Using the 'Add manual restriction' button you can add a restriction to the patron record from here.

4.9.3. Multas

O histórico completo do usuário aparecerá na aba Multas. Ao contrário do que parece indicar pelo nome, esta aba não exibe apenas informações sobre multas, ela também informa taxas de inscrição, locação, reserva e outras cobranças que houver sobre o usuário.
The table will show you the following columns:
  • Date: the date the charge/payment was posted
    • In the case of fines this will be the last day that the fine was accrued
  • Description: a description of the charges including the due date for overdue items and a link to the item record where one is available
  • Note: any notes about this charge/payment
  • Amount: the total amount of the payment or charge
  • Outstanding: the amount still due on charge

4.9.3.1. Aplicar Multas

Most fees and fines will be charged automatically if the fines cron job is running:
  • Fines will be charged based on your Circulation & Fines Rules
  • Hold fees will be charged based on the rules you set in the Patron Types & Categories administration area
  • Rental fees will be charged based on the settings in your Item Types administration area
  • Marcar um exemplar como 'Perdido' no módulo de catalogação fará com que o usuário seja automaticamente cobrado pelo custo de reposição deste exemplar

4.9.3.2. Pay/Reverse Fines

Cada linha de exemplar pode ser paga por completo usando a aba 'Pagar multas'.
  • Cada linha de exemplar pode ser paga por completo, perdoada parcialmente ou cancelada.
  • Pay a fine in full
    • Clique em "Pagar" ao lado da multa que você deseja pagar por inteiro
    • O total da multa será gerado na caixa "Coletado dos usuários"
    • Clique em "Confirmar"
    • A multa será removida e será exibida como paga.
  • Pay a partial fine
    • Clique em "Pagar" ao lado da multa que você deseja pagar parcialmente
    • Digite a quantia que você está recebendo do usuário na caixa 'Coletar do Usuário'
    • Clique em "Confirmar"
    • A multa será atualizada para exibir a multa original, e o valor devedor atualizado
  • Pay an amount towards all fines
    • Clique no botão "Pagar Quantia"
    • Digite a quantia que você está recebendo do usuário em 'Recolher do Usuário". A soma de todas as multas é exibida em 'Todas de Quantias Devidas"
    • Clique em "Confirmar"
    • Os totais de multas serão atualizados com o pagamento aplicados às multas mais antigas primeiro.
  • Pay Selected fines
    • Clicque na caixa de seleção próxima às multas que deseja pagar e clique "Pagar Selecionadas"
    • Digite uma quantia oara pagar das multas.
    • Clique em "Confirmar"
    • O total de multas será atualizado com o pagamento aplicado as multas mais antigas primeiro.
  • Writeoff a single fine
    • Clique em "Cancelamento" ao lado da multa se você quiser perdoá-la.
    • Todas as multas serão removidas da lista de multas pendentes e exibidas como pagas.
  • Writeoff All fines
    • Clique no botão "Cancelar Tudo"
    • Todas as multas serão removidas da lista de multas pendentes e exibidas como pagas.
  • If you accidentally mark and item as paid, you can reverse that line item by clicking 'Reverse' to the right of the line
    • Quando clicar, uma nova linha de exemplar será adicionada a conta, exibindo o pagamento como revertido

4.9.3.3. Creating Manual Invoices

Para taxas que não são criadas automaticamente, bibliotecários podem criar uma fatura manual
  • First choose the type of invoice you would like to create
    • To add additional values to the manual invoice type pull down menu, add them to the MANUAL_INV Authorized Value
    • Importante

      The value set as the Authorized Value for the MANUAL_INV authorized value category will appear as the Description and the Authorized Value Description will be used as the amount.
  • Se a taxa for associada a um exemplar, você pode digitar seu código de barras, assim a linha do exemplar exibirá um link para aquele material específico
  • O campo de descrição é onde você irá digitar a descrição da cobrança
  • No campo de valor, não digite símbolos de unidades monetárias, apenas números e decimais

4.9.3.4. Creating Manual Credits

O crédito manual pode ser utilizado para pagar parte de multas ou para perdoar uma multa.
  • Primeiro escolha o tipo de crédito que você quer aplicar
  • Se este crédito está associado a um exemplar você pode inserir seu código de barras, assim o exemplar da linha cria um link para o exemplar correto
  • O campo de descrição é onde você irá digitar a descrição do crédito
  • No campo de valor, não digite símbolos de unidades monetárias, apenas números e decimais

4.9.3.5. Imprimindo faturas

À direita de cada linha da conta há um link para impressão. Clicando neste link uma nota será impressa para o exemplar da linha que inclue a data e a descrição do exemplar com o total a ser pago para esta conta.

4.9.4. Lista de circulação

Uma lista de todas as listas de circulação de periódicos pertencentes ao usuário estará acessível pela aba 'Listas de circulação' no registro do usuário.
Nesta aba você poderá ver e editar todas as listas de circulação que este usuário possui.

4.9.5. Histórico de circulação

The circulation history tab will appear if you have set the intranetreadinghistory preference to allow it to appear. If you have the OPACPrivacy system preference set to 'Allow' and the patron has decided that the library cannot keep this information this tab will only show currently checked out items.
Se você quiser exportar a lista de códigos de barras dos materiais emprestados no dia, você pode encontrar esta opção no menu 'Mais', no lado superior direito da página.
Gerará um arquivo de texto com um código de barras por linha.

4.9.6. Log de alterações

If you have set your BorrowersLog to track changes to patron records, then this tab will appear. The Modification Log will show when changes were made to the patron record. If you also have turned on the IssueLog and ReturnLog you will see checkins and outs on this screen as well.
  • O campo do Funcionário exibe o número do usuário para o funcionário que fez as alterações
  • The module lists 'MEMBERS' for the patron module
  • The action will tell you what action was being logged
  • The Object field lists the borrowernumber that is being modified (in the example above, it was my changing my own record)

4.9.7. Correspondências

The patron's messaging preferences are set when adding or editing the patron. This tab will show the messages that have been sent and those that are queued to be sent:
Clicando no título da mensagem irá expandir a visualização para exibir o texto completo da mensagem enviada.

4.9.8. Estatísticas

Depending on what you set for the values of your StatisticsFields system preference, you can see statistics for one patron's circulation actions.

4.9.9. Arquivos

If you set the EnableBorrowerFiles preference to 'Do' the Files tab will be visible on the patron information page.
Aqui você pode enviar arquivos para anexar no registro de usuário.
Todos os arquivos carregados aparecerão abaixo do formulário no qual arquivos adicionais foram carregados.

4.9.10. Sugestões de aquisição

Caso o usuário tenha feito alguma sugestão de aquisição, você poderá ver estas sugestões na aba do registro do usuário.
A partir daí, você poderá ver todas as sugestões feitas pelo usuário e seu status. Você também pode criar uma sugestão de compra em nome do usuário clicando em 'Nova sugestão de compra' na barra superior.
Learn more about Purchase suggestions in the Acquisitions chapter of this manual.

4.10. Pesquisar Usuários

Ao clicar no link para o módulo dos Usuários, aparecerá um painel de pesquisa para os usuários. A partir dele, é possível executar pesquisas sobre um usuário usando o seu nome ou código de barras na caixa de pesquisa.
Ao clicar no sinal de adição (+) à direita do caixa de pesquisa irão aparecer opções avançadas de pesquisa, com mais filtros. Incluem-se aí a limitação por categoria de usuário e/ou biblioteca.
Dependendo do que você escolheu em 'Campos de pesquisa' você pode pesquisar por usuários por diversas maneiras.
  • Standard:
    • Digite qualquer parte do nome, username, e-mail ou código de barras dele
  • E-mail:
    • Digite qualquer parte do e-mail dele e selecione 'Contém' ao invés de 'Começa com'
  • Borrower number:
    • Digite o número de usuário do Koha
  • Phone number:
    • Digite o número do telefone exatamente como está no sistema ou usando espaços entre cada lote de números.
    • Exemplo: Para encontrar (21) 5555-1212 você pode pesquisar exatamente como foi digitado ou por 21 5555 1212
  • Street address:
    • Insira qualquer parte do endereço do usuário (qualquer dos campos de endereço) e selecione 'Contém' no lugar de 'Começa com' para encontrar a expressão em qualquer lugar do endereço
  • Data de nascimento
    • Uma dica irá surgir indicando como deve ser inserida a data de nascimento. Em geral as bibliotecas adotam o formado MM/DD/AAAA para a busca por aniversariantes
Você pode escolher tanto entre realizar pesquisas por campos que começam com a palavra inserida quanto que contém esta palavra. A opção 'Contém' funcionará como busca curinga.
Você também pode escolher como seus resultados serão ordenados utilizando a lista 'Ordenar por' no final do formulário.
Pode também navegar pelos registros de usuário clicando nas letras existentes no topo.

Capítulo 5. Circulação

Funções de circulação podem ser acessadas de diversas maneiras. Na página principal da interface administrativa existem alguns links rápidos no centro da página para emprestar, devolver ou transferir itens. Para uma lista completa das funções de circulação você pode visitar a página de Circulação que está listada no topo da página.
Before circulating your collection you will want to set your Global System Preferences, Basic Parameters and Patrons & Circulation Rules.
Na tela de Circulação você pode alternar entre as abas na caixa de pesquisa rápida na parte superior da tela utilizando as seguintes teclas de atalho:
  • vá para a busca no catálogo com Alt+Q
  • jump to the checkout with Alt+U
    • this will not work for Mac users
  • vá para a tela de devolução com Alt+R

Nota

Mac users use the OPTION button in place of ALT

5.1. Check Out (Issuing)

To begin the checkout process you must enter the patron barcode or part of their name. The checkout option appears in three main places:
  • Check out option on the top of the main staff client
  • Check out option on the patron record
  • Check out option on the quick search bar on the circulation page

5.1.1. Checking Items Out

Para emprestar um material a um usuário, pesquise primeiro pelo usuário utilizando uma das várias opções listadas acima.
At the top of the Check Out screen is a box for you to type or scan the item's barcode into.
  • Importante

    Many modern barcode scanners will send a 'return' to the browser, making it so that the 'Check Out' button is automatically clicked
  • If the barcode is not found you will be prompted to use fast cataloging to add the item. Learn more about fast cataloging later in this manual.
  • If you have itemBarcodeFallbackSearch set to 'Enable' then you can enter a keyword search in this box instead of just a barcode (this will make it possible to check out using title and/or call number).
Below the box for the barcode there may be options for you to override the default due date for the item.
  • This option will only appear if you have set the SpecifyDueDate system preference to allow staff to override the due date
Na parte inferior da página há um resumo dos exemplares atualmente emprestados pelo usuário e a data de devolução. Os itens emprestados hoje aparecerão no topo.

Nota

Se o horário de devolução está registrado como 00:00 então o material é para empréstimo de um dia. O tempo final para devolução de materiais de empréstimo de um dia será 23:59, que é o último minuto do dia.
If you have set your ExportWithCsvProfile preference, you will also see the option to export the patron's current checkout information using a CSV Profile or ISO2709 (MARC21) format.
Também no rodapé da página está a lista dos exemplares que o usuário reservou
From the holds list you can suspend or resume patrons holds using the options at the bottom of the list if you have the SuspendHoldsIntranet preference set to 'allow.'

Nota

If you have your AutoResumeSuspendedHolds preference set to "Don't allow" then you will not have the option to put an end date on the hold suspension
Se existem notas no registro do usuário as mesmas aparecem à direita da caixa de empréstimo
Se o usuário tem uma reserva em espera na biblioteca, aparecerá uma mensagem do lado direito da caixa de empréstimo para que o funcionário possa ver se existe outro exemplar disponível para oferecer ao usuário

5.1.1.1. Imprimindo Recibos

Quando você tiver emprestado todos os exemplares para o usuário, você pode imprimir para ele um recibo clicando no botão 'Imprimir' no topo da página e escolhendo 'Imprimir recibo' ou 'Recibo rápido'.
If you have the CircAutoPrintQuickSlip preference set to 'open a print quick slip window' you can simply hit enter on your keyboard or scan a blank piece of paper with your barcode scanner. The idea being that you're "checking out" a blank barcode which triggers Koha to print the 'Quick slip.'
O segundo é que você pode clicar no botão imprimir no topo da tela e escolher 'Imprimir comprovante' ou 'Comprovante rápido'
Se você selecionar 'Imprimir Recibo' será impressa uma lista de todos os exemplares emprestados pelo usuário, inclusive aqueles emprestados anteriormente. Escolhendo 'Imprimir Recibo Rápido' irá imprimir uma lista com apenas os exemplares emprestados hoje.
What prints on the slips can be customized by altering the slip templates under the Notices & Slips tool.

5.1.1.2. Limpar Informação do usuário

When you're done checking an item out if you have the DisplayClearScreenButton preference set to 'Show' you can clear the current patron by clicking the X in the top right of the patron's info to remove the current patron from the screen and start over.
If you have the CircAutoPrintQuickSlip preference set to 'clear the screen' then you simply need to hit enter or scan a blank barcode and the screen will be cleared of the current patron.

5.1.2. Mensagens de empréstimo

Se você emprestar um item que tem mais de uma parte e catalogou esta informação no subcampo 3 do registro do Item (no MARC21), uma mensagem irá aparecer avisando quantos itens terá que ser emprestado.
Há momentos em que Koha vai impedir o funcionário de emprestar exemplares a um usuário. Quando isso acontecer, aparecerá um aviso notificando o funcionário do porquê de o leitor não poder emprestar mais materiais.
  • Patron owes too much in fines
    • You can set the amount at which patron checkouts are blocked with the noissuescharge system preference
  • Patron has been barred from the library
  • Patron needs to confirm their address
    • This can be set by the librarian editing a patron record and adding a flag
  • Patrons has lost their library card
    • This can be set by the librarian editing a patron record and adding a flag

5.1.3. Avisos de empréstimos

Algumas vezes os empréstimos irão disparar mensagens de aviso que aparecerão em uma caixa amarela acima do campo de empréstimo. estes avisos precisam ser validados antes que você possa prosseguir com os empréstimos.
  • Usuário não possui multas pendentes
  • Exemplar reservado para outro usuário
  • Exemplar deve estar na estante de reservas aguardando por outro usuário
  • Exemplar já emprestado para este usuário
  • Exemplar emprestado para outro usuário
  • Exemplar não emprestável
  • Patron has too many things checked out and AllowTooManyOverride is set to 'Allow'
  • Patron has too many things checked out and AllowTooManyOverride is set to "Don't allow"
  • Item cannot be renewed
  • Barcode not found
  • Item being checked out is marked as 'lost'
    • Depending on the value in your IssueLostItem preference, you may just see a warning
      or a confirmation box
  • Exemplar que será emprestado não é recomendado para usuários desta idade
  • Item being checked out meets the decreaseLoanHighHolds system preference criteria

5.2. Renewing

Checked out items can be renewed (checked out for another period of time) based on your circulation rules and renewal preferences.
If you allow it, patrons can renew their own items via the OPAC, but sometimes you'll need to help them by renewing their items via the staff client.
To renew items checked out to a patron, you can do one of two things.
The first is to visit their details page or checkout page and review their checkout summary at the bottom.
In the Renew column you will see how many times each item has been renewed and a checkbox to renew the item for the patron. Check the boxed of the items you would like to renew and click the 'Renew or Return checked items' button, or to renew all items checked out to the patron simply click the 'Renew all' button.
Sometimes renewals will be blocked based on your circulation rules, to override this block you must have your AllowRenewalLimitOverride preference set to 'Allow'. If you allow renewal limit overrides, you will see a checkbox at the bottom left of the circulation summary. Check that box and then choose the items you would like to renew.
Checking that box will add checkboxes in the renew column above where before the item was not renewable.
The second option is to visit the 'Renew' page found under the Circulation menu.
And scan the barcodes of the items you would like to renew.
If the item is renewed you will receive a confirmation message.
If the barcode is not found you will be presented with an error.
If the item is not actually checked out you will also receive an error.

5.3. Check In (Returning)

A devolução de exemplares pode ser feita a partir de diferente lugares
  • A caixa de devolução na tela principal da interface administrativa
  • O link de devolução na barra de pesquisa rápida na página de Circulação
  • O link de devolução no resumo de empréstimos do usuário
  • A página de devolução sob o menu Circulação

5.3.1. Devolvendo itens em

Para devolver um item digitalize o código de barras para o item na caixa fornecida. Um resumo de todos os itens devolvidos aparecerá debaixo da caixa de devolução
Se estiver devolvendo exemplares que foram colocados na caixa de retorno enquanto a biblioteca estava fechada, você pode selecionar o modo 'Caixa de devolução' antes de escanear os exemplares. Com este método a data de retorno será a última data em que a biblioteca esteve aberta.
Pode escolher perdoar todas as multas de atraso para os itens que estão emprestados clicando na caixa respectiva antes de ler o itens.
If you have the SpecifyReturnDate preference set to 'Allow' you will be able to arbitrarily set the return date from below the check in box.

5.3.2. Mensagens de devolução

Existem várias mensagens que podem aparecer quando retornar itens:
  • If you are checking an item in at a library other than the home branch, a message will appear asking you to transfer the book to the home library
    • Depois que este exemplar é devolvido o status do exemplar mudará no catálogo para 'em trânsito'
    • To mark an item as back at the home branch, check the item in at the home branch
      • Uma mensagem aparecerá para indicar que o exemplar não está emprestado, mas o status constará como disponível no catálogo. Este passo é necessário para marcar exemplares como recebidos na biblioteca de origem.
  • Se você estiver registrando a devolução de um exemplar que tem multiplas partes ou peças uma mensagem irá aparecer alertando sobre o número de peças que você deve receber
  • If you're checking an item in that has a hold on it, you will be prompted to confirm the hold
    • Clicando no botão Confirmar reserva irá marcar o exemplar como 'aguardando retirada' na biblioteca
    • Ao clicar no botão de Imprimir Comprovante e Confirmar, o item será marcado como esperando retirada na biblioteca, e na biblioteca ficará disponível um recibo com as informações do usuário para imprimir e por no livro
    • Ignorar a reservar vai deixar o estado do item como disponível, mas deixa o item em reserva (não cancela)
  • If you're checking in an item that has a hold on it at another branch you will be prompted to confirm and transfer the item
    • Clicando em Confirmar reserva e no botão Transferir irá marcar o exemplar como 'em trânsito' para a biblioteca em que a reserva foi feita
    • Clicando no botão Imprimir recibo, transferir e confirmar irá marcar o item como em transito para a biblioteca em que foi realizada a reserva e imprimir um recibo impresso para a biblioteca atual com o livro e as informações do usuário
    • Ignorar a reservar vai deixar o estado do item como disponível, mas deixa o item em reserva (não cancela)
  • If you have the system showing you fines at the time of checkin (FineNotifyAtCheckin) you will see a message telling you about the fine and providing you a link to the payment page for that patron

5.4. Mensagens de circulação

Mensagens de circulação são mensagens curtas que os bibliotecários podem deixar para seus usuários ou seus colegas e que aparecem durante a circulação.

5.4.1. Configuração de Mensagens

Circulation messages are set up as Authorized Values. To add or edit Circulation Messages you want to work with the BOR_NOTES value.
The 'Description' field can hold a canned message that you would like to appear on the patron's record.

Importante

The 'Description' field is limited to 80 characters, but the patron message field can hold more than that. Enter 80 characters in the 'Description' field and then type the rest on the patron record.

5.4.2. Adicionando uma mensagem

Quando estiver na aba de empréstimo do usuário você verá um link "Adicionar uma nova mensagem 'à direita da caixa de empréstimo.
Quando você clicar em "Adicionar uma nova mensagem", você será solicitado a escolher se a mensagem é para os bibliotecários ou do patrono e da mensagem você gostaria de deixar.

Nota

A message for the patron will also show to the library staff.

5.4.3. Visualizando mensagens

Circulation messages meant for the staff and/or the patron will appear on the patron's checkout screen to the right of the checkout box. Messages in bold and red are meant for the library staff only, whereas messages in regular italics font are meant for the patron and the librarian.
Circulation messages meant for the patron will also appear when they log into the OPAC.

5.5. Reservas

Koha allows patrons to put things on hold. A 'Hold' is a way to reserve an item. Depending on your circulation and fine rules and hold preference settings patrons will be able to place items on hold for pickup at the library at a later date/time.

5.5.1. Reservando na Interface administrativa

Existem diversas maneiras para efetuar reservas pelos funcionários. A mais óbvia é usar o botão 'Reservar' no topo de qualquer registro bibliográfico.
Você pode também clicar no link menor 'Reservar' no topo da página de resultados do catálogo, ou no link 'Reservas' em cada resultado.
Você será solicitado para pesquisar pelo usuário por código de barras ou qualquer parte de seu nome no início do processo.
Se você quiser procurar pelo usuário primeiro e então o registro para reservar, você pode abrir o cadastro do usuário e clicar no botão 'Pesquisar para reservar'.
Depois de clicar no botão, você será levado a página de pesquisa no catálogo onde você pode encontrar o(s) exemplar(es) que você deseja reservar. Sob cada título na tela de resultados você verá uma opção 'Reservar para usuário.'
Se você quer reservar múltiplos itens de uma lista, clicando nas caixas de seleção e posteriormente no botão 'Reservar'.
Dependendo de quantos exemplares você escolher para reservar de uma vez você verá um formulário de reserva diferente. Se você estiver reservando em apenas um registro bibliográfico, você verá uma lista de todos os exemplares disponíveis para reserva.
  • Digite quaisquer notas aplicáveis a esta reserva
  • Escolha a biblioteca na qual o usuário irá retirar o exemplar
  • If the patron wants the hold to start on a date other than today, enter that in the 'Hold starts on date' field
  • If the patron has specified that they don't want the item after a certain date, or if you have limits on hold lengths, you can enter an expiration date for the hold in the 'Hold expires on date'
    • To have expired holds canceled automatically you will need to have the Expired Holds cron job set to run on a regular basis.
  • Depois, escolha se você quer reservar o próximo item disponível ou um item específico.
Se você estiver reservando mais de um item eles serão apresentados com os próximos disponíveis de cada título. Se nenhum item estiver disponível para reserva, será informado na tela de confirmação.
Uma vez que sua reserva foi efetuada, se você gostaria de ter Koha esqueça de que você usou a função 'Pesquisar para reservar' você pode optar por ter Koha' esquecer 'o nome do usuário, clicando na seta à direita no botão 'Reservar' nos resultados da pesquisa e escolher a opção 'Esquecer'.

5.5.2. Gerenciar reservas

Holds can be altered and canceled from the Holds tab found on the left of the bibliographic record.
From the list of holds you can change the order of the holds, the pickup location, suspend and/or cancel the hold.

Nota

If you have your AutoResumeSuspendedHolds preference set to "Don't allow" then you will not have the option to put an end date on the hold suspension

Nota

Depending on how you have your HidePatronName system preference set the list may show card numbers instead of names in the Patron column like in the image above.
Para reorganizar ou excluir reservas, simplesmente faça a seleção em 'Prioridade' ou clique nas setas a direita para alterar a ordem.
Se você usar a lista suspensa de prioridades para reordenar ou apagar empréstimos você terá que clicar em 'Atualizar empréstimos' para salvar as alterações.
Ao clicar na seta para baixo no lado direito da reserva fará com que ela ocupe o último lugar da lista, mesmo que mais pedidos de reserva sejam feitos.
Por exemplo, a biblioteca tem clientes internos que estão autorizados pegar livros ao mesmo tempo por meses. Não seria justo com outros clientes se clientes internos fossem capazes de conferir um novo livro e mantê-lo durante meses. Por esta razão, o pedido dos clientes internos é mantido no último lugar da fila até que todo mundo que queria ler esse livro já o tenha lido.
If a patron asks to have their hold suspended and you have the SuspendHoldsIntranet system preference set to 'allow' you can do so by clicking the Suspend button to far right. If the patron gives you a date for the items to become unsuspended you can enter that in the date box and click the 'Update hold(s)' button to save your changes.
To delete or cancel a hold click the red 'X' to the right of the hold line. To delete/cancel a bunch of holds you can choose 'del' from pull down to the left of each line and then click 'Update hold(s)' at the bottom of the list.

5.5.3. Recebendo reservas

When items that are on hold are checked in or out the system will remind the circulation librarian that the item is on hold and offer them options for managing the hold.
When you check in an item that has a hold on it the system will ask you to either confirm and transfer the item
or just confirm the hold
Clicking the Confirm button will mark the item as on hold for the patron. If the item needs to be transferred the item will also be marked as in transit to the proper branch. Clicking 'Ignore' will retain the hold, but allow you to check the item out to another patron. Choosing to confirm and print will present you with a printable page that you can slip inside the book with the necessary hold and/or transfer information.
Uma vez confirmada a reserva ela será exibida no registro do usuário e na tela de empréstimo sob a aba 'Reservas'.
O registro do item agora irá informar que está reservado.
Em alguns casos um usuário pode retirar uma reserva para seu amigo (ou alguém de sua casa). Neste caso, você precisa ter certeza que a reserva está cancelada quando emprestar para outra pessoa. Quando tentar emprestar um item que está aguardando outra pessoa será apresentado uma mensagem de alerta.
Aqui você pode emprestar o exemplar para o usuário e calcelar a reserva.

5.6. Transferências

If you work in a multi-branch system you can transfer items from one library to another by using the Transfer tool.
  • Get there: Circulation > Transfer
To transfer an item
  • Click 'Transfer' on the Circulation page
    • Digite a biblioteca para qual você quer transferir o item
    • Escaneie ou digite o código de barras do exemplar que você deseja transferir
  • Clique 'Enviar'
  • O item agora irá informar que está em trânsito
  • When the item arrives at the other branch the librarian must check the item in to acknowledge that it is no longer in transit
  • The item will not be permanently moved to the new library
    • O exemplar exibe a mesma 'Biblioteca de Origem' mas teve atualizada a 'Localização Atual' para indicar onde ele se localiza no momento

5.7. Set Library

Por padrão você irá entrar na interface administrativa como se estivesse na sua biblioteca de origem. Esta biblioteca aparece na parte superior direita da tela da interface administrativa.
Esta é a biblioteca que as transações ocorrerão. Se você estiver em outra biblioteca (ou em um bookmobile) você precisa alterar a sua biblioteca antes de iniciar a circulação de exemplares. Para isso, você precisa clicar em 'Alterar biblioteca' no topo direito da página de circulação.
Quando vocẽ tiver salvo suas alterações, sua nova biblioteca irá aparecer no topo direito.

5.8. Catalogação expressa

Sometimes circulation librarians need to quickly add a record to the system for an item they are about to check out. This is called 'Fast Add.' To allow circulation librarians access to the Fast Add Cataloging tool, simply make sure they have the fast_cataloging permissions. There are two ways to add titles via fast add. If you know that you're about to check out an item that isn't in you catalog you can go to the Circulation module and click 'Fast cataloging.'
The cataloging interface will open up with the short cataloging record:
Após adicionar seus dados de catalogação será pedido os dados do item. Informe o código de barras, código da coleção, etc e salve o item antes de emprestá-lo.
A outra maneira para uma catalogação expressa é pela tela de devolução. Quando você digitar um código de barras que o Koha não encontrar, você poderá usar a catalogação expressa para adicionar o item ao Koha e emprestá-lo.
Clicando em 'Catalogação expressa' te levará ao formulário de catalogação expressa que poderá inserir a informação do título
Depois de clicar em 'Salvar' você será levado para o registro do item onde o código de barras já estará preenchido com o código de barras que você está tentando emprestar.
Após clicar em adicionar o item irá aparecer abaixo do formulário e então você poderá incluir seu próximo item da mesma maneira (se estiver adquirindo mais de um item).

5.9. Relatórios de circulação

Most reports can be found vai the Reports module, but some of the more common circulation reports are available right from the Circulation module.
  • Get there: Circulation > Circulation reports

5.9.1. Fila de reservas

Este relatório irá listar todas as reservas de sua biblioteca.
To generate this report, you must have the Build Holds Queue cron job running. This cron job is a script that should be run periodically if your library system allows borrowers to place on-shelf holds. This script decides which library should be responsible for fulfilling a given hold request.
It's behavior is controlled by the system preferences StaticHoldsQueueWeight and RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight.
Caso você não queira que todas as suas bibliotecas façam parte dos empréstimos por reserva automática, você pode listar quais bibliotecas participam deste processo inserindo o código de todas as bibliotecas participantes, separados por vírgulas (ex. "MPL, CPL, SPL, BML" etc.).
By default, the holds queue will be generated such that the system will first attempt to hold fulfillment using items already at the pickup library if possible. If there are no items available at the pickup library to fill a hold, build_holds_queue.pl will then use the list of libraries defined in StaticHoldsQueueWeight. If RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight is disabled ( which it is by default ), the script will assign fulfillment requests in the order the branches are placed in the StaticHoldsQueueWeight system preference.
Por exemplo, se o seu sistema tem três bibliotecas de tamanhos variados (pequena, média e grande) e você deseja que a maior incidência de reservas recaia sobre as bibliotecas maiores antes das menores, você pode configurar StaticHoldsQueueWeight para algo como "GDE,MED,PEQ".
Caso você queira que o encargo das reservas recaia de maneira equânime na rede de bibliotecas, simplesmente ative a preferência RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight.Quando esta preferência do sistema está ativa, a ordem na qual cada biblioteca será solicitada a atender reservas será aleatória a cada vez que a lista for gerada.
Deixar StaticHoldsQueueWeight vazio é contraindicado neste ponto. Isso irá fazer com que o script build_holds_queue ignore RandomizeHoldsQueueWeight, fazendo com que o script preencha as reservas de forma não aleatória, mas sim seguindo a ordem alfabética.

5.9.2. Reservas a confirmar

This report will show you all of the items that have holds on them that are available at the library for pulling. If the items are available at multiple branches then all branches with that item available will see the hold to pull until one library triggers the hold.
You can limit the results you see by using the Refine box on the left side of the page:

5.9.3. Reservas aguardando retirada

Este relatório irá exibir todas as reservas que estão aguardando a retirada pelos usuários.
Items that have been on the hold shelf longer than you normally allow (based on the ReservesMaxPickUpDelay preference value) will appear on the 'Holds Over' tab, they will not automatically be cancelled unless you have set the cron job to do that for you, but you can cancel all holds using the button at the top of the list.

5.9.4. Taxas de reservas

A Taxa de reservas auxiliar no desenvolvimento do acervo. Utilizar este relatório permite observar quantos usuários tem reservas em exemplares e quais você poderia comprar maior quantidade. Por padrão, está configurado para demandar 3 exemplares para cada reserva. O relatório irá informá-lo quantos exemplares são necessários para atingir esta cota.

5.9.5. Transferências a receber

Este relatório irá listar todos os exemplares que o Koha acredita que estão em trânsito para sua biblioteca.
Se suas transferências estão atrasadas para chegar na biblioteca, você verá uma mensagem informando o quão atrasados estes exemplares estão.

Importante

An item is considered late based on the number of days you have entered in the TransfersMaxDaysWarning system preference.

5.9.6. Atrasos

Importante

For libraries with a large patron base, this report may take a significant amount of time to run.

Nota

Large libraries can choose to filter the report before it runs by setting the FilterBeforeOverdueReport system preference to 'Require'.
Este relatório irá listar todos os exemplares em atraso na sua biblioteca.
O relatório pode ser filtrado utilizando o menu de opções encontrado no lado esquerdo do relatório.

Nota

The 'Show any items currently checked out' checkbox basically switches this from a report of overdues to a report of checkouts. It will show all titles checked out regardless of due date.

5.9.7. Atraso com multas

Este relatório irá mostrar-lhe qualquer atrasos em sua biblioteca que tenham acumulado multas sobre eles.
If you would like to limit the report you can use the pull down menu at the top to limit to a specific shelving location at your branch. To see overdues with fines at other branches you will have to change your branch or log in at that branch.

Importante

If you do not charge fines and/or don't have the fines cron job running you will see no data on this report.

5.10. Tracking In house Use

Many libraries track the use of items within the library. This can be done in Koha one of two ways. The first is to create one or more Statistical Patrons. When collecting items that have been used within the library, you will want to check them out to your statistical patron:
Instead of marking the item as 'checked out' the system will record that the item was used in house:
Repeat these steps for all items that have been used within the library to keep accurate statistics for item use.
The other way to record local use of items is to set your RecordLocalUseOnReturn preference to 'Record.' Then whenever you check an item in that is not checked out and not on hold a local use will be recorded.

Nota

If you have RecordLocalUseOnReturn set to 'Record' you can still use your statistical patrons to record local use as well.

5.11. In Processing / Book Cart Locations

Koha allows for handling temporary locations like the processing center and/or book carts throughout the library. For this feature to work you must first make sure you have authorized values set in the LOC category for PROC (Processing Center) and CART (Book Cart).
Next you need to set the NewItemsDefaultLocation system preference to PROC. This will set the new items to the Processing Center as their default location.
Create items with their desired final shelving location.
  • These newly cataloged items will be temporarily set to the PROC location and will display with whatever description PROC has. The original location code entered at item creation is stored in the new items column 'permanent_location', for future use. Items will stay in the PROC location until they are checked in. To have those items then move to the shelving cart:
    1. Turn on the InProcessingToShelvingCart system preference
    2. Check in those newly-created items and they will be moved to the location code of CART and display with whatever description CART has.
    3. A cron job runs at specified intervals to age items from CART to the permanent shelving location. (For example, an hourly cron entry of cart_to_shelf.pl --hours 3 where --hours is the amount of time an item should spend on the cart before aging to its permanent location.)
      • Nota

        If the ReturnToShelvingCart system preference is turned on, any newly checked-in item is also automatically put into the shelving cart, to be covered by the same script run.
      • Importante

        Checkins with confirmed holds will not go into the shelving cart. If items on the shelving cart are checked out, the cart location will be cleared.

5.12. Self Checkout

Koha comes with a very basic self checkout module. To enable this module you need to set the WebBasedSelfCheck preference to 'Enable.' To use this module you have to log in as a staff member with circulation permissions.

Nota

Create a staff patron specifically for this action so that you don't leave a real staff client logged into a computer all day
There is no link to the Self Checkout module, but a simple addition to the intranetuserjs system preference can add one.
$(document).ready(function(){ $("#login
      #submit").parent().after("<p><a
      href=\"http://YOUR_KOHA_OPAC_URL/cgi-bin/koha/sco/sco-main.pl\"
      target=\"_blank\">Self-Checkout</a></p>"); });

Importante

The code above has line breaks added to make it more readable, please be sure to enter the above as one line in when putting it in the system preference.
The link will then appear at the bottom of the log in page:
You can also access this module by going to : http://YOUR_KOHA_OPAC_URL/cgi-bin/koha/sco/sco-main.pl
When on the self checkout page depending on your value in the SelfCheckoutByLogin preference you will be asked to enter you cardnumber
or your username and password:
Once you're logged in to the self check module you will be asked to scan the items you are checking out
As you scan items they will appear below the barcode box
When you are finished scanning items it is important to click the 'Finish' button. This will prompt you to print a receipt and log you out of the self check module.
When attempting to check items out there are some instances where error messages will appear and the patron will be directed to the librarian. This will happen even if you are allowing overrides on circulation functions. Only a librarian can override a circulation block and so patrons must go to the librarian for help in these situations.

5.13. Offline Circulation Utilities

Koha allows for you to continue circulation actions while offline by using any one of three utilities.

5.13.1. Offline Circulation in Koha

If the AllowOfflineCirculation preference is set to 'Enable' the library staff can continue to perform circulation actions within Koha when the system is offline. You will want to visit http://your-koha-staff-client-url/cgi-bin/koha/circ/offline.pl at least once while online and bookmark that page. That is the page you will go to when you are offline.

Importante

The offline interface uses HTML LocalStorage, which depending on the browser and user setting, is limited to 2.5MB or 5MB per domain. This means that larger systems will not be able to syncronize their data and are recommended to use either the Firefox or Windows application for offline circulation.

5.13.1.1. Configurar

Antes que o sistema fique fora do ar pela primeira vez, acesse o módulo Circulação e clique em 'Interface de circulação offline'
Sincronize seus dados em cada computador que realiza circulações clicando em 'Sincronizar' à direita da tela.

Importante

The offline interface uses HTML LocalStorage, which depending on the browser and user setting, is limited to 2.5MB or 5MB per domain. This means that larger systems will not be able to syncronize their data and are recommended to use either the Firefox or Windows application for offline circulation.
Esta função permitirá que você baixe um arquivo contendo todos os dados de seus usuários e de circulação. Clique em 'Download de registros' na barra superior da página para sincronizar seus dados.
Quando seus dados forem baixados, você verá as últimas datas em que os dados foram sincronizados ao lado de cada conjunto de dados.
Isso deve ser feito regularmente, de modo a evitar perdas em caso de desconexão.

5.13.1.2. Circulação

When your system goes offline visit the Offline Circulation page (http://your-koha-staff-client-url/cgi-bin/koha/circ/offline.pl) in Koha and click 'Check out' or 'Check in' to perform offline actions.
O empréstimo é feito a partir da busca do usuário através de seu nome ou código de barras no topo na tela 'Empréstimo'. Depois de selecionar um usuário, surgirão todos os seus dados, incluindo multas e empréstimos feitos anteriormente.
Escaneie o código de barras do exemplar que você deseja emprestar e insira a data de devolução. Se você não inserir uma data de devolução, o Koha irá lhe solicitar uma.
Quando o exemplar é emprestado, ele aparece abaixo das informações do usuário.

5.13.1.3. Koha Offline Uploading

Quando o sistema voltar a funcionar, visita a página de sincronização no módulo de Circulação Offline e clique em 'Carregar transações'
After the files are uploaded you can click 'View pending offline circulation actions' on the right.
After clicking 'View pending offline circulation actions' you will be brought to a summary of all of the actions you loaded in to Koha in your *.koc file.
  • Assim que todos os logs de todos os computadores que registram circulação de materiais forem carregados, será possível selecionar todos ou apenas os que você deseja que sejam processados no Koha.
  • Click on the Process button and Koha will record every stored transaction one by one. For each transaction, the status will change to:
    • "Sucesso." se a transação foi processada corretamente
    • "Usuário não encontrado." se o número da carteirinha do usuário estiver incorreto
    • "Item não encontrado." se o código de barras do item estiver errado
    • "Item não emprestado." se você tentou devolver um item disponível
Quando finalizar você terá um resumo de todas as suas transações

5.13.2. Firefox Plugin

Franois Charbonnier

BibLibre

Editado por

Nicole C. Engard

Changed/edited content where necessary. 
2012
There is an offline circulation tool that you can add to your Firefox browser as an addon. To do so, just go to https://addons.mozilla.org/en/firefox/addon/koct/ page and click on the "install now" button. You may have to confirm the installation, just click on "install now" and then restart Firefox to complete the installation.
Once you have installed the plugins and restarted Firefox, you will see the Koha logo in the download bar at the bottom right of Firefox.
A click on the logo will open the tool in its own window.
The plugin consists of four tabs:
  • The Check Out tab is where you check out items
  • The Check In tab is where you check in items
  • The Log tab keeps track of every transaction done while in offline mode
    • The log will keep information until you empty it. Each time you open the plugin and it contains data in the log it will warn you
      If you'd like to clear the log, check the 'I want to delete rows' box before hitting the 'OK' button. Otherwise clicking 'OK' will keep the items in the log and let you continue working with the tool.
  • The Param tab is to set up the plugin
The first thing you want to do then is to set up the plugin. Go to the Param tab to set up the plugin
Answer the 4 questions presented:
  • Server = the URL of the librarian interface
  • Branch Code = the code for the branch where you are located
  • Username = your staff account login
  • Password = your staff account password

Importante

To save the settings, you will have to close the plugin window and re-open it by clicking again on the Koha logo in the add-on bar.

Nota

You can create a staff account dedicated to the offline circulation. So that, no matter who is at the circulation desk, they can all use the same login. Along those lines, you can use a group login that you already have in place for circulation as well.
Once you have everything set up you can start checking items in and out.
Checking out:
  • Go to the Check Out tab
  • Scan the patron barcode
  • Scan the item barcode
  • Clique 'Salvar'
Checking in:
  • Go to the Check In tab
  • Scan the item barcode
  • Click Save
Each time, you check out or check in an item, a new transaction is recorded in the local plugin database and you will see, at the bottom of the plugin how many transactions has been made during the offline circulation. For example, "10 Row(s) Added" means you did 10 transactions.
Then, if you want an overview of every transaction, go to the Log tab. This tab will show you the transactions in the plugin database

Nota

The status will be "Local." as long as you are offline and don't process the transactions into Koha.
When your Internet connection comes back up you will want to get these transactions in to Koha. Before processing these transactions you should be aware of a few issues.
Because you are not connected to your Koha database when using this plugin holds will need additional processing. If an item you check in while offline has a hold, the hold is kept on the item. Since, you can't confirm holds found during the processing of every check in, the holds stay on the item and will need to be managed later. If you only checked in a few items you can just keep a record of them all. If you checked in a lot of items you can use the Holds Queue once it rebuilds to see what holds made it to the shelf erroneously.
Similarly, if an patron card was expired, the offline circulation tool won't know about it, so the checkout will be recorded regardless of the patron's account being blocked normally.
You have two options for adding this data to Koha
  • Commit to Koha
    • If you checked in/out on more than one computer at the same time, what you want is to process every transaction consistently. Let's say for instance that one patron checked a book out on one computer and then checked the same book in on another computer. To be consistent, you need to record the check out first and then the check in. Not the opposite! To do so, you need to group every transaction in one place, sort them all and then, process everything. So, you need to use the "Commit to Koha" option from every plugin/computer you worked with. This way, the log will go to Koha and be accessible from the Offline Circulation page.
    • Get there: Circulation > Pending offline circulation actions
    • Assim que todos os logs de todos os computadores que registram circulação de materiais forem carregados, será possível selecionar todos ou apenas os que você deseja que sejam processados no Koha.
    • Click on the Process button and Koha will record every stored transaction one by one. For each transaction, the status will change to:
      • "Sucesso." se a transação foi processada corretamente
      • "Usuário não encontrado." se o número da carteirinha do usuário estiver incorreto
      • "Item não encontrado." se o código de barras do item estiver errado
      • "Item não emprestado." se você tentou devolver um item disponível
    • Quando finalizar você terá um resumo de todas as suas transações
  • Aplicar diretamente
    • If you performed all of the circulation actions on one computer then everything is sorted already so you can choose to "Apply directly"
    • The status column will be updated to let you know if the transactions were applied
      • "Sucesso." se a transação foi processada corretamente
      • "Usuário não encontrado." se o número da carteirinha do usuário estiver incorreto
      • "Item não encontrado." se o código de barras do item estiver errado
      • "Item não emprestado." se você tentou devolver um item disponível
    • Once you're finished you can review all of the items right in the Log tab
Once you are done you can clear the log by clicking Clear. If you don't you will be warned the next time you open the Offline Circulation tool.

5.13.3. Offline Circ Tool for Windows

The Offline Circulation Utility can be downloaded at: http://kylehall.info/index.php/projects/koha/koha-offline-circulation/
To generate a borrowers.db file for loading in to the Windows tool you will need to run the file generator via a cron job.

5.13.3.1. Upload Offline Circ File

The offline circulation tool for Windows will generate a KOC file that you can upload into Koha once your system comes back up.
No menu Circulação clique em 'Carregar arquivo de circulação off-line (.koc)'
Procurar em seu computador o arquivo *.koc.
Assim que o arquivo for carregado, clique para processar o arquivo
Quando concluída, você poderá carregar outro arquivo ou dirigir-se para ações de circulação off-line pendentes.
After clicking 'View pending offline circulation actions' you will be brought to a summary of all of the actions you loaded in to Koha in your *.koc file.
  • Assim que todos os logs de todos os computadores que registram circulação de materiais forem carregados, será possível selecionar todos ou apenas os que você deseja que sejam processados no Koha.
  • Click on the Process button and Koha will record every stored transaction one by one. For each transaction, the status will change to:
    • "Sucesso." se a transação foi processada corretamente
    • "Usuário não encontrado." se o número da carteirinha do usuário estiver incorreto
    • "Item não encontrado." se o código de barras do item estiver errado
    • "Item não emprestado." se você tentou devolver um item disponível
Quando finalizar você terá um resumo de todas as suas transações

Capítulo 6. Catalogação

Before you start cataloging in Koha you're going to want to do some basic setup. Refer to the Implementation Checklist for a full list of these things. Most importantly you're going to want to make sure that your Frameworks are all defined the way you want. Once in the cataloging module you will not be able to add or remove fields and subfields so your frameworks must be ready before you start cataloging.
You can also use OCLC Connexion to send records directly in to Koha. For more information on that please review the OCLC Connexion Setup appendix.
  • Get there: More > Cataloging

6.1. Bibliographic Records

In Koha the bibliographic record contains the main information related to the material. This includes things like the title, author, ISBN, etc. This information is stored in Koha in Marc (different flavors of Marc are supported in Koha). Once this information is saved, items or holdings can be attached.

6.1.1. Adding Records

Registros podem ser adicionados ao Koha via catalogação ou catalogação cooperativa. Se você deseja criar um registros utilizando um modelo em branco
  • Click 'Novo Registro'
    • Escolha o frameword no qual você quer que o seu registro seja baseado
Se você deseja catalogar um registro com base em um registro existente em outra biblioteca
  • Click 'Z39.50 Search'
    • Pesquisar pelo material que você quer catalogar
      • Nota

        If no results are found, try searching for fewer fields, not all Z39.50 targets can search all of the fields above.
    • Search targets can be altered by using the Z39.50 Admin area.
    • From the results you can view the MARC or Card view for the records or choose to Import them into Koha
      • Além do link de importação à direita de cada título, você pode clicar no título em que está interessado e surgirá um menu com links para ter uma visualização prévia do registro e possibilidade de importá-lo
      • Se você não encontrar o título que procura nos resultados de busca do Z39.50 você pode clicar no botão 'Nova busca' na parte inferior esquerda da tela de resultados
Quando você abrir uma planilha em branco ou tiver importado um registro via Z39.50 você será levado a um formulário onde continuará a catalogação
  • If you would rather not see the MARC tag numbers you can change the value in your hide_marc system preference or each user can check the box next to 'Show tags' at the top of the editor.
  • Para expandir ou ocultar uma tag, clique na descrição da tag
  • To get help from the Library of Congress on a Marc tag click the question mark (?) to the right of each field number
    • Se você acha que estas imagens confundem a tela você pode ocultá-los desmarcando o box "Exibir links para a documentação de tags MARC" no topo do editor
  • Sometimes fields may not be editable due to the value in your BiblioAddsAuthorities system preference. If you have this preference set to not allow catalogers to type in fields controlled by authorities you may see a lock symbol to the left of the field.
    • Se este ícone aparecer, você precisará clicar no icone no lado direito do campo para buscar por uma autoridade existente.
    • Na lista de resultados, clique 'Escolher autoridade' para trazer estas informações para o registro no catálogo
  • To duplicate a field click on the 'repeat this tag' icon to the right of the tag
    • Para mover os subcampos para a ordem correta, clique na seta para cima no lado esquerdo do campo
    • Para duplicar um subcampo clique no ícone de clonagem (para remover um campo copiado, clique no ícone de exclusão de clonagem) à direita do campo
    • Para remover um subcampo (se tiver mais que um do mesmo tipo), clique no sinal de subtração (-) à direita do campo
  • To use a plugin click on the icon to the right of the filed
    • Alguns campos fixos possuem informações que mudam com base no tipo de material que você está catalogando (por exemplo os campos 006 e 008)
  • Once you've finished, click the 'Save' button at the top and choose whether you want to save and view the bib record you have created or continue on to add/edit items attached to the record
    • Choosing 'Save and view record' will bring you right to the record you just cataloged
    • Choosing 'Save and edit items' will bring you to the add/edit item form after saving the bib record so that you can attach holdings
    • Choosing 'Save and continute editing' will allow you to save your work so far and keep you in the editor to continue working
  • Se você está para adicionar um registro duplicado no sistema, você será avisado sobre isto antes de salvar

6.1.2. Adding Analytic Records

Libraries sometimes make journal articles and articles within monographs and serials accessible to library patrons through analytics cataloging. Analytics cataloging creates separate bibliographic records for these articles, chapters, sections, etc. found within a larger resource such as a book, an article within a journal, newspaper or serial. In analytics cataloging, although a separate bib record is created for the title, it is not physically separated from the host item.  Learn more about Analytics in Chapter 13 of AACR2.
If you would like to catalog analytic records there are two options. One is to use the Easy Analytics funtion; the other is the Analytics Enhanced Workflow.

6.1.2.1. Easy Analytics

The Easy Analytics feature makes linking analytic records together easier. The first thing you need to do is set the EasyAnalyticalRecords preference to 'Display' and the UseControlNumber preference to 'Don't use.'
After cataloging your analytic record (see Adding Records for more on creating records) click 'Edit' from the normal view and choose to 'Link to Host Item'
Será solicitado um código de barras para o exemplar ao qual este registro deve ser ligado.
Após digitar um código de barras e clicar 'Selecionar' você receberá uma mensagem de confirmação.
O registro agora terá o campo 773 devidamente preenchido para completar o link.
Para ver todos os exemplares ligados a um registro, faça uma busca pelo registro, clique na aba Analíticas na esquerda e as analíticas relacionadas a cada código de barras serão exibidas na coluna 'Utilizada em'.

Nota

It is also possible to create analytic records from this screen by clicking on "Create Analytics"
Você também pode ver as analíticas relacionadas a este registro clicando em 'Exibir Analíticas' na parte superior do registro na visualização normal.
When looking at the anaytic record you will also see a link to the host item under the 'Host records' column in the holdings table when viewing the 'Analtyics' tab.

6.1.2.2. Analytics Enhanced Workflow

To use the Enhanced Workflow method of adding analytics, the first thing you need to do is set the EasyAnalyticalRecords preference to 'Don't display' and the UseControlNumber preference to 'Use.'
After cataloging your original record (see Adding Records for more on creating records) click 'New' from the normal view and choose to 'New child record.'
This will open a new blank record for cataloging. The blank record will only have the 773 field filled in properly to complete the link once the record is saved.
Para ver todos os exemplares ligados a um registro, faça uma busca pelo registro, clique na aba Analíticas na esquerda e as analíticas relacionadas a cada código de barras serão exibidas na coluna 'Utilizada em'.
Você também pode ver as analíticas relacionadas a este registro clicando em 'Exibir Analíticas' na parte superior do registro na visualização normal.
When looking at the anaytic record you will also see a link to the host item under the 'Host records' column in the holdings table when viewing the 'Analtyics' tab.

6.1.2.3. Editing Analytics

Caso você tenha linkado um registro analítico de forma incorreta, você pode remover este lnk editando o exemplar no registro analítico (não no registro hospedeiro). Para fazer isso, vá para o registro analítico e clique no botão 'Editar' e escolha 'Editar exemplares'. À esquerda de cada exemplar você verá as duas opções.
  • Clicando em 'Editar no hóspede' irá permitir que edite o item no registro hóspede.
  • Clicando 'Delink' irá remover o campo 773 e o relacionamento entre o analítico e o hóspede.

6.1.3. Editing Records

To edit a record you can click 'Edit Biblio' from the search results on the cataloging page
or by clicking the Edit button on the Bibliographic Record and choosing 'Edit Record'
O registro será aberto no editor MARC
The alternative is to search via Z39.50 to overlay your record with a fuller record found at another library. You can do this by choosing 'Replace Record via Z39.50' from the Edit menu.
Apenas se você escolher recuperar um registro no Z39.50 pesquisando em outras bibliotecas para o registro em questão.
Quando você tiver feito todas as edições, você pode clicar em 'Salvar' no topo do editor.
You can also use the edit menu to add your own custom cover image if you have either OPACLocalCoverImages and/or LocalCoverImages set to 'Display' by choosing 'Upload Image' from the menu.
Choosing to 'Upload Image' will take you to the Upload Local Cover Image Tool.

6.1.4. Duplicating Records

Sometimes a copy of the record you need to catalog can't be found via Z39.50. In these cases you can create a duplicate of similar record and edit the necessary pieces to create a new record. To duplicate an existing record click 'Edit as New (Duplicate)' from the Edit menu on the Bibliographic Record
This will open a new MARC record with the fields filled in with the values from the original Bibliographic Record.

6.1.5. Merging Records

If you would like to merge together multiple records you can do that via the Lists tool. Learn more here.

6.1.6. Deleting Records

To delete a bibliographic record simply choose the 'Edit' button and select 'Delete record'
Bibliographic records can only be deleted one all items have been deleted. If you try to delete a bibliographic record with items still attached you will see that the delete option is grayed out.

6.2. Item Records

In Koha each bibliographic record can have one or more items attached. These items are sometimes referred to as holdings. Each item includes information to the physical copy the library has.

6.2.1. Adding Items

After saving a new bibliographic record, you will be redirected to a blank item record so that you can attach an item to the bibliographic record. You can also click 'Add/Edit Items' from the cataloging search results
or you can add new item at any time by clicking 'New' on the bibliographic record and choosing 'New Item'
O formulário de edição do exemplar irá aparecer:
No mínino os seguintes campos devem ser preenchidos para novos materiais:
  • 2 - Fonte de classificação
  • a - Localização permanente
  • b - Current location
  • o - Número de chamada completo
  • p - Código de barras
  • v - Cost, replacement price
    • This value will be charged to patrons when you mark an item they have checked out as 'Lost'
  • y - Tipo de material do Koha
To make sure that these values are filled in you can mark them as mandator